Skip to main content

Full text of "First book of nature"

See other formats


i>^» 
":;iiii 


DAVID  O.  MCKAY  LIBRARY 


3  1404  00788  0518 


°ATE  DUE 


c 


°emcc 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2012  with  funding  from 
Brigham  Young  University-Idaho 


http://archive.org/details/firstbookofnaturOOtalm 


FIRST    BOOK 


OF 


NATURE, 


BY 


JAMES    E.   TALMAGE. 


PUBLISHED   BY 

THE     CONTRIBUTOR     COMPANY, 

SALT   LAKE   CITY,  UTAH. 
1888. 


Copyright  1888:— by  J.  E.  Talmage. 


FROM    THE    PRKSS   OF 

THE   DESERET   NEWS   COMPANY. 


PREFACE. 


g||N  PREPARING  this  little  volume,  the  author 
aS*  has  made  no  greater  pretension  than  is  implied 
£iS>  in  its  title.  The  matter  here  presented  is 
designed  to  assist  in  the  elementary  study  of 
the  simplest  objects  of  Nature;  such  as  ail  people 
have  more  or  less  necessity  of  dealing  with. 

The  order  in  which  the  topics  have  been  treated, 
is  the  one  that  appeared  most  natural,  and  easiest  to 
follow — animals,  plants,  and  minerals  of  earth,  and 
the  most  conspicuous  objects  of  the  heavens.  No 
detailed  classification  has  been  attempted;  nor  have 
technical  definitions  or  terms  been  employed;  but  it 
is  hoped  that  the  plan  here  adopted,  will  serve  the 
reader  as  an  introduction  to  a  more  thorough  and 
systematic  study  of  natural  science,  if  to  pursue 
such  should  be  his  desire. 

The  writer  has  sought  in  a  sincere  though  humble 
way  to  demonstrate  the  meaning  of  "Nature"  as 
defined  in  the  introductory  chapter;  that  Nature  is 
but  another  name  for  the  will  of  God  as  expressed  in 


iv  PREFACE. 

His  works.  Many  of  the  ideas  presented  are  of 
necessity  far  from  new — such  facts  have  long  been 
common  property  of  the  reading  public;  but  wherever 
cullings  have  been  made  from  standard  works,  credit 
has  been  given  in  the  body  of  the  book. 

All  the  illustrations  in  Parts  I,  III  and  IV  have 
been  taken  from  "Steele's  Zoology,"  "Geology,"  and 
"Astronomy,"  by  the  kind  permission  of  the  publish- 
ers, A.  S.  Barnes  &  Co.  of  New  York  and  Chicago. 

J.   E.  T. 

Salt  Lake  City,  Nov.,  1888. 


"And  this  our  life,  exempt  from  public  haunt, 
Finds  tongues  in  trees,  books  in  the  running  brooks, 
Sermons  in  stones,  and  good  in  everything." 


CONTENTS. 


Chapter  I.— Introduction  -  -  1 

PART  I. — The  Animal  Kingdom. 
Chapter  II. — Animals,  ...  5 

Chapter  III. — Apes  and  Monkeys,  -  -  7 

Chapter  IV. — Insectivorous  Animals:  Bats,  Moles,        12 
Chapter  V. — Carnivorous  Animals:   Cat  Family;  Dog 

Family;  Weasel  Family,        -  -  -16 

Chapter  VI. — Herbivorous  Animals:    Horse  Family; 

Ox  Family;  Hog,       -  24 

Chapter  VII. — Rodents  or  Gnawing  Animals:   Mice; 

Rats:  Gophers,  Squirrels;         -  -  -31 

Chapter  VIII.— The  Birds,  -  -  36 

Chapter  IX. — Birds  at  Home,  -  43 

ChapterX. — Birds  of  Prey:  Condor;  Eagles;  Hawks; 

Owls,  -  -  -  51 

Chapter  XI. — Climbing   Birds:    Woodpeckers;     Par- 
rots; Toucans,  -  -  -  -  58 
Chapter  XII. — Scratching  Birds:   Pigeons;  Domestic 

Fowls;  Running  Birds,  -  -  -  64 

Chapter  XIII. — Perching  Birds;   Water  Birds,  69 

Chapter  XIV.— Reptiles;  Turtles,  -  -         74 

Chapter  XV. — Snakes  and  Lizards,    -  -  78 

Chapter  XVI.— Frogs  and  Toads,  -  -         84 

Chapter  XVII.— Fishes,  ...  89 

Chapter  XVIII.— Some  Fishes,  -  -        95 

Chapter  XIX.— Insects,  -  -  99 

Chapter  XX.— Bees  and  Wasps,  -  -  -        103 

Chapter  XXI.— Ants,  Grasshoppers  and  Butterflies,     10!) 
Chapter  XXII.— Flies  and  Beetles,    -  -  114 

Chapter  XXIII.— Spiders,  -  -  -        120 


vi  CONTENTS. 

Page. 

Chapter  XXIV. — Worms  and  Snails,                 -  122 

Chapter  XXV.— Some  Tiny  Creatures,     -  -        128 

PART  II. — The  Vegetable  or  Plant  Kingdom. 

Chapter  XXVI.— Plants  and  How  they  Grow,  131 

Chapter  XXVII.— Plant  Roots,   -              -  135 

Chapter  XXVIII.— Plant  Stems,         -              -  140 

Chapter  XXIX. — Leaves,              -               -  -        146 

Chapter  XXX. — Some  Curious  Leaves,             -  150 

Chapter  XXXI — Flower-cups,      -               -  -        155 

Chapter  XXXII— How  Flowers  are  Fertilized,  159 

Chapter  XXXIII.— Fruits,           -              -  166 

Chapter  XXXIV.— Wandering  Seeds,              -  174 

Chapter  XXXV.— Parasitic  Plants,          -  -        180 

PART   III.-— The  Mineral  or  Stone  Kingdom. 

Chapter  XXXVI.— Rocks  and  Stones,               -  184 

Chapter  XXXVII.— Pebbles  and  What  They  Tell,  190 

Chapter  XXXVIII. — Sand  and  Sandstones,  195 

Chapter  XXXIX.  -  Mud  and  Mud-Stones,  -        199 

Chapter  XL.— About  Limestones,       -               -  203 

Chapter  XLI. — Limestone  Made  Over,      -  -        208 

Chapter  XL II.— Rocks  Formed  by  Heat:  Veins,  215 

Chapter  XL  I II.  —A  Talk  About  Coal,        -  -        221 

Chapter  XLIV. — Pictures  in  the  Rocks,            -  226 

Chapter  XLV.— Crystals,              -              -  234 

PART    IV.— The  Heavens. 

Chapter  XL VI.—  A  Glance  at  the  Sky,      -  -        239 

Chapter  XL VII.— The  Sun,                   -               -  245 

Chapter  XL VIII.— The  Moon;    Eclipses,          -  251 

Chapter  XL IX.— The  Stars.          -               -  -        258 

Chapter  L. — Conclusion,      -              -              -  264 


ILLUSTRATIONS 


Page. 

Fig.    1.— Bony  Skeleton  of  a  Cow,                -  -           6 

Fig.    2.— Gorilla,           ....  8 

Fig.    3.— Skeleton  of  Bat,                -               -  -          13 

Fig.    4.— Plan  of  Mole's  Dwelling,         -               -  15 

Fig.    5. — Weasel  in  its  Winter  Dress,          -  -         21 

Fig.    6.— Grizzly  Bear,                ...  23 

Fig.    7.— Stomach  of  Sheep,             -               -  -          27 

Fig.    8.— Asiatic  Elephant,  28 

Fig.    9. — Weaver  Bird's  Home,       -               -  -          46 

Fig.  10.— White-headed  Eagle,                -               -  53 

Fig.  11.— Box  Tortoise— With  Closed  Shell.  -         75 

Fig.  12. — River  Tortoise  or  "Snapping  Turtle,"  77 

Fig.  13.— Rattlesnake's  Skull  Showing  Fangs,  -          79 

Fig.  14.— Rattlesnake,                 ...  80 

Fig.  15. — Tadpole  Changes,              -               -  -          85 

Fig.  16.— Skeleton  of  Frog,       ...  85 

Fig.  17.— Skeleton  of  Fish,               -              -  -         90 

Fig.  18.— Humble  Bee  and  Honey  Cells,               -  105 

Fig.  19.— Tent  Caterpillar  Moth,     -               -  -        113 

Fig.  20.— Mosquito,  116 

Fig.  21.— Stag-horn  Beetle,               -               -  119 

Fig.  22.— Trichina  in  Flesh  of  Swine,                   -  126 

Fig.  23.— Chalk  under  the  Microscope,        -  -        128 

Fig.  24.— Amoeba,         ....  129 

Fig.  25. — Structure  of  Exogenous  Stem,      -  -        143 

Fig.  26. — Structure  of  Endogenous  Stem,  144 

Fig.  27.— Leaf,       -               ...               .  -        147 

Fig.  28.— Parts  of  a  Typical  Flower,     -               -  156 

Fig.  29.— Morning-glory  Flower,     -  -        158 

Fig.  30.— Pollen  Grain  from  Rose  Mallow,           -  159 


vm  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

P»ge. 

Fig.  31.— Fossil  Fern  in  Coal  Slate,  -              -       222 

Fig.  32.— Ammonites,  227 

Fig.  33.— Crinoid  or  "Stone  Lily,"  -               -        228 

Fig.  34.— Encrinital  Marble,  229 

Fig.  35.— Rain  Drop  Marks  in  Mud  and  Stone,          -        232 

Fig.  36.— Ripple  Marks  in  Stone,            -  -               233 

Fig.  37.— Cluster  of  Quartz  Crystals,  -               -        237 

Fig.  38.— Diagram  of  Earth's  Orbit,       -  -               248 

Fig.  39.— Diagram  of  Moon's  Orbit,  -               -        253 

Fig.  40.— Star  Cluster  in  Toucan,           -  -               262 

Fig.  41.— Annular  Nebula,               -  -               .263 


FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 


CHAPTER  I. 

INTRODUCTION. 


|§&N   THE  course  of   a  single  day,  such  a  great 
^JJ    variety  of  things  conies  before  our  view,  that 

?  their  names  and  definitions  alone  would  fill  a 
larger  volume  than  this.  Yet,  they  may  all 
be  classed  in  two  clearly  defined  groups.  Every 
object  is  either  a  natural  or  an  artificial  production; 
the  former  division  including  all  those  things  that 
have  not  been  in  any  way  changed  or  operated  upon 
by  man;  whereas,  artificial  things,  are  those  that  are 
made  from  natural  materials,  through  human  instru- 
mentality. Wood,  iron  and  stone  are  natural 
products  of  the  earth;  but  a  house  made  of  such 
materials  is  an  artificial  thing.  The  horses  that 
draw  our  vehicles  are  animals,  and  animals  constitute 
one  of  the  largest  divisions  of  natural  objects;  but 
the  wagon,  which  they  pull,  and   the   harness,    by 

which   they   are   attached,    are    artificial    products, 
2 


2  FIRST  BOOK   OF  NATURE. 

having  been   manufactured  through   the   agency  of 

man. 

In  the  course  of  this  little  book,  we  hope  to  devote 

some  attention  to  the  first  class  of  things,  or  natural 
objects — those   that   are   produced   without    human 

intervention,  through  the  operation  of  the  laws  of 
Nature.  Nature,  in  our  present  sense,  means  that 
system  and  order  of  things  about  us  which  is  inde- 
pendent of,  and,  indeed,  superior  to  human  action. 

Before  man  was  placed  on  earth,  there  was  day 
and  night,  summer  and  winter;  the  sun  shone,  and 
the  rains  fell;  seeds  sprouted,  and  flowers  and  fruits 
appeared  in  their  proper  season — these  things  are  not 
controlled  by  man;  they  operate  under  the  laws  of 
Nature.  Such  laws  have  been  in  force  since  the  far 
distant  days  of  creation,  when  Jehovah  spake,  and  as 
a  result  of  His  Almighty  word,  land  and  water  were 
formed,  the  grass,  and  the  herb  and  the  fruit  tree 
grew,  and  each  yielded  seed  after  its  kind;  the  sun 
became  visible  in  the  heavens  by  day,  and  the  moon 
and  stars  shed  their  inspiring  rays  over  the  sleeping 
earth;  the  fowl,  the  fish,  creeping  things  and  beasts 
came  forth  to  enjoy  the  life  allotted  to  them,  and 
to  accomplish  the  object  of  their  existence.  Such 
mighty  deeds  were  done  through  the  word  of  God, 
in  accordance  with  His  righteous  will;  yet  man  says 
these  things  were  natural  occurrences, — taking  place 
in  obedience  to  the  laws  of  Nature.  Nature  then  is 
but  another  name  for  the  will  of  God;  that  which 
He  decrees  is  done;  His  will  is  the  law  of  existence. 
Look  around  the  world  and  behold  the  uncounted 


INTRODUCTION.  3 

results  of  His  omnipotent  labors; — the  things  of 
Nature  have  been  called  the  thoughts  of  God — they 
are  indeed  an  embodiment  and  a  realization  of  His 
all-wise  designs.  By  learning  the  use  and  purposes 
of  things,  to  a  small  degree,  at  least,  we  grasp  the 
idea  of  their  Creator;  and  to  do  this  is  to  become 
truly  wise.  From  the  simplest  objects,  oftentimes 
the  deepest  lessons  may  be  learned: 

"The  waves  that  moan  along  the  shore, 

The  winds  that  sigh  in  blowing, 

Are  sent  to  teach  a  mystic  lore 

Which  men  are  wise  in  knowing." 

The  broad  pages  of  Nature's  book  are  open  for  us 
all  to  read;  but,  like  the  schoolboy,  poring  over  his 
simple  lesson,  we  can  study  best  with  the  assistance 
of  a  skillful  teacher;  and  the  wisest  instructor  is  the 
Author  of  that  great  volume.  Careful  thought  and 
prayerful  study,  are  the  mystic  raps,  before  which 
the  doors  of  Wisdom's  temple  swing,  and  by  which 
that  sacred  edifice  is  opened  for  our  use.  Let  us 
knock  and  gladly  enter,  remembering  ever  the 
sanctity  of  the  place,  and  the  holiness  of  our  sur- 
roundings. 

Confining  our  attention  now  to  the  class  of  natural 
things,  as  distinguished  from  others  which  are  the 
products  of  human  art,  the  objects  of  interest  that 
present  themselves  for  our  study,  are  so  numerous, 
that  they  bewilder  us  by  their  variety.  It  is  best, 
therefore,  that  we  follow  some  system  or  method  of 
classification  in  our  dealing  with  such  a  multitude  of 
things. 

We  are  all  familiar  with  the  sight  of  horses  and 


4  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

cattle,  of  dogs,  butterflies  and  bees,  and  many  other 
creatures  which  resemble,  to  some  degree,  one  or  the 
other  of  these;  all  such  are  called  Animals.  Besides 
these,  we  see  trees  and  shrubs,  grasses,  flowers  and 
weeds,  all  springing  from  the  soil,  and  these  we  know 
under  the  name  of  Plants.  And  again,  there  are 
pebbles,  and  boulders,  sand,  gravel,  and  clay,  all  of 
which  are  called  Stones. 

Every  natural  object  belongs  to  one  of  these  three 
groups,  which,  indeed,  have  been  called  the  Three 
Kingdoms  of  Nature: 

1.  The  Animal  Kingdom. 

2.  The  Vegetable  or  Plant  Kingdom. 

3.  The  Mineral  or  &tone  Kingdom. 

Animals  all  live,  grow,  and  move,  though  some 
much  more  freely  than  others,  and  all  feed  on  plants, 
or  other  animals.  Plants  live  and  grow  also,  deriving 
their  nourishment  from  the  soil,  water,  and  air. 
Minerals,  however,  do  not  live  or  grow  at  all,  as 
do  animals  and  plants;  they  need  no  food;  the  sum- 
mer's heat  does  not  cause  them  to  fade  or  faint;  the 
frosts  of  winter  do  not  kill  them,  for  they  are  dead. 
A  stone  can  be  cut  or  broken  in  any  shape,  but  the 
nature  of  the  rock  itself,  is  apparently  unchanged 
thereby;  while  any  such  violence  executed  on  a  liviug 
thing  would  result  in  its  death. 


Part    I. 

Thie    Animal    Kingdom. 


"He  prayeth  best  who  loveth  best 
All  things  both  great  and  small: 

For  the  dear  God  who  loveth  us, 
He  made  and  loveth  all." 


CHAPTER    II. 

ANIMALS. 

rSjHE  Animal  Kingdom  comprises  so  many  differ- 
ent forms  and  kinds,  that  we  could  not  hope 
to  learn  even  the  names  of  all  of  them, 
though  we  should  study  for  a  very  long  time. 
For  convenience,  those  who  have  considered  the  sub- 
ject before  us,  have  classified  animals  according  to 
their  likeness  or  difference;  all  those  that  most  closely 
resemble  each  other  being  said  to  belong  to  the  same 
class. 

Some  animals  have  hard,  solid  bones  within  their 

bodies,  upon  which  the  softer  parts,  such  as  the  flesh, 

blood  vessels,  etc.,  are  supported,  as  is  the  case  with 

the  cow,  rat,  snake,  frog  and  fish;  while  others,  like 

nsects,  worms,  and  the  like,  have  no  bones  at  all. 


6  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

All  the  bones  of  an  animal's  body  form  what  is  called 
the  skeleton. 


Fig.  1. — Bony  Skeleton  of  a  Cow. 

Figure  1  represents  the  skeleton  of  a  cow;  all  the 
flesh  having  been  removed  from  the  body  of  the 
animal  before  the  drawing  was  made.  Examine  it 
carefully,  and  compare  it  with  the  skeletons  of  other 
animals  such  as  frogs  and  fishes,shown  in  figures  16  and 
17.  If  we  look  closely  at  such  a  bony  skeleton,  it  will 
be  seen  that  all  the  bones  seem  to  be  connected  with 
the  back  bone  or  spine,  which  is  in  fact  a  long  chain 
of  bones  extending  from  the  head  throughout  the 
whole  length  of  the  animal's  neck  and  back.  Such 
animals  are  called  Vertebrates,  a  word  meaning 
"back-boned;"  other  animals  are  called  Invertebrates 
or  "non-back- boned." 

It  is  remarkable,  too,  that  all.  vertebrates  have  red 
blood  in  their  bodies,  while  the  invertebrates  have 
none.  Think  for  a  moment  of  this  difference  as  it 
exists  between  a  cat  and  a  butterfly;  the  body  of  the 
former  bleeds  even  if  the  skin  be  but  just  cut 
through;  but  if  the  latter  be  accidentally  crushed, 
only  a  colorless  watery  juice  is  found  within  its  body. 


APES  AND  MONKEYS.  7 

Vertebrates,  then,  are  animals  with  bones  and  red 
blood  in  their  bodies;  and  invertebrates  are  animals 
having  no  bones  within,  and  no  true  blood. 

But  vertebrates  are  not  alike  in  all  particulars. 
Some  of  them,  as  cats  or  fowls  always  seem  warm 
to  us  when  we  touch  them;  and  such,  in  consequence, 
are  called  warm-blooded  animals;  while  others,  as 
the  snake,  the  lizard  and  the  toad  are  almost  repul- 
sively cold  to  the  touch,  and  may  be  appropriately 
named  cold-blooded  animals. 


CHAPTER    III. 

APES    AND   MONKEYS. 

gSSjfj^OST  of  us  are  somewhat  acquainted  with 
these  peculiar  and  interesting  creatures,  from 
having  watched  them  in  their  playful  gam- 
bols and  funny  tricks  in  the  menageries.  A 
common  variety  living  in  Western  Africa  is  the 
Chimpanzee,  a  monkey  measuring  about  four  feet 
high  when  standing  erect.  Another  monkey,  with 
a  very  peculiar  name,  and  really  the  largest  of  the 
whole  tribe  is  the  Orang-outang,  some  specimens 
reaching  a  height  of  six  feet  if  measured  while 
standing  on  the  hind  legs. 

But  the  strongest  and  fiercest  of  the  whole  monkey 
tribe  is  the  terrible  Gorilla,  also  an  African  animal. 
A  good  representation  of  this  creature  is  given  in 
figure  2.     The  gorilla  is  of  a  savage,  cruel  disposi- 


3 


FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 


tion;  and  travelers  are  anxious  not  to  disturb  it  in  its 
haunts,  unless  they  are  well  prepared  for  fight.  Its 
strength  is  so  great  that  the  creature  can  break  off, 


rsx 


Fig.  2.— Gorilla, 
with  apparent  ease,  large  branches  from  trees;  and  it 
is   recorded,  by  good  authority,  that  a  gorilla   has 


APES  AND   MONKEYS.  9 

been  known  to  kill  a  hunter  with  a  single  blow  from 
its  powerful  paw;  and  then  to  twist  and  flatten  the 
rifle  barrel  of  its  fallen  victim  as  if  the  weapon  were 
made  of  wax.  Note  in  the  picture  (figure  2)  the 
savage  expression;  the  low,  retreating  forehead,  and 
the  large  protruding  mouth  with  its  sharp  teeth. 
Look  carefully  at  the  animal's  feet;  the  inner  toe  on 
each  is  apart  from  the  rest,  very  much  like  a  thumb. 
This  feature  is  of  great  service  to  the  beast  in 
climbing,  as  it  can  grasp  the  boughs  of  trees  more 
firmly. 

The  monkeys  already  named,  are  among  the  most 
remarkable  of  this  peculiar  tribe  of  animals.  Those 
mentioned,  are  all  tail-less;  and  are  sometimes  called 
by  the  general  name  of  apes.  They  usually  live 
together  in  small  families,  each  little  company 
appearing  very  selfish  and  unsociable,  in  permitting 
visits  from  others,  upon  its  own  domain.  They  live 
mostly  on  nuts,  fruits,  and  various  kinds  of  vegetable 
food,  which  their  native  forests  produce  in  abundance. 

Many  other  varieties  of  monkeys,  smaller  than  the 
apes,  are  to  be  found  in  the  warm  parts  of  both 
hemispheres,  living  mostly  in  trees,  and  feeding  upon 
fruits,  nuts,  and  insects.  Unlike  the  apes,  these 
smaller  monkeys  usually  congregate  in  large  herds. 
They  seem  to  be  of  a  jolly  disposition — leaping  and 
playing  among  the  branches,  and  all  the  time  chatter- 
ing in  a  truly  ludicrous  and  noisy  manner.  In 
some  species,  as  for  instance,  the  spider  monkey  of 
South  America — named  from  its  long,  sprawling  legs 
and  slender  body — the  tail  is  so  long  that  it  can  be 


10  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

twisted  round  the  tree,  and  thus  serve  as  an  aid  to 
the  animal  in  climbing.  The  end  of  the  tail  is 
destitute  of  hair,  and  so  sensitive,  that  it  is  used  to 
hold  small  objects,  such  as  fruit  and  eggs. 

On  each  of  the  monkey's  feet,  the  inside  toe,  which 
we  may  call  the  great  toe,  is  spread  apart  from  the 
others,  somewhat  like  our  own  thumbs,  for  which 
reason,  monkeys  are  sometimes  called  Quadruma- 
nous,  or  four  handed  animals.  They  can  grasp  objects 
with  the  toes  of  the  hind  foot  almost  as  well  as  with 
those  of  the  front;  but  such  motions  are  extremely 
clumsy,  when  compared  with  the  almost  perfect, 
action  of  the  truly  wonderful  and  graceful  human 
hand.  Some  people  claim  that  monkeys  resemble 
men  in  many  respects,  and  have  even  gone  so  far  as 
to  say  that  monkeys  and  men  belong  to  the  same 
family.  Such  extravagant  statements  as  these  are 
without  doubt  entirely  unfounded.  It  is  true  that 
some  monkeys  stand  on  their  hind  feet  at  times,  but 
none  do  so  as  a  natural  and  common  thing;  and 
when  they  try  to  walk  in  that  position,  their  move- 
ments are  very  awkward  and  unsteady.  The  gorilla 
stands  erect  when  striking  at  an  enemy;  but  this  is 
no  characteristic  resemblance  to  human  habit,  for 
bears  frequently  assume  a  somewhat  similar  position 
when  fighting.  An  ape's  natural  walk  is  on  all  fours, 
the  front  paws  being  clenched,  so  that  the  knuckles 
rest  on  the  ground,  and  the  soles  of  the  hind  feet 
in  most  cases,  partly  turned  toward  each  other. 
No  comparison  of  close  resemblance,  therefore,  is 
admissible   between   such  positions  and  the  stately 


APES  AND  MONKEYS.  11 

posture  and  graceful  bearing  of  a  human  being. 
Man  alone  naturally  and  uniformly  walks  erect — his 
head  nearest  heaven,  and  his  eyes,  embracing  within 
their  vision,  the  sky  with  its  countless  glittering 
worlds,  as  well  as  the  ground,  with  its  soil  and 
flowers.  The  bones  of  the  monkey's  body — especially 
the  hip  bones — are  of  such  a  shape  that  an  upright 
position  would  be  positively  painful  to  the  animal,  if 
prolonged.  The  skull  is  so  different  in  each  case, 
that  no  one  could  mistake  a  human  head  for  that  of 
an  ape. 

What  connection  is  there  between  the  clear  intel- 
ligence of  the  human  countenance,  and  the  dog-like 
face  of  the  baboon;  between  man  with  his  heavenly 
gifts  of  speech  and  song,  his  buildings,  railways  and 
ships,  and  the  chattering  gambols  of  the  monkey,  or 
the  savage  strength  of  the  gorilla!  We  are  the 
children  of  God,  and  bear  no  relationship  with  the 
animals,  except  in  the  common  features  of  mortality. 
Our  bodies,  while  in  this  earthly  state,  need  food, 
and  air,  and  water,  as  do  theirs,  and  we  are  subject 
to  disease  and  death  as  are  they;  but  the  soul  of 
man  is  the  direct  offspring  of  Deity;  our  Father 
has  told  us  so;  but  sacred  writ  does  not  record  such 
parentage  of  the  ape.  Words  of  inspired  truth 
declare  that  in  the  eyes  of  the  Lord,  a  righteous 
man,  though  mortal,  is  but  little  below  the  angels. 
Then  let  us  not  assert  that  our  Father's  children  are 
scarcely  above  the  monkeys;  for  such  is  not  true. 


12  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

CHAPTER  IV. 

INSECTIVOROUS    ANIMALS. 

©r&T  is  common  to  classify  animals  according  to  the 
&J  food  of  which  they  seem  to  be  most  fond. 
WS  Among  quadrupeds,  such  as  feed  largely  on 
Y  insects  are  called  Insectivorous  Animals;  those 
whose  principal  diet  consists  of  the  flesh  of  other 
animals  are  said  to  be  Carnivorous;  while  plant 
eaters  are  called  Herbivorous  Animals.  We  shall 
speak  of  some  members  of  each  of  these  classes. 

A  common  insectivorous  animal  with  which  we  are 
familiarly  acquainted  is  the  Bat,  often  erroneously 
called  bat-mouse  or  flitter-mouse.  Because  this 
peculiar  little  creature  flies  only  at  night,  and  loves 
to  live  in  quiet,  dark  places,  such  as  old  and  deserted 
houses  and  the  like,  and  moreover,  because  according 
to  our  sense  of  beauty  it  is  not  particularly  hand- 
some, we  are  very  apt  to  look  upon  it  as  an  ill- 
omened  creature,  and  to  shudder  at  its  mere  presence. 
Let  us  put  aside  such  prejudices  for  a  time,  and 
watch  the  little  fellow  with  care  and  interest,  and 
without  doubt  we  shall  learn  something  of  value. 
Although  the  bat  flies  in  the  air,  it  has  no  real  con- 
nection with  the  birds;  it  is  not  produced  from  an 
egg  like  birds;  its  body  is  covered  with  a  kind  of 
hair  or  fur,  not  feathers;  and  its  so-called  wings  are 
very  different  from  the  true  wings  of  birds. 

Here  is   a   skeleton  of  a  bat  (Fig.    3),  which  I 
prepared  by  placing  the  body  of  a  dead  bat  near  a 


INSECTIVOROUS  ANIMALS.  13 


Fig.  3.— Skeleton  of  a  Bat. 

nest  of  large  ants;  those  little  insects  very  soon 
removed  the  flesh  and  left  the  bones  clean  and  white. 
Look  at  the  bones  of  the  front  limb,  they  are  very 
much  elongated;  and  in  a  living  specimen  a  thin  skin 
or  membrane*  passes  from  one  to  the  other,  and  is 
attached  to  the  side  of  the  body  between  the  front 
and  hind  legs  forming  a  kind  of  web.  By  expanding 
and  flitting  this  the  creature  is  able  to  move  quite 
rapidly  through  the  air.  The  bat  has  no  beak  like  a 
bird,  and  in  its  mouth  is  a  full  set  of  teeth,  while 
birds  have  none. 

It  loves  to  feed  on  insects  that  fly  at  twilight; 
and  to  catch  these  it  curves  that  part  of  the  wing- 
membrane  between  the  hind  feet  and  the  tail  into  a 


*  If  this  membrane  be  spread  out  and  carefully  examined 
with  the  microscope  while  the  bat  is  alive,  a  truly  wonder- 
ful sight  is  revealed.  Countless  little  blood  vessels  are 
seen  filled  with  blood  flowing  steadily  along  like  red  wine 
through  a  pipe. 


14  FJRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

kind  of  net,  which  in  the  course  of  the  animal's  rapid 
flight  collects  the  insects  that  come  in  its  way. 
During  the  day-time,  when  the  light  would  be  alto- 
gether too  bright  for  its  eyes,  the  bat  remains  in  its 
dark  haunts,  suspended  by  its  hooked  claws  head 
downward  As  the  cold  weather  approaches,  it  seeks 
some  sheltered  nook,  hangs  itself  up  by  its  claws,  and 
falls  into  a  deep  sleep,  remaining  dormant  till  the 
return  of  spring.  Animals  which  thus  sleep  away 
the  winter  are  said  to  hibernate. 

Bats  are  very  attentive  to  their  young;  a  baby  bat 
is  often  seen  clinging  by  its  claws  to  its  mother's 
body  while  she  is  flitting  through  the  air  catching 
insects  for  supper. 

Wherever  insects  are  so  numerous  as  to  be  trouble- 
some, bats  must  be  regarded  as  true  friends  to  man; 
and  as  such  they  should  be  protected,  rather  than 
ruthlessly  murdered  by  cruel  boys,  as  is  often  the 
case,  while  elder  ones  look  on  with  indifference, 
believing  the  animals  to  be  but  worthless  pests. 

A  very  large  variety  of  bat  called  the  vampire  is 
found  in  the  tropical  parts  of  America,  often  attain- 
ing a  spread  of  wings  from  three  to  four  feet.  This 
animal  delights  to  dine  on  fresh  blood  drawn  from 
the  bodies  of  living  animals;  to  obtain  which  it 
usually  approaches  its  victims  while  they  sleep;  and 
after  making  a  very  small  puncture  in  the  skin, 
leisurely  sucks  the  blood  therefrom.  Though  the 
wound  can  scarcely  be  seen,  the  amount  of  blood 
drawn  is  often  considerable.  Without  doubt,  how- 
ever, the  stories  so  often  told  of  vampires  sucking  the 


INSECTIVOROUS  ANIMALS. 


15 


blood  from  men  and  large  animals  until  their  victims 
expire  are  wild  exaggerations. 

A  large  bat  called  the  Kalong  is  found  in  Java. 
Its  wings  when  extended  often  measure  five  feet  from 
tip  to  tip.  Its  head  is  shaped  very  much  like  that 
of  a  fox;  and  from  this  characteristic  it  is  often 
spoken  of  as  the  fox-bat.  Thi^  peculiar  animal  is 
not  insectivorous  in  its  habits;  it  feeds  mostly  on 
fruits,  and  makes  its  presence  unpleasantly  known 
among  the  people  by  plundering  their  winter  stores 
of  fruits  and  vegetables,  if  not  carefully  protected. 

The  Mole  is  also  mostly  insectivorous  in  its  diet, 
though  it  feeds  also  on  worms.  By  the  aid  of  its 
broad  snout  and  wide  spreading  feet  it  readily  digs 
long  underground  passages  leading  from  its  dwelling 
place  in  different  directions.  It  constructs  its  home 
in  the  most  ingenious  manner,  there  being  three 
passages  leading  from  the  nest  proper  to  the  main 
run;  so  that  the  animal  has  several  avenues  of  escape 
if  attacked  in  its  stronghold. 


Fig.  4.— Plan  of  Mole's  Dwelling. 

In  figure  4  the  plan  of  a  mole's  home  is  sketched, 
showing  the  central  castle  and  the  passages  connected 
therewith. 

Mole-skins  are  prized  on  account  of  their  soft,  tine 


16  FIRST  BOOK   OF  NATURE. 

fur,  and  in  consequence  these  little  creatures  are 
killed  in  great  numbers.  This  is  to  be  regretted;  for 
without  doubt  the  mole  is  of  far  greater  benefit  than 
detriment  to  farmers,  feeding  voraciously  as  it  does 
on  the  larvae  or  grubs  which  would  eventually  de- 
velop into  destructive  insects.  The  skillful  manner 
in  which  the  animal  burrows  through  the  ground, 
has  probably  furnished  man  with  valuable  hints 
regarding  the  shape  of  his  shovels  and  plows. 

Pope  says: 

"Learn  of  the  mole  to  plow,  the  worm  to  weave." 

Many  of  the  smallest  among  the  so-called  field- 
mice  are  in  reality  shrews — useful  little  insect 
hunters,  frequenting  our  meadows  and  fields.  The 
true  field-mice  are,  however,  destructive  animals  and 
very  injurious  to  the  farmer,  devouring,  as  they  do, 
grain  and  roots  in  large  quantities.  Of  these  some- 
thing will  be  said  in  another  chapter. 


CHAPTER  V. 

CARNIVOROUS   ANIMALS. 

aJjNIMALS  that  devour  others  are  called  Car- 
nivorous or  Flesh-eating  Animals.     The  class 
is  a  very  large   one,  including  some  of  our 
domestic  pets  as  well  as  many  of  the  most 
ferocious  of  the  whole  animal  kingdom. 

THE   CAT   FAMILY. 

The  common  house  cat  is  the  domestic  representa- 


CARNIVOROUS   ANIMALS.  17 

tive  of  a  very  distinguished  family.  Most  of  pussy's 
kindred,  however,  are  larger  and  more  to  be  feared 
than  herself;  such  as  the  wild  cat,  jaguar,  leopard, 
panther,  tiger,  and  lion.  All  of  these  have  their 
paws  soft  and  cushioned,  so  that  they  can  steal, 
with  noiseless  step,  upon  their  victims.  Their  claws 
are  sharp  and  curved,  well  adapted  both  for  holding 
and  tearing  their  prey;  and  when  not  in  use,  these 
weapons  are  kept  carefully  enclosed  in  sheaths  within 
the  foot,  by  which  means  their  sharpness  is  preserved. 
The  tongue  is  covered  with  many  rough  points, 
almost  as  hard  as  horn,  by  the  aid  of  which  some  of 
the  family,  such  as  the  lion  and  tiger,  are  able  to  lick 
clean  the  flesh  from  the  bones  of  the  animals  upon 
which  they  feed.  They  use  their  rough  tongues  also 
as  curry-combs  for  smoothing  and  cleaning  their  skins. 
Let  us  observe,  carefully,  the  sly  and  silent  manner 
in  which  a  cat  steals  upon  a  mouse  or  a  bird,  the 
patient  way  in  which  she  watches  for  hours  beside  a 
mouse-hole — then  notice  the  swift  leap — meaning  in 
nearly  every  case  death  to  the  unfortunate  victim — 
and  we  will  have  a  fair  idea  of  the  manner  in  which 
the  fierce  lion,  and  the  dreaded  tiger,  the  savage 
leopard  and  the  cruel  panther  hunt  and  kill  their 
prey. 

The  Lion,  though  usually  measuring  less  than  ten 
feet  in  length,  is  so  powerful  as  to  be  able  to  treat  a 
cow  or  a  man,  as  a  cat  does  a  rat.  A  heavy,  shaggy 
mane  covers  the  neck  of  the  male,  giving  the  animal 
a  most  dignified  and  stately  appearance,  from  which 
circumstance  he  has  been  named  "King  of  Beasts." 


18  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

The  lioness  is  smaller  than  her  mate,  and  is  destitute 
of  a  mane. 

The  Tiger  is  found  only  in  Asia,  and  chiefly  in 
India.  It  grows  usually  about  three  feet  in  height, 
and  eight  feet  in  length,  and  its  body  is  beautifully 
striped  in  dark-yellow  and  black.  When  disturbed 
in  its  native  haunts,  it  is  a  ferocious  beast.  In  one 
year  nine  hundred  and  seventeen  men  are  said  to  have 
been  killed  by  tigers  in  British  India  alone. 

THE   DOG   FAMILY. 

The  ordinary  dog  owns  many  relatives  among  wild 
animals,  such  as  wolves,  foxes,  hyenas,  and  others. 
The  teeth  of  these  animals  resemble  to  a  certain 
extent  those  of  the  cat  tribe;  but  the  so-called  eye 
teeth  are  very  long  and  sharp,  so  much  so  that  some 
people  call  the  corresponding  teeth  in  other  animals, 
especially  if  long — "canines"  or  "dog  teeth."  The 
claws  in  all  of  them  are  much  thicker  and  less  sharp 
than  among  the  felines,  and  cannot  be  retracted  or 
drawn  into  the  foot. 

Even  among  tame  dogsthere  are  many  and  widely 
different  kinds.  Compare,  for  instance,  the  majestic 
Newfoundland,  with  the  frisking  little  terrier;  or  the 
thick-set  bulldog,  with  the  slender  and  swift-footed 
greyhound;  look  upon  the  broad  face  and  rounded 
head  of  the  mastiff,  and  then  upon  the  long  cranium 
and  pointed  nose  of  the  fox-hound.  The  dog  is  in 
truth  a  companion  to  man.  Wherever  man  has 
gone — to  the  frozen  regions  round  the  poles,  as  well 
as  through  the  burning  wastes  and  tangled  forests  of 
the  tropics,  the  dog  has  followed  and  served  his  mas- 


CARNIVOROUS   ANIMALS.  19 

ter.  The  attachment  of  the  dog  to  man  amounts  to 
a  true  passion.  Many  a  noble  hound  has  lost  his  life 
rather  than  suffer  injury  to  come  to  his  charge.  He 
considers  a  kind  word  and  a  friendly  caress  full  reward 
for  almost  any  sacrifice  or  exertion. 

The  Wolf  is  in  size  about  equal  to  a  large  dog;  and 
of  a  savage  and  ravenous  disposition.  Wolves  generally 
hunt  in  packs  or  companies,  and  so  frequently  kill 
and  devour  larger  animals  than  a  single  wolf  would 
dare  attack.  They  wage  great  destruction  among 
sheep,  calves  and  other  farm  animals.  The  Grey 
Wolf  is  widely  distributed  over  the  thinly  settled 
parts  of  Asia,  Europe  and  America.  The  Prairie 
Wolf  or  Coyote  is  much  smaller  and  less  ferocious, 
and  is  found  on  the  plains  and  prairies  west  of  the 
Mississippi. 

The  Fox  is  readily  distinguished  from  the  other 
members  of  the  dog  tribe  by  its  long  bushy  tail  and 
pointed  nose.  It  is  a  typical  farm-yard  thief,  seem- 
ing to  look  upon  all  chickens,  turkeys,  ducks  and  the 
like  as  if  created  for  its  own  special  use.  Though 
decidedly  carnivorous  in  habit,  it  seems  to  enjoy  a 
meal  of  ripe  fruit  occasionally.  For  craftiness  and 
cunning  it  is  proverbial.  In  many  parts  of  Europe 
fox  hunting  is  regarded  as  a  fine  sport,  in  spite  of  its 
cruelty.  Dogs  are  trained  to  hunt  the  fox — mostly 
by  scent;  and  in  eluding  its  pursuers  the  crafty  crea- 
ture resorts  to  many  pretty  tricks.  When  closely 
followed  it  will  often  double  on  its  track,  so  as  to 
baffle  the  hounds  by  throwing  them  off  the  course; 
it  has  been  seen  to  leap  to  the  top  of  a  fence  or  hedge 


20  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

and  run  along  for  a  considerable  distance,  thereby 
leaving  no  track  which  can  be  followed  by  the  dogs 
along  the  ground;  it  will  sometimes  run  through  a 
flock  of  sheep,  apparently  thinking  the  dogs  will  fail 
to  follow  the  track  among  so  many.  When  the 
hounds  are  close  upon  it,  the  fox  will  often  drop  flat 
behind  some  fallen  tree  or  large  rock  while  the  dogs, 
unable  to  check  their  headlong  flight,  rush  past. 
Some  observers  say  that  if  caught  alive  the  sly  crea- 
ture will  lie  as  if  dead,  and  even  allow  itself  to  be 
severely  treated  without  betraying  the  trick;  but  as 
soon  as  a  chance  of  escape  offers  itself,  it  scampers 
away.  The  cunning  of  the  fox  is  a  gift  to  it  from 
the  Creator,  whereby  it  may  escape  from  its  cruel 
and  bloodthirsty  foes. 

Jackals  and  Hyenas  are  met  with  in  the  warmer 
parts  of  the  Old  World;  and  are  of  great  good  as 
scavengers,  devouring  large  quantities  of  offal  and 
other  decaying  and  offensive  matter.  They  seem  to 
possess  a  little  of  the  fox's  cunning,  with  much  of 
the  wolf's  savageness,  and  the  lion's  daring. 

THE   WEASEL   FAMILY. 

The  Weasel  family,  including  weasels,  pine-martens, 
otters,  skunks,  minks  and  sables,  are  all  small  slender 
animals,  and  mostly  nocturnal,  or  night-roving,  in 
their  habits.  Some  of  the  most  valuable  furs,  as  the 
Siberian  sable  and  ermine  are  obtained  from  these 
graceful  little  creatures.  Weasels  furnish  the  ermine 
— long  used  in  England  to  decorate  the  official  robes 
of  judges.  The  fur  of  these  animals  undergoes  remark- 
able variations  in  color  at  different  seasons-  beino- 

J  to 


CARNIVOROUS  ANIMALS. 


21 


brownish  on  the  upper  parts  and  white  below  during 
the  summer  months,  but  turning  uniformly  white  as 
winter  approaches,  and  resuming  its  dull  hue  again 
in  the  spring.     The  hair  is  not  shed  to  produce  these 


:t>Mlift, 


v.  ^ k 


Fig.  5. — The  Weasel  in  its  winter  dress. 

alterations,  but  actually  changes  color.  In  warm 
countries,  where  winter  cold  is  scarcely  known  the 
weasel  retains  one  color  throughout  the  year. 

Figure  5  represents  this  slender  and  beautiful 
creature,  bedecked  in  its  snowy  winter  costume. 

The  sleep  of  the  weasel  is  so  deep  that  the  animal 
may  be  readily  caught  if  surprised  in  slumber,  ,and 
hence  the  comparison  so  often  used  when  speaking  of 
an  easy  task — "like  catching  a  weasel  asleep." 

Otters  feed  mostly  on  fish  and  as  we  would  natur- 
ally expect,  they  live  generally  near  the  water.  They 
are  attractive  little  animals,  though  but  rarely  met 


22  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

with  in  these  parts.  It  is  amusing  to  watch  them 
engaging  in  their  favorite  sport  of  coasting, — down  a 
steep  snow  bank  in  the  winter,  or  a  slide  of  slippery 
clay  in  the  warmer  seasons;  seemingly  with  all  the 
gusto  of  a  crowd  of  merry  boys  with  sleds.  Animals 
appreciate  fun  as  well  as  we. 

The  otter's  eyes  are  tolerably  close  together, 
and  are  located  low  on  the  head  so  that  with  a 
very  slight  movement  it  can  see  in  any  direction. 
This  wise  provision  assists  the  animal  greatly  while 
fishing. 

The  Skunk  is  found  only  in  North  America.  Its 
skin  is  singularly  striped  lengthwise  in  white  and 
black  or  dark-brown;  but  the  creature  is  most  re- 
markable for  its  power  of  emitting,  when  disturbed 
or  angered,  a  most  offensive  odor,  absolutely  un- 
endurable by  other  animals.  It  retires  to  its  burrow 
fat  and  sleek  as  the  winter  approaches,  and  remains 
there  till  spring,  when  it  reappears  in  a  pitifully 
gaunt  and  hungry  state. 

THE    BEAR    FAMILY. 

There  are  many  varieties  of  bears  of  which  the 
Grizzly  Bear  of  the  Rocky  Mountains  is  the  most 
powerful  and  ferocious.  Its  stout  and  non-retractable 
claws  often  measure  six  inches  in  length,  and  its 
strength  is  so  great,  that  the  animal  has  been  known 
to  carry  off  the  carcass  of  a  buffalo  weighing  over  a 
thousand  pounds.  When  hungry  or  attacked,  the 
grizzly  bear  is  regarded  as  the  most  formidable  of 
North  American  wild  beasts.  The  Indians  consider 
it  a  great  feat  to  kill  a  grizzly;  and  the  successful 


CARNIVOROUS  ANIMALS.  23 

hunter  usually  wears  the  claws  around  his  neck  as  a 
mark  of  honor. 


Fig.  6.— Grizzly  Bear. 

Fig.  6  shows  the  general  appearance  of  this  beast. 
It  has  derived  its  name  from  the  peculiar  color  of  its 
hair,  which  is  a  mixture  of  black  and  grizzly  gray. 
As  seen  in  the  picture,  the  animal  walks  on  the  flat 
part  of  its  foot,  leaving  the  impression  of  its  broad 
sole,  together  with  that  of  its  long  claws  in  soft 
ground,  the  imprint  looking  not  unlike  that  of  a  very 
large  human  hand. 

The  American  Black  Bear  is  a  much  smaller 
animal  than  its  fiercer  brother  already  described;  but 
if  compelled  to  defend  itself  or  to  protect  its  young 
it  will  fight  desperately.  Though  classed  among 
carnivorous  or  flesh-eating  animals,  it  feeds  largely 
on  fruit  if  such  be  obtainable.  It  is  especially  fond 
of  honey,  and  will  frequently  venture  to  assail  the 
nests   of   wild   bees  to  satisfy   its  taste  for  sweets. 


24  FIRST  BOOK   OF  NATURE. 

The  grizzly  bear  shows  these  same  traits  to  some 
extent. 

The  Polar  Bear  of  the  frigid  regions  is  the  largest 
of  the  bear  tribe.  The  soles  of  its  broad  feet  are 
covered  with  long  coarse  hair,  by  which  the  animal 
gains  a  firmer  footing  on  the  ice  fields  and  plains  of 
frozen  snow  of  its  arctic  home. 

The  Raccoon  or  "coon"  as  it  is  sometimes  called, 
is  an  American  animal,  about  the  size  of  an  ordinary 
dog,  and  in  general  appearance  suggestive  of  a  small 
bear,  if  its  long  tail  be  not  taken  into  account.  It 
is  not  wholly  carnivorous,  feeding  on  roots  and 
fruits  as  well  as  birds,  eggs,  small  quadrupeds  and 
fish. 


CHAPTER  VI. 

HERBIVOROUS     ANIMALS     OR     PLANT-EATERS. 

Sfs^HE  perfect  manner  in  which  every  part  of  the 
jj§2/(y  body    of  these  animals   is   adapted   to    their 

¥  habits  of  life,  is  another  proof  of  the  infinite 
wisdom  of  the  Creator.  Instead  of  long, 
pointed  teeth,  like  those  of  the  dog  and  the  lion, 
suitable  only  for  holding  their  struggling  prey  while 
writhing  in  death  agony,  the  plant-eating  animals 
have  wide  chisel-like  teeth  in  front,  and  broad,  flat 
grinders  behind,  fitted  admirably  for  cropping  the 
herbage,  and  grinding  the  grass  and  seeds  which  form 
their  food.  Their  feet  are  clad  in  hard,  tough  hoofs, 
either  solid  as  in  the  case  of  the  horse,  or  divided 


HERBIVOROUS  ANIMALS.  25 

evenly  into  two  toes,  as  with  oxen,  sheep,  goats,  deer 
and  camels,  or  formed  in  a  greater  number  of  toes  as 
in  the  case  if  the  gigantic  elephant,  rhinoceros  and 
hippopotamus. 

THE   HORSE   FAMILY. 

The  Horse  is  thought  by  some  to  be  the  most 
graceful  of  all  quadrupeds.  It  has  become  indis- 
pensable in  the  service  of  man.  Wonderfully 
sagacious,  and  closely  attached  in  its  feelings  to  those 
who  care  for  it,  it  is  at  once  a  companion  and  a  ser- 
vant. For  such  a  trusty  follower,  man  may  well  be 
thankful;  and  he  should  show  such  thanks  by  treat- 
ing the  animal  with  due  kindness  and  consideration. 
A  properly  trained  horse  can  always  be  governed 
more  easily  by  a  gentle  word  than  by  the  lash. 
There  are  many  kinds  of  horses,  with  very  different 
appearance,  as  will  readily  be  believed  by  comparing 
the  large,  heavy-set  cart  horse  with  the  slender  racer 
and  the  pretty  little  Shetland  pony.  The  digestive 
organs  of  the  horse  are  arranged  so  as  to  allow  the 
process  of  digestion  to  go  on  in  an  uninterrupted 
manner,  thus  fitting  the  animal  for  more  continuous 
movement. 

The  Ass  or  Donkey  is  in  general  form  and  habit 
related  to  the  horse,  though  smaller  and  more  hardy. 
It  feeds  upon  the  coarse  forms  of  herbage,  and  is  of 
an  extremely  patient  disposition,  fitting  it  for  long 
continued  work.  As  a  pack  animal  it  is  of  great 
service,  and  can  carry  with  apparent  ease  a  surpris- 
ingly heavy  burden;  but  drivers  are  too  apt  to  over- 
load the  poor  beast,  and  cause  it  suffering. 


26  FIRST  BOOK   OF  NATURE. 

The  Zebra  runs  wild  in  Southern  Africa,  and 
though  greatly  resembling  the  horse  is  readily  dis- 
tinguished by  the  beautiful  stripes  of  white  and  black 
with  which  its  body  is  covered  and  by  its  wild  and 
fractious  disposition.  It  is  said  that  no  zebra  has 
ever  yet  been  tamed. 

THE    OX    FAMILY. 

The  animals  included  here  are  the  ox,  sheep,  goat 
deer,  camel  and  their  relatives,  and  among  the  whole 
range  of  the  animal  creation,  these  are  of  the  great- 
est value  and  service  to  man.  From  them  he  obtains 
milk  and  meat  for  his  food,  leather  for  his  shoes  and 
hair  and  wool  for  his  clothing;  besides  tallow,  horn 
and  bones.  Many  of  them,  too,  are  his  willing  and 
efficient  beasts  of  burden.  All  of  them  subsist 
exclusively  on  vegetable  food  and  have  cloven  hoofs. 

They  are  frequently  called  Ruminants  or  Cud- 
chewers,  from  a  peculiarity  which  they  show  in 
eating.  To  understand  this  more  readily,  let  us 
examine  the  stomach  of  an  ox  or  a  sheep,  as  an 
illustration  of  the  strange  digestive  organs  of  the 
whole  family. 

The  appearance  is  well  represented  in  figure  7,  the 
upper  picture  showing  an  external  view,  and  the 
lower  one  the  appearance  after  partial  dissection  As 
is  there  shown,  the  stomach  consists  of  several 
cavities,  looking,  in  fact,  like  separate  stomachs. 
When  the  animal  swallows,  the  half  chewed  food 
passes  through  the  gullet,  or  oesophagus  (o),  into  the 
first  stomach  or  paunch  (/?);  and  after  becoming- 
moist  and  soft  it  passes  to  the  second  cavity  (b), 


HERBIVOROUS  ANIMALS. 


27 


Fig.  7.— Stomach  of  a  Sheep. 


called  from  its  complicated  structure  the  "honey-comb 

stomach."  Here,  by  the 
movements  of  the  stom- 
ach the  food  is  rolled  in- 
to balls,  which  are  then 
passed  one  by  one  again 
into  the  mouth  after  the 
animal  has  ceased  feed- 
ing and  is  at  rest.  The  food 
is  now  thoroughly  mas- 
\p  ticatedand  then  swallow- 
ed again,  passing  this 
time  through  a  valve  near 
the  end  of  the  oesophagus 
tube,  directly  into  the 
third  stomach  (/*),  called  by  some  the  "manyplies," 
because  the  inner  surface  is  roughened  by  numerous 
folds  of  the  lining  membrane;  and  thence  after  a 
short  interval  into  the  fourth  cavity  (c),  each  process 
more  completely  effecting  the  digestion  of  the  food. 
The  ability  to  eat  rapidly,  depending  for  com- 
plete mastication  upon  subsequent  chewing  is  of  great 
practical  use  especially  to  the  wild  animals  of  this 
order.  Nearly  all  plant-eating  animals  are  eagerly 
hunted  for  food  by  the  bloodthirsty,  carnivorous 
creatures  already  spoken  of;  most  are  also  of  a  shy 
and  timid  disposition,  unfitted  to  defend  themselves 
against  their  savage  foes  at  close  quarters,  and  there- 
fore relying  mostly  in  flight  for  safety.  Beside  this, 
they  are  certainly  more  exposed  to  attacks  while 
feeding  in  open  glades  and  pastures,  than  while  hid- 


^8  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

den  in  their  coverts  and  retreats.  It  is  well,  there- 
fore, that  they  can  eat  rapidly  and  hasten  back  to 
places  of  comparative  safety.  And  yet,  the  food 
upon  which  they  live  requires  thorough  mastication 
before  digestion  can  go  properly  on — and  this  is 
secured  by  the  ruminating  process. 

The  interesting  habits  of  the  many  species  of  deer, 
including  the  moose,  reindeer,  elk,  red-deer  and 
antelope,  as  well  as  the  musk  ox,  bison,  hump-backed 
camel  and  dromedary,  and  the  longnecked  giraffe, 
will  form  very  interesting  subjects  for  further  read- 
ing and  study. 

Beside  those  already  named  there  are  many  other 
well  known  herbivorous  animals  worthy  of  our  notice. 

The  Elephant  is  represented  in  figure  8,  and  a  good 
idea  of  the  animal's  size  is  to  be  gained  by  a  compari- 
son with  the  picture  of  the  man  standing  alongside. 


Fig.  8.— The  Asiatic  Elephant, 


HERBIVOROUS  ANIMALS.  29 

This  creature  is  the  largest  of  all  living  quadrupeds, 
sometimes   attaining  a   height   of  ten   feet,   and   a 
weight   of  twelve  thousand   pounds.     The   head   is 
extremely  large  and  heavy,  and  to  support  it  the 
neck  is  of  necessity  short  and  stout.     When  in  a 
standing  position,  therefore,  the  animal  is  unable  to 
reach  the  ground  with  its  head;  but  to  make  up  for 
this  apparent  inconvenience,  it  has  a  peculiar  organ 
called  the   trunk,  looking    much    like   a   long   and 
very  flexible  nose.    It  serves  in  fact  as  a  nose,  as  well 
as  for  numerous  other  purposes.     By  its  means  the 
elephant  picks  up  food  and  conveys  the  same  to  his 
mouth;  by  suction  he  fills  the  trunk  with  water,  and 
pours  it  down  his  throat.     This  simple  organ  is  said 
to  be  composed  of  over  forty  thousand  separate  and 
distinct  muscles,  by  the  action  of  which  the  trunk 
can  be  placed  in  almost  every  conceivable  position. 
It  is  so  strong  that  by  its  aid  the  animal  can  root  up 
large  trees;  and  so  sensitive  at  the  point  as  to  easily 
pick  up  a  single  grain  of  wheat  or  rice.   The  elephant 
is  very  intelligent  and  can  be  trained  to  be  of  great 
service  to  man.     He  can  be  taught  to  carry  logs  and 
stack  them    in  order;  or  to  lay  stone  or  bricks  in  a 
wall  as  orderly  as  a  mason  could.     Two  large  over- 
grown teeth  called  tusks,  project  from  the  upper  jaw; 
these  are  the  ivory  so  highly  prized  for  ornaments. 
A  pair  of  tusks  often   weigh  two   hundred  pounds. 
The  Rhinoceros,  the  Hippopotamus  and  the  Tapir 
are   large   animals  inhabiting  only  tropical   regions 
and  extremely  interesting  and  instructive  in  their 
habits. 


30  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

THE     HOG. 

Our  common  pig  has  a  peculiarly  shaped  skull, 
adapting  it  for  rooting  in  the  ground.  The  skin  is 
covered  with  long  bristles,  so  stout  as  to  be  useful  to 
the  shoe  and  harness  maker  in  sewing  leather.  The 
uncleanly  habits  of  the  animal  are  proverbial;  and 
these  are  made  the  worse  by  the  filthy  surroundings 
among  which  pigs  are  usually  confined.  The  flesh  of 
the  hog  is  used  as  an  article  of  human  food;  though 
observation,  experience  and  revelation  unite  to 
declare  it  unwholesome.  Learned  physicians  and 
scientists  of  the  day  say  that  swine's  flesh  causes 
many  disorders,  and  much  sickness  among  those  who 
use  it.  The  food  upon  which  the  creature  lives  is 
very  varied,  and  much  of  it  is  of  a  most  unhealthful 
kind.  It  would  seem  that  one  object  for  which  the 
hog  was  created,  was  to  fill  the  office  of  a  scavenger; 
devouring,  as  it  does,  large  quantities  of  decaying 
matter,  which  otherwise  would  taint  the  air,  water 
and  soil,  and  thus  favor  the  spread  of  disease. 

The  wild  boar,  an  untamed  species  of  hog,  is  still 
found  in  the  forests  of  Europe.  Its  chase  and  cap- 
ture have  always  been  considered  as  agreeable  sport. 
Another  of  the  hog  tribe,  and  a  truly  remarkable 
one  at  that,  is  the  Babirusa  Hog,  or  Hog  Deer,  a 
native  of  Java  and  Borneo.  Its  upper  canine  teeth 
are  greatly  prolonged,  and  curved  backward,  so  as  to 
form  a  protection  to  the  eyes  when  the  creature  is 
running  through  the  bushes. 


RODENTS  OR  GNAWING  ANIMALS.  31 

CHAPTER  VII. 

RODENTS   OR    GNAWING    ANIMALS. 

33E9SS  their  name  indicates,  these  animals  are  noted 
§jfc&   for  their  biting  or  gnawing  propensities;  and 

¥they  may  easily  be  recognized  by  the  peculiarity 
of  their  teeth.  In  all  of  them,  such  as  mice, 
rats,  squirrels,  etc.,  the  two  front  teeth  of  each  jaw  are 
very  long;  the  outer  part  of  each  tooth  consists  mainly 
of  the  hard  white  substance  called  enamel — the  hardest 
substance  to  be  found  in  the  animal  body  in  fact, 
while  the  inner  or  back  portion  is  of  a  much  softer 
material.  The  result  of  such  an  arrangement  is  that 
the  teeth,  though  worn  by  constant  use,  always  pre- 
sent a  sharp  edge,  the  hard  enamel  forming  the  cut- 
ting part.  Unlike  the  case  of  most  animals,  a  rodent's 
teeth  grow  as  fast  as  they  are  worn  away,  and  they  are 
therefore  in  constant  working  order,  unless  an  accident 
befall  the  animal  and  one  or  more  of  the  teeth  be 
broken  out.  In  such  a  case  the  opposing  tooth  grows 
uninterruptedly,  causing  the  animal  serious  incon- 
venience. 

The  writer  has  in  his  possession  a  rabbit's  skull  in 
which  the  lower  front  teeth  have  attained  a  length 
of  nearly  two  inches,  through  the  corresponding 
upper  teeth  having  been  broken  out  by  an  accident, 
so  that  there  was  no  check  to  the  growth  of  the  lower 
gnawers.  The  body  from  which  the  specimen  was 
obtained,  bore  every  evidence  that  the  rabbit  had 


32  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

died  of  starvation — most  likely  as  a  result  of  such 
unfortunate  accident. 

Mice  and  Rats  exist  in  greater  variety  than  any 
other  class  of  quadrupeds,  and  include  some  of 
the  smallest.  House-mice,  field-mice,  harvest- 
mice,  and  jumping-mice  are  familiar  acquaint- 
ances at  home  and  on  the  farm.  The  last  named, 
though  less  frequently  seen  than  most  of  the  others, 
is  an  exceedingly  interesting  and  active  little  creature. 
Its  body  is  not  more  than  from  two  and  a  half  to 
three  inches  in  length,  while  its  tail  is  more  than 
twice  as  long.  It  moves  by  long  and  rapid  leaps, 
and  is  so  agile  in  many  of  its  movements  that  the 
observer's  eye  is  scarcely  able  to  follow  it. 

Our  domestic  friend,  the  House-Mouse  is  a  graceful 
and  indeed  a  pretty  animal,  and  could  we  but  put 
aside  our  inborn  prejudices  for  a  time,  we  would 
indeed  consider  it  such.  Its  slender  build,  smooth 
glossy  skin,  beautiful  lustrous  eyes,  and  engaging 
ways  would  commend  it  to  favorable  notice.  It  has 
been  in  many  cases  trained  as  a  pet,  coming  at  the 
call  of  its  master,  taking  food  from  his  hand  and 
playfully  submitting  to  his  caresses.  Contrary  to 
common  thought,  mice  are  extremely  cleanly  in  their 
habits;  but  as  they  indulge  so  unreservedly  in  attacks 
upon  our  pantry  stores,  we  prefer  them  outside  the 
house.  With  their  chisel-edged  teeth  they  can 
readily  cut  an  entrance  through  the  sides  of  cup- 
boards and  cases,  and  then  they  feast  upon  the  con- 
tents at  leisure. 

Among  rats  the  brown  rat  and  the  muskrat  are 


RODENTS  OR  GNAWING  ANIMALS.  33 

common  with  us  in  these  regions;  and  occasionally 
the  black  rat  is  met  with.  This  last  was  formerly 
the  most  common  of  all,  infesting  alike  houses, 
barns  and  stores;  but  it  seems  now  fast  becom- 
ing extinct  through  the  cruel  and  persistent  attacks 
of  the  brown  rat.  It  is  an  interesting  creature, 
exhibiting  great  sagacity,  a  deep  attachment  for  its 
young  and  a  warm  affection  for  others  of  its  kind. 
It  has  been  asserted  by  Dr.  Franklin,  whose  trust- 
worthiness as  an  observer  will  pass  without  question, 
that  he  once  watched  a  company  of  rats  migrating  in 
search  of  a  new  home;  and  that  among  the  party  he 
saw  a  rat  carefully  leading  a  blind  comrade  by  a 
twig  held  between  its  teeth.  The  muskrat  is  a 
common  inhabitant  of  our  brooks  and  ponds.  It 
grows  usually  about  a  foot  in  length,  exclusive  of  the 
tail,  which  is  usually  as  long  as  the  body.  The 
animals  very  frequently  prove  annoying  and  injurious 
to  the  farmer  by  burrowing  into  the  banks  of  his 
irrigating  canals.  They  build  their  winter  homes  of 
rushes  and  sticks,  oftentimes  from  three  to  four  feet 
high,  the  entrance  being  below  water  and  leading  to 
a  dry  and  warm  apartment  in  the  upper  story.  The 
skins  of  muskrats  are  valuable,  the  fur  being  used  in 
trimming  winter  clothing,  under  the  name  of  River 
Sable  Fur. 

The  Pouched  Bat,  often  called  the  Pocket  Gopher, 
makes  its  presence  known  by  its  extensive  under- 
ground burrows.  On  the  outside  of  its  face  are  large 
cheek  pouches — not  connected  with  the  mouth,  but 
in  reality  pockets  in  the  skin;  which  in  some  cases 


34  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

extend  back  as  far  as  the  shoulders.     These  are  use- 
ful in  collecting  and  carrying  food. 

The  Beaver  is  among  the  largest  of  the  gnawing, 
or  rodent  family;  and  was  once  to  be  found  in  almost 
all  North  American  streams;  but  it  has  been  hunted 
and  trapped  for  the  sake  of  its  skin,  so  persistently, 
that  it  is  fast  becoming  extinct.  The  fur  is  reddish 
brown  in  color,  and  of  a  very  fine,  soft  texture.  The 
tail  is  flat  and  scaly,  and  of  great  service  to  the 
animal  while  swimming.  By  means  of  their  sharp 
and  very  powerful  teeth,  beavers  can  readily  and 
rapidly  cut  down  large  trees,  which  they  have  the 
ingenuity  to  fell  in  such  a  way  as  to  cause  them  to 
fall  directly  into  the  water  so  as  to  be  borne  by  the 
current  to  the  spot  desired.  Of  these  trees,  together 
with  rushes,  sticks  and  earth,  the  animals  build  large 
and  substantial  dams  across  the  streams;  thereby 
forming  deep  water  places,  around  which  they  build 
their  dwellings — one  story  always  being  above  water, 
with  the  entrance  below. 

Squirrels  are  extremely  active  and  pretty  creatures, 
with  their  long  ears,  bright  eyes,  glossy  skins  and 
superb  bushy  tails.  They  live  mostly  on  trees, 
feeding  on  fruits  and  nuts,  of  which  they  are  careful 
to  lay  up  an  ample  store  for  winter  use.  It  is  an 
interesting  sight  to  watch  a  squirrel  perched  on  its 
haunches  holding  an  acorn  or  a  nut  between  its  front 
paws,  and  all  the  while  nibbling  at  the  hard  shell. 
After  a  time  a  clean-cut  hole  is  made  through  the 
shell  and  the  little  fellow  falls  to  work  upon  the 
kernel  with  evident  relish.     It  is  said  that  in  collect- 


RODENTS  OR  GNAWING  ANIMALS.  35 

ing  winter  supplies  the  squirrel  takes  each  nut  singly 
in  its  paws  and  judges  from  the  weight  whether  the 
shell  encloses  a  good  kernel  or  is  but  empty; 
in  the  one  case  it  is  stored  away;  in  the  other  it 
is  rejected.  If  alarmed,  a  squirrel  will  run  with 
wondrous  agility  up  the  nearest  tree,  and  then  leap 
from  branch  to  branch,  or  even  from  one  tree  to 
another  with  surprising  speed. 

Flying  Squirrels  have  a  thin  skin  extending  along 
the  side  of  the  body  from  the  front  to  the  hind  legs. 
By  expanding  this  while  in  the  act  of  jumping  they 
are  able  to  make  greater  leaps  than  would  otherwise 
be  possible.  Perhaps  their  large  bushy  tails  are  also  of 
assistance  in  jumping. 

The  charming  little  Striped  Squirrel  or  chipmunk 
of  our  hills,  fields  and  bench  lands  is  provided  with 
cheek  pouches  connected  with  its  mouth,  in  which  it 
carries  its  food  to  its  nest,  either  for  immediate  or 
future  consumption. 

The  Prairie  Dog  is  perhaps  the  quaintest  little 
animal  of  the  whole  squirrel  kind,  and  is  to  be  found 
on  our  western  plains  and  dry  deserts,  living  in 
underground  burrows.  Usually  large  numbers  con- 
gregate in  the  same  locality,  constituting  what  is 
called  a  Prairie  Dog  Village.  They  seem  to  be  very 
inquisitive  little  creatures,  frequently  to  be  seen  sitting 
on  their  haunches  outside  their  burrows  and  watching 
with  apparent  concern  the  passers-by;  but  at  the 
least  sign  of  danger,  with  a  rapid  motion  each  little 
fellow  dives  into  his  hole,  at  the  same  time  uttering 
a  short,  sharp  bark  or  yelp,  from  which  circumstance 


36  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

the  name  of  prairie  dog  has  been  bestowed.  The 
members  of  a  Dog  Village  seem  to  act  in  such  perfect 
order  and  system  as  to  lead  many  people  to  think 
that  they  are  a  regularly  organized  community. 


CHAPTER    VIII. 

THE     BIRDS. 

^fSMONG  the  most  pleasing  and  interesting  sub- 
(tjttJ>  jects  of  the  whole  animal  kingdom  are  the 
birds.  Their  beautiful  plumage,  graceful 
actions,  and,  above  all,  their  inspiring  songs, 
combine  to  charm  even  the  least  susceptible  among 
us.  And  then,  what  an  infinite  diversity  in  form 
and  habit,  they  present  to  our  view!  Look  upon  the 
majestic  eagle,  soaring  in  dreamy  state  through  the 
medium  of  the  "upper  deep,"  or  standing  in  grave 
supremacy  on  a  rugged  mountain  cliff;  then  con- 
template, in  contrast,  the  flitting,  flashing,  darting 
humming-bird,  scarce  larger  than  your  thumb;  yet 
presenting  a  wider  variety  of  colors,  and  finer  com- 
binations and  contrasts  in  tint,  than  could  be 
brought  together  by  the  hand  of  a  master  artist,  on 
a  canvass  many  times  its  size.  Does  not  Nature 
delight  in  true  beauty  and  wide  variety? 

Watch  for  a  moment,  the  wood-thrush,  or  the 
robin,  mounted  high,  and  greeting  with  joyous  soug, 
the  sun's  return.  See  its  little  breast  throb  as  if 
about  to  burst  with  melody;  its  whole  body  intoxi- 


THE  BIRDS.  87 

cated  with  the  harmony  of  its  hymn.  Is  it  not  to 
us  a  fair  example  of  thankful  prayer  for  all  the 
blessings  of  light  and  warmth,  of  happiness  and  of 
life? 

Who  taught  these  birds  to  sing?  Surely  one  who 
rejoices  in  the  musical  mysteries  of  those  happy 
songs,  who  knows  the  deep  import  of  every  note,  and 
takes  delight  therein.  What  unbounded  trust  and 
implicit  faith  that  little  bird  possesses,  relying  with 
full  confidence,  upon  the  providing  care  of  its  Maker; 
as  if  knowing  well  that  without  His  knowledge,  not 
one  of  its  family  falls  to  the  ground.  Surely  this 
world  is  a  much  better  and  more  cheerful  place  for  the 
presence  of  birds.  Then,  let  the  happy  songsters  be 
protected  among  us.  Boys,  check  your  reckless  love  for 
the  slaughter  of  such  innocents  as  these;  never  set 
your  target-gun  or  catapult  against  one  of  them;  it 
is  a  barbarous  nature  that  can  be  satisfied  only  by 
blood.  Life  is  a  mysterious  and  God  given  power — 
a  power, 

"Which  all  can  take,  but  none  can  give," 
and  everything  possessed  of  life,  should  be  sacred  to 
us  all. 

Observe  the  great  care  and  the  provident  concern 
with  which  the  Creator  has  fashioned  the  bird's  body 
in  all  its  parts.  Being  intended  primarily  for  flight, 
the  structure  combines  muscular  strength  with  small 
bulk  and  great  lightness.  The  air  taken  into  the 
bird's  lungs  spreads  itself  throughout  the  body,  and 
even  enters  the  bones,  which  are  made  hollow  for 
this  purpose;  so  that  when  a  bird  takes  a  full  breath 


38  FIRST  BOOK  OP'  NATURE. 

its  whole  body  is  inflated  and  thus  well  prepared  for 
aerial  travel.  The  muscles  operating  the  wings  are 
comparatively  large  and  remarkably  strong;  and  this 
is  especially  true  of  birds  that  fly  much.  Compare 
for  instance  the  pectoral  muscles  on  the  breast  of  the 
wild  duck  with  those  of  a  domestic  fowl — in  the 
former  case  the  flesh  is  dark  colored  and  well  sup- 
plied with  blood  to  nourish  those  much  used  parts, 
whereas  the  chicken's  breast  is  white  and  compara- 
tively bloodless  through  disuse. 

Look  now  at  the  feathers  covering  the  bird's  body; 
a  moment's  careful  study  of  these  simple  appendages 
will  not  prove  to  be  entirely  without  value.  A  large 
quill  feather  from  the  wing,  for  instance,  is  seen  to 
consist  of  a  central  tube  or  shaft,  attached  to  which 
on  either  side  is  a  blade-like  expansion  called  the 
vane.  If  we  provide  a  small  magnifying  glass  and 
by  its  assistance  look  steadily  at  the  feathery  vane, 
we  will  find  it  to  be  composed  of  a  great  many 
separate  branches,  each  of  which  consists  of  still 
smaller  ones;  and  the  edges  of  the  finest  are  covered 
with  little  barbs,  which  hook  themselves  together  so 
as  to  form  a  continuous  blade.  As  the  bird  flies,  the 
feather  strikes  the  air  with  its  broad  surface  as  a 
boat-oar  does  the  water,  but  in  the  return  stroke 
only  the  sharp  edge  is  presented.  Beside  such  large 
and  compact  feathers,  there  are  many  smaller  plumes 
to  be  seen;  these  have  not  the  barbed  edges,  and 
consequently  the  fibres  are  loose  and  separate, 
seemingly  designed  as  a  protection  against  cold. 

In  comparison  with  the  size  of  its  body,  a  bird's 


THE   BIRDS.  39 

head  is  extremely  small,  and  very  light — an  admir- 
able adaptation  to  easy  flight.  Instead  of  a  large 
mouth  rilled  with  teeth,  birds  have  beaks,  some  short 
and  stout  as  the  robin's  and  sparrow's,  others  hooked 
and  sharp-pointed,  like  those  of  the  hawk  and  eagle, 
and  still  others  like  the  duck's,  flat  and  spreading. 
Birds  swallow  their  food  whole;  it  passes  first  into  a 
small  sack  called  the  crop,  thence  into  a  second 
receptacle,  becoming  continually  softened  by  the 
action  of  the  digestive  fluids,  and  then  into  the 
gizzard — a  very  thick  walled  stomach,  usually  con- 
taining sand,  gravel,  and  other  hard  substances  which 
the  bird  has  swallowed.  By  the  movements  of  the 
gizzard,  and  the  grinding  of  the  hard  bodies  therein 
contained,,  the  food  soon  becomes  reduced  to  a  finer 
condition,  and  is  ultimately  absorbed. 

The  young  of  birds  are  produced  from  eggs,  previ- 
ously laid  by  the  hen,  and  each  covered  with  a  hard 
shell.  Reptiles,  such  as  the  tortoise,  and  serpent, 
also  produce  eggs  which  in  shape  and  size  greatly 
resemble  birds'  eggs,  but  these  have  a  tough  leathery 
skin  instead  of  a  hard  brittle  shell.  Inside  the  shell, 
each  egg  is  seen  to  consist  of  a  white  portion  and  a 
yellow  part  or  yelk  (sometimes  called  the  yolk).  If 
we  examine  the  uninjured  yelk  of  a  freshly  laid  egg, 
there  will  be  noticed  a  small  whitish  speck  floating 
on  the  surface;  this  is  called  the  germ,  and  under  the 
influence  of  warmth  it  undergoes  a  strange  develop- 
ment, and  eventually  appears  as  a  living  bird.  The 
warmth  of  the  parent  bird's  body  is  naturally  em- 
ployed in  the  hatching;  but  artificial  heat  may  be 


40  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

used  with  success.  The  ostrich,  a  large  bird  inhab- 
iting the  sandy  deserts  of  Africa,  frequently  leaves 
its  eggs  uncovered  during  the  warm  parts  of  the  day, 
knowing  that  the  heat  of  the  sun  will  be  sufficient  to 
continue  the  incubation.  A  peculiarly  ingenious 
habit  is  practised  by  the  Mound  Birds  of  Australia. 
Instead  of  sitting  upon  the  eggs,  they  place  them  in 
large  heaps  of  decaying  vegetable  matter,  which  they 
have  previously  collected  and  prepared  for  the  pur- 
pose; the  heat  generated  by  the  decay  proves  to  be 
all  that  is  requisite  in  the  process. 

The  period  of  incubation  varies  with  different 
species  of  birds.  The  eggs  of  the  humming-bird 
hatch  in  twelve  days;  canaries,  from  fifteen  to  eighteen 
days;  fowls,  twenty-one;  ducks,  twenty-five  and  swans, 
about  forty-five.  When  the  young  bird  is  developed, 
and  ready  to  escape  from  the  shell,  it  makes  a  hole 
in  the  latter  by  means  of  a  hardened  appendage  on 
its  beak,  which  Nature  seems  to  have  provided 
especially  for  this  purpose;  for  soon  after  the  bird 
leaves  the  shell,  the  hardened  point,  being  of  no 
further  use,  falls  off,  furnishing  another  and  strong 
illustration  of  Nature's  tendency  to  do  away  with  all 
superfluities. 

The  size  of  the  eggs  produced  is  in  general  pro- 
portionate to  the  size  of  the  birds.  The  largest  eggs 
are  those  of  the  ostrich  and  the  emu,  a  single  one 
weighing  as  much  as  do  three  dozen  eggs  of  the  barn- 
yard fowl.  They  are  used  as  food,  and  the  shells 
being  very  stout  and  strong  make  admirable  water 
vessels.      In   contrast,    the   eggs   of    the    fairy-like 


THE  BIRDS.  41 

humming-bird  may  be  named,  in  size  about  that 
of  a  pea  and  of  a  pure  white  color.  Generally  the 
larger  birds  lay  but  few  eggs;  the  eagle  for  instance 
lays  two,  while  the  little  wren  occasionally  deposits 
twelve  in  a  nest.*  To  this  also  there  are  exceptions, 
which,  however,  cannot  fail  to  do  as  much  to 
strengthen  our  belief  in  the  divine  foresight  which 
has  planned  all,  as  the  rule  itself.  The  ostrich, 
already  referred  to,  frequently  lays  ten  eggs,  some  of 
which  are  not  produced  until  after  incubation  has 
progressed  and  perhaps  not  until  the  young  birds 
from  the  eggs  first  laid  are  hatched.  The  extra  eggs 
are  destined  to  serve  as  food  for  the  young  ostriches, 
until  they  become  sufficiently  vigorous  to  digest  the 
hard  and  uninviting  fare  of  the  desert,  upon  which 
their  parents  feed.  The  incubation  process  is  one 
of  surpassing  wonder:  man  is  powerless  to  explain, 
far  less  to  imitate,  the  mystic  changes  in  silent  pro- 
gress within -the  shell  of  a  fowl's  egg. 

The  great  attachment  of  birds  for  their  mates,  and 
the  unusually  strong  parental   instincts,    implanted 
for  a  wise  purpose  within  their  feathered  bosoms, 
find   fullest  expression  during  the  breeding  season. 


*  The  most  prolific  egg-producers  among  birds  are  the 
domesticated  varieties  which  have  been  bred  and  cared  for 
by  man  for  long  periods.  Tame  ducks  sometimes  produce 
over  a  hundred  eggs  within  four  or  five  months;  while  the 
barn-yard  fowl  lays  frequently  120  eggs  during  the  year. 
The  rearing  of  such  birds  for  their  eggs  is  now  a  profitable 
and  an  important  industry.  In  1870  there  were  imported 
into  Great  Britain  alone  753  millions  of  eggs,  valued  at 
$13,100,000. 


42  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

After  the  nest  is  built  and  the  eggs  are  laid,  the 
long  and  tedious  labor  of  incubation  is  begun  by  the 
female;  while  the  male  usually  remains  perched  in 
some  neighboring  bush  or  tree,  ready  to  defend  his 
household  charge  against  any  foe;  and,  in  the  mean- 
time, he  enlivens  the  heart  of  his  patient  mate  by 
giving  voice  to  a  joyous  song,  occasionally  taking 
her  place  on  the  nest  for  a  short  time,  while  she 
enjoys  her  daily  exercise  and  her  meals.  When  the 
little  ones  appear,  the  duties  of  both  parents  are  of  a 
different,  though  very  laborious  nature,  nearly  all 
their  time  and  attention  being  demanded  to  supply 
food  to  their  eager  offspring;  and  no  amount  of  hard- 
ship and  self-denial  seems  too  great  to  be  borne,  if 
the  babies  can  be  protected  and  fed. 

In  defense  of  their  eggs  or  young,  even  small  birds 
fight  most  desperately,  not  hesitating  to  attack  larger 
birds,  animals,  reptiles  or  men,  who  attempt  to 
desecrate  their  homes.  Some  of  our  smallest  and 
sweetest  of  singing  birds,  ordinarily  of  so  tender  and 
timid  a  nature  that  we  would  scarcely  think  them 
capable  of  a  daring  deed,  have  been  known  to  fear- 
lessly dart  on  large  snakes  or  even  cats  that  seek  to 
rob  their  nests;  and  many  a  man  has  been  driven  out 
of  his  own  barn  loft  by  a  pair  of  owls  who  had  estab- 
lished their  home  iu  that  place.  Yet  the  courage  of 
birds  seeking  to  protect  their  homes,  is  not  of  the 
blind,  rash  kind,  so  often  seen  among  men  who  are 
terrorized  and  excited.  No;  they  seldom  lose  their 
presence  of  mind;  but  often  display  at  such  times  most 
cunning  and  ingenious  devices  to  draw  the  enemy 


THE  BIRDS.  43 

away.  A  dove  or  a  partridge  on  being  disturbed  on 
its  nest  by  the  approach  of  man  or  dog,  will  often 
flutter  along  only  a  short  distance  ahead  of  the  pur- 
suer, and  sometimes  under  his  very  feet,  acting  as  if 
lamed  or  injured,  and  thus  tempting  a  chase — always 
leading  the  enemy  farther  away  from  the  nest  with 
its  precious  inmates. 

Among  the  many  foes  which  the  sitting  birds  have 
cause  to  fear,  we  may  mention  reptiles,  carnivorous 
quadrupeds,  and  birds  of  prey,  and  perhaps  crudest 
of  all,  children  with  uncurbed  passions  for  destruc- 
tion. It  is  disgraceful  and  wicked  to  molest  an  in- 
nocent bird;  and  in  addition,  cowardly  and  cruel  to 
injure  its  nest  or  steal  its  offspring.  The  grief  man- 
ifested by  the  parent  birds  on  being  deprived  of  their 
young,  is  pitiful  to  witness;  and  their  cries  of  distress 
are  not  unheard  by  the  kind  Creator  "who  made  and 
loveth  all."  As  we  hope  to  receive  kind  treatment 
and  mercy  from  our  Father,  let  us  be  willing  to  show 
the  same  toward  His  humbler  creatures,  wTho  are  far 
more  innocent  in  His  sight  than  the  man  or  boy  with 
barbarous  and  wanton  instincts  of  slaughter. 

CHAPTER  IX. 

BIRDS    AT   HOME. 

(||s£j?HE  great  solicitude  of  birds  for  their  young  is 
(H/3   beautifully  shown  in  the  care  bestowed  upon 

¥the  nest.     Nests  are  built  solely  for  the  pur- 
pose of  rearing  the  progeny,  and  not  to  form  a 
home  for  the  old  birds  at  all;  for  in  the  winter-time 


44  FIRST  BOOK  OF   NATURE. 

when  shelter  is  most  needed  the  nests  are  entirely 
discarded. 

Many  of  the  larger  birds,  such  as  the  eagle  family, 
content  themselves  with  a  somewhat  rude  nest  lodged 
on  a  projecting  crag,  or  between  the  branches  of  a 
tall  tree,  and  consisting  of  such  coarse  materials  as 
sticks  and  twigs,  lined,  however,  very  comfortably 
with  hair,  wool  or  feathers.  But  many  smaller 
species  of  our  feathered  friends  display  wonderful 
skill  and  unbounded  care  in  the  construction  of  their 
children's  homes. 

Look  at  the  pretty  cradle-nest  of  the  humming 
bird;  it  is  a  masterpiece  of  skill — in  size  not 
larger  than  a  small  blue  plum,  but  shaped  with  all 
the  care  that  an  expert  weaver  could  bestow.  The 
materials  of  which  it  consists  are  soft  mosses  and 
delicate  lichens,  generally  collected  by  the  male,  and 
artistically  arranged  by  his  mate;  the  crevices  are 
closed  by  a  kind  of  glue  formed  from  the  saliva  of  the 
bird;  and  the  inside  is  lined  and  padded  with  the 
richest  and  softest  of  vegetable  silk.  Not  less  won- 
derful, though  entirely  different,  are  the  nests  of  the 
wren,  the  hedge-sparrow,  the  finches,  the  blue  jay  and 
the  magpie;  all  of  them  show  the  effects  of  a  Master's 
teaching. 

In  the  autumn,  after  the  leaves  have  fallen  and  the 
trees  and  bushes  are  bare,  much  may  be  learned  by 
a  close  examination  of  the  empty  and  forsaken  nests 
of  the  past  summer's  songsters.  See  with  what  care 
these  little  creatures  have  selected  the  locality  and 
position  best  calculated  to  ensure  the  safety  of  their 


BIRDS  AT  HOME.  45 

homes — perhaps  a  forked  bough  deeply  hidden  in  the 
heart  of  a  leafy  bush,  or  a  crevice  in  some  dried 
tree  trunk,  or  a  sheltered  ledge  of  rock.  Peep  within 
one  of  these  cozy  cots,  and  see  the  provisions  made 
for  the  comfort  of  the  birdlings;  here  they  were 
hatched  and  reared,  learning  from  the  solicitous  care 
of  their  parents,  their  own  future  duty.  Look  speci- 
ally at  the  nest  of  the  tiny  wren:  from  the  outside 
it  seems  little  more  than  a  ball  of  straw,  but  within 
it  is  lined  as  soft  as  a  lady's  muff  of  costly  fur  and 
finest  silk;  there  is  an  entrance  on  the  side  thus  pro- 
viding a  roofed  top  to  keep  out  the  rain. 

The  Bottle-Tit  is  a  small  bird,  found  at  the  Cape 
of  Good  Hope,  and  remarkable  for  the  ingenuity 
displayed  in  the  forming  of  its  nest.  This  is  woven  of 
cotton,  somewhat  in  the  shape  of  a  bottle,  and  of  such 
careful  workmanship  that  a  single  loose  fibre  is  rarely 
to  be  seen.  While  the  hen  bird  is  sitting  within,  the 
male  keeps  careful  watch  from  his  seat  in  a  little 
pouch,  built  for  the  purpose,  on  the  neck  of  the 
curiously  shaped  abode.  When  the  old  birds  leave 
the  nest,  even  for  a  short  time,  the  opening  is  securely 
closed.  But  in  elegance  of  construction,  even  this 
nest  is  surpassed  by  that  of  the  Pendulum  Titmouse, 
a  bird  no  larger  than  a  sparrow,  and  found  chiefly  in 
Africa  and  India.  Its  nest  is  in  shape  like  a  long- 
necked  retort,  such  as  is  used  by  chemists,  and  is 
hung  from  a  branch  of  a  tree,  with  the  opening 
downward.  Nothing  is  employed  in  its  construction 
but  the  finest  moss  and  down,  woven  so  compactly 
that  it  forms  a  kind  of  felt  which  is  an  admirable  non- 


46 


FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 


conductor  of  heat,  thus  insuring  the  eggs  and  young 
good  protection  from  the  extremes  of  temperature. 

The  Tailor  Bird  is  a  well  deserved  title  bestowed 
on  a  peculiar  variety  native  in  India.  The  nest  is 
built  in  a  large  leaf,  the  edges  of  which  have  been 
sewn  together  to  form  a  kind  of  sack.  In  this  labor, 
the  ingenious  little  seamstress  employs  a  fine  kind  of 
flexible  grass  as  thread,  and  her  own  sharp  bill  is  an 
admirable  needle.  If  a  single  leaf  sufficiently  large 
cannot  be  found,  two  smaller  ones  are  sewn  together. 
This  forms  but  the  casing  or  holder  for  the  nest, 
which  is  then  built  within,  of  grass  and  fibre,  and 
thoroughly  lined.  In  this  pendulous  cradle,  the 
young  are  reared,  gaily  rocked  by  every  breath  of 
air.     What  child  can  boast  of  so  ingenious  a  bed? 


'-n. 


Fig.  9.— The  Weaver  Birds'  Home.  • 
Another  feathered  resident  of  the  Cape  of  Good 
Hope  claims  our  attention  by  reason  of  the  peculi- 
arity of  its  nest,  viz.  the  Sociable  Weaver  Bird,  or 
as  some  people  name  it,  the  Republican  Bird.  A 
picture  of  its  strange  dwelling  is  shown  in  figure  9. 


BIRDS  AT  HOME.  47 

A  great  number  of  these  birds  live  together  as  a 
colony:  sometimes  as  many  as  six  hundred  building 
in  a  single  tree.  They  first  construct  a  huge  frame 
work  about  the  trunk  of  a  tree,  resembling  some- 
what an  expanded  umbrella  in  form,  and  beneath 
this  great  dome,  each  has  its  own  apartment.  An 
idea  of  the  size  and  weight  of  such  a  nest  may  be 
gained  from  the  statement  of  Levaillant,  that  in 
moving  one  of  them,  he  was  compelled  to  employ  a 
wagon  and  several  men. 

A  peculiar  kind  of  swallow  is  found  on  the  coasts 
of  China,  Java  and  Sumatra,  which  forms  a  nest 
unlike  that  of  any  other  bird.  The  little  builder  col- 
lects a  soft,  slimy  sea  weed,  abundant  in  the  neigh- 
borhood, and  cements  the  same  by  the  aid  of  its  own 
glutinous  saliva  into  a  kind  of  isinglass.  These  are 
the  edible  bird's  nests,  considered  by  epicures  as  a 
great  delicacy  for  the  table.  Soup  made  from  these 
nests  is  among  the  most  expensive  of  such  luxuries, 
yet  it  is  in  such  high  favor  with  the  wealthy,  that 
the  collection  and  exportation  of  edible  nests  forms 
a  profitable  avocation  in  the  parts  where  they  are 
found.* 

The  noisy  magpie,  so  common  about  our  copses 
and   hills,  is  a   phenomenal   thief;   and   apparently 

*  This  peculiar  kind  of  food  is  more  widely  consumed 
than  is  generally  known.  Figuier  states  that  from  the 
coast  of  Cochin  China  alone,  over  four  millions  of  nests 
are  exported  annually:  the  proprietors  of  one  cavern  in 
Java,  which  is  frequented  by  the  Esculent  Swallow,  re- 
ceive twenty-five  thousand  dollars  per  year  rent  for  the 
place. 


48  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

thinking  that  its  own  dishonest  tricks  may  be  imitated 
by  others,  it  takes  the  precaution  to  surround  its 
nest  with  a  thorny  hedge. 

Some  varieties  of  East  Indian  birds  exhibit  a  most 
remarkable  domestic  arrangement  during  the  hatch- 
ing season.  As  soon  as  the  eggs  are  laid,  the  male 
imprisons  the  female  upon  her  nest  by  building  a 
stout  wall  of  mud  about  the  same,  leaving  only  a 
small  opening  for  the  supply  of  air  and  food.  The 
latter  commodity  he  supplies  with  assiduous  care 
during  the  whole  period,  and  as  soon  as  the  birdlings 
are  hatched  he  joyously  breaks  down  the  barriers  and 
liberates  his  patient  spouse. 

Many  birds  habitually  hang  their  nests,  as  the 
golden-crested  wren,  orioles  and  humming-birds,  and 
such  find  at  times  that  their  cradles  are  liable  to  be 
overthrown  through  the  increasing  weight  of  the 
thriving  brood.  In  these  cases  they  promptly  provide 
an  equipoise  by  loading  the  opposite  side  of  the  nest 
with  small  stones  or  mud.  Is  not  this  a  mark  of  a 
high  intelligence,  looking,  indeed,  very  much  like 
reason?  They  do  not  weight  the  nests  until  the 
necessity  for  such  a  precaution  is  plain. 

Not  all  birds  exhibit  the  same  degree  of  care  and 
skill  either  in  the  nest  building  or  any  other  duty  of 
life.  There  are  to  be  found  good  and  bad,  kind  and 
cruel,  skillful  and  careless,  obedient  and  rebellious 
among  birds  as  among  men.  Many  birds  are  known 
to  use  the  discarded  nests  of  others  rather  than  build 
themselves,  and  some  have  been  known  to  forcibly 
dispossessthe  rightfuloccupants  and  appropriate  their 


BIRDS  AT  HOME.  49 

homes.  Such  is  not  an  infrequent  trick  of  the  pug- 
nacious little  house-sparrow,  which  easily  drives  the 
inoffensive  swallow  from  its  cozy  nest  of  mud  beneath 
the  eaves.  The  Cuckoos  of  the  Eastern  Hemisphere 
and  the  Cow-Birds  of  the  Western  habitually  deposit 
their  eggs  in  the  nests  of  other  birds,  and  leave  them 
there  to  be  hatched  by  the  owner  of  the  nursery. 
The  young  cuckoo  seems  to  know  that  its  foster 
parents  will  never  be  able  to  keep  its  hungry  mouth 
well  fed,  and  care  for  their  own  legitimate  offspring 
at  the  same  time,  so,  being  larger  than  the  others,  he 
manages  to  get  them  one  by  one  on  his  back  and 
soon  pitches  them  out  of  the  nest.  As  the  cuckoo 
builds  no  nest,  neither  sits  on  her  eggs  nor  nourishes 
her  young  she  has  been  often  referred  to  as  the  type 
of  a  careless  mother  and  a  truant  wife.  But  she  has 
a  maternal  instinct  within  her  breast  as  have  others, 
and  a  little  study  of  cuckoo  life  will  perhaps  aid  us  in 
understanding  such  recreant  tricks.  Cuckoos  do  not 
pair  like  most  other  birds  in  the  breeding  season; 
and  the  hen  bird  does  not  lay  all  her  eggs  at  one 
time.  She  produces  eight  or  ten  eggs  during  the 
course  of  a  few  weeks;  in  consequence  of  this,  even  if 
she  did  undertake  to  construct  a  nest,  she  would  of 
necessity  have  to  build  it  alone,  without  the  assist- 
ance of  a  mate;  but  if  the  nest  were  completed  and 
the  first  eggs  hatched,  she  would  have  to  provide 
food  for  her  young  while  still  trying  to  cover  the  eggs 
produced  later.  Apparently  knowing  that  such  a 
labor  could  not  be  performed  with  satisfaction  and 
success,  she  declines  to  make  the  attempt.     As  soon 


50  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

as  an  egg  is  laid,  she  takes  it  in  her  beak  and  flies  to 
the  nest  of  some  small  inoffensive  warbler  such  as  the 
lark,  red-throat,  robin-redbreast,  hedge-sparrow  or 
nightingale,  and  leaves  it  there.  She  seems  to  watch 
for  the  absence  of  the  proprietor  of  the  nest  in  making 
the  addition.  One  observer  tells  of  a  red-throat 
coming  home  unexpectedly  and  finding  a  cuckoo  at 
her  nest;  the  little  house-keeper  at  once  began  an 
assault  and  soon  compelled  the  stranger  to  retire  with 
her  burden.  If  not  interrupted,  however,  the  cuckoo 
will  safely  deposit  her  egg;  but  it  is  said  she  is  never 
known  to  bring  a  second  one  to  the  same  nest.  She 
visits  the  nests,  in  which  her  eggs  have  been  placed, 
several  times  before  leaving  the  neighborhood,  appar- 
ently to  satisfy  herself  that  her  progeny  have  been 
left  in  tender  care.  She  is  therefore  not  entirely  free 
from  parental  anxiety  regarding  her  offspring;  but  I 
do  not  seek  to  fully  justify  the  creature  in  her  truant 
and  unsteady  life,  especially  if  the  following  be  true. 
Louis  Figuier,  the  French  naturalist,  states  that  the 
cuckoo,  after  depositing  her  own  egg  in  a  stranger's 
nest,  frequently  takes  one  of  the  other  eggs  from  the 
nest,  breaks  it  and  scatters  the  shell;  so  that  when 
the  lady  of  the  house  returns  she  finds  only  the  usual 
number  of  eggs  and  apparently  is  slow  to  discover 
the  deception.  Such  an  act  would  seemingly  indicate 
a  degree  of  careful  thought  and  reason;  but  the 
intelligence  so  shown  is  used  to  assist  the  bird  in  its 
knavery.  And  such  a  condition  of  things  is  not 
without  its  parallel  among  the  unfeathered  bipeds  of 
the  world;  too  frequently  men  use  their  knowledge 


BIRDS  OF   PREY.  51 

and  skill  whereby  to  bring  imposition   upon  their 
trustful  and  non-suspecting  fellows. 


CHAPTER  X. 

BIRDS   OF    PREY. 

^jg^HE  birds  of  prey,  include  some  of  the  largest 
among  the  whole  order  of  birds.     Many  of 
them  are  well  known;  though  the  links  which 
bind  them  to  the  memory,  are  not  associated 
with  the  grace  and  beauty  of  form  and  voice,  so 
characteristic  of  the  smaller  and  less  pretentious  birds. 
As  their  name  implies,  these  birds  feed  habitually 
upon   flesh;    the    bodies   of  other   birds   and   small 
quadrupeds  usually  supplying  their  larders.     They 
are,  indeed,  the  scourge  and  terror  of  all  the  rest  of 
the  feathered  tribes;   and  for  the  pursuit,   capture, 
and  killing  of  their  prey,  they  seem  to  be  specially 
adapted.     The  beak  of  a  bird  of  prey  is  usually  very 
strong  and  sharp,   and  of  a  hooked  shape,  with  a 
characteristic  naked  membrane  or  skin,  called  the 
cere,  at  the  base.     The  toes  are  very  flexible,  ter- 
minated by  hooked  talons,  and  operated  by  powerful 
muscles;  even  a  hasty  glance  convinces  an  observer 
that  such  are  terrible  weapons,  when  vigorously  used. 
Of  this  large  class,  we  find  in  nearly  all  parts  of  the 
country,  eagles,  hawks  and  owls;  and  on  the  Pacific 
Coast,  and    in    South   America,    several   species   of 
vultures  in  addition. 

Among  the  last  named  division  is  the   Condor  of 


52  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

the  Andes,  a  vulture  of  the  largest  kind.  It  often 
shows  a  spread  of  wings  of  from  eight  to  twelve  feet, 
and  the  length  of  the  bird  from  beak  to  tail,  averages 
four  feet.  Its  plumage  is  of  a  blue-black  tint,  con- 
trasting strongly  with  which  is  a  collar  on  the  back 
and  sides  of  the  neck,  of  dazzling  whiteness.  The 
upper  part  of  the  neck  and  the  crest,  as  with  all 
vultures,  is  devoid  of  feathers;  being  covered  with 
a  tough,  semi-cartilaginous  coat.  Like  others  of 
the  vulture  kind,  the  condor  seldom  kills  its  own 
prey,  unless  it  be  some  animal  rendered  weak  and 
helpless,  from  age  or  disease;  usually  the  creature 
prefers  to  feed  upon  the  dead  and  decaying  bodies  of 
animals,  which,  through  the  agency  of  wonderfully 
keen  senses  of  sight  and  smell,  it  is  enabled  to 
recognize  from  a  great  distance.*  It  is  extremely 
gluttonous  in  its  habits,  so  much  so,  that  after  a  full 
meal,  it  is  so  gorged  as  to  be  unable  to  fly.  Taking 
advantage  of  this  propensity,  the  inhabitants  of  the 
regions  frequented  by  condors,  often  destroy  great 
numbers  of  the  birds,  by  setting  out  for  them  carrion 
flesh  in  abundance;  after  their  meal  is  over,  the 
capture  of  the  greedy  creatures  is  an  easy  matter. 

*  The  extravagant  stories,  related  of  the  condors  daring, 
seem,  generally,  to  lack  foundation.  Those  who  have 
studied  the  habits  of  the  bird  most  closely  say  that  it  will 
never  attack  large  animals,  except  they  be  helpless,  or 
unless  it  is  compelled  to  tight  in  self-defence.  Even  men 
have  been  known  to  be  attacked  by  these  rapacious 
monsters,  when  famished  and  overcome  from  hunger,  or 
fatigue;  but,  an  observer,  who  has  had  good  opportunity 
of  judging,  writes,  that  a  boy  of  ten  years,  armed  with  a 
stick,  can  easily  put  a  condor  to  flight. 


BIRDS  OF  PREY. 


53 


Fig.  10. 


-White-headed 
Eagle. 


Among  Eagles  we  find  in  the  United  States,  the 
bald  eagle,  more  properly  called  the  white-headed 
eagle  and  the  rarer  golden  eagle. 

The  white-headed  eagle  is 
i  widely  distributed'over  North 
America.  This  bird  is  the 
chosen  symbol  of  our  na- 
tion.* It  feeds  principally  on 
hares,  chickens,  young  lambs 
and  even  larger  animals  such 
as  sheep,  calves  and  pigs,  and 
at  times  it  betrays  a  special 
fondness  for  fish,  though  rare- 
ly taking  the  trouble  to 
catch  them  for  itself.  The 
osprey  is  a  smaller  species  of  eagle,  with  a  great 
propensity  for  fishing,  and  it  is  usually  successful  in 
its  sport.  Of  this  fact  the  white-headed  eagle  seems 
well  aware,  and  is  ever  on  the  alert  to  rob  the 
osprey  of  its  booty. 

In  the  eagle  the  sense  of  vision  is  very  keenly 
developed.  When  soaring  in  conscious  majesty  far 
above  the  highest  mountain  crags,  so  high  in,  fact,  as 
to  be  almost  imperceptible  to  the  human  eye  from 
below,  he  sees  a  wild  fowl  or  a  hare  on  the  plain,  and, 

*  Dr.  Steele  has  made  the  somewhat  humorous  remark: 
"Equally  indifferent  to  the  extremes  of  heat  and  cold,  as 
well  as  to  a  maritime  or  an  inland  life;  now  honestly  pur- 
suing an  independent  vocation,  and  anon  acting  the  part 
of  a  freebooter,  and  robbing  the  fish-hawk  of  its  well- 
earned  food,  it  is  not  an  altogether  unsuitable  emblem  of 
the  nation." 


54  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

folding  his  wings,  drops  like  a  weight  to  within  a 
short  distance  of  the  earth,  then  preparing  his  talons 
he  seizes  his  prey  and  bears  it  away  to  a  place  of 
security.  The  swiftness  of  the  eagle's  flight  is  pro- 
verbially known;  one  naturalist  claims  that  the  bird 
is  able  to  sustain  a  speed  of  forty  miles  an  hour. 
Certain  it  is  that  its  speed  is  wonderful,  and  its 
muscular  power  and  strength  still  more  so.  Eagles 
carry  off  even  sheep  and  young  deer  to  their  aeries; 
and  the  sight  of  an  eagle's  nest,  from  the  bones  and 
other  remains  of  their  victims,  might  well  suggest  a 
charnel  house.*  The  eaglets  have  an  almost  insatiable 
appetite;  nevertheless  they  are  able  to  exist  many 
days  without  food.  The  great  naturalist,  BufFon, 
states  that  a  young  eagle  was  once  caught  in  a  trap 
and  kept  five  weeks  without  food,  but  showed  no 
signs  of  feebleness  till  the  last  few  days. 

Illustrative  of  the  great  physical  power  of  eagles 
in  their  flight,  instances  of  children  being  carried  off 
by  these  birds  have  often  been  cited,  and  accounts 
of  such  cases  have  been  recorded  by  some  of  the  most 
trustworthy  observers.     The  following  are  vouched 

for  by  the  best  authority: 

"In  the  canton  of  Vaud  two  little  girls,  one  three  years 

*  The  following  is  recorded  by  Figuier:  "A  peasant  in 
Ireland  kept  himself  and  the  whole  of  his  family  for  an 
entire  season  by  robbing  the  eaglets  in  a  neighboring  aerie 
of  the  stores  of  food  which  were  brought  to  them  by  the 
parent  birds.  In  order  to  prolong  this  singular  means  of 
livelihood,  report  says,  he  endeavored  to  delay  the  moment 
when  the  loved  ones  would  be  driven  forth,  adopting  the 
artifice  of  cutting  their  wings  to  render  them  incapable  of 
flight." 


BIRDS  OF  PREY.  55 

old  and  the  other  five,  were  playing  together  in  a  meadow. 
An  eagle  swooped  down  upon  the  eldest  and  carried  her 
0f£  *  *  *  Two  months  having  elapsed,  a  shepherd  dis- 
covered the  remains  of  the  little  victim  horribly  mutilated 
and  lying  upon  a  rock  half  a  league  from  the  meadow  in 
which  she  was  taken." 

"In  the  Isle  of  Skye,  Scotland,  a  woman  left  her  child 
in  a  field.  An  eagle  carried  off  the  little  one  in  its  talons, 
and  passing  over  a  broad  lake,  laid  it  upon  a  rock.  For- 
tunately the  robber  was  perceived  by  some  shepherds,  who 
came  up  in  time  to  succor  the  infant." 

Another  authentic  case  showing  still  greater  mus- 
cular strength  is  the  following: 

"In  the  canton  of  Geneva  a  boy  ten  years  old,  who  was 
robbing  an  eagle's  nest,  was  seized  by  one  of  the  birds  and 
borne  to  a  point  six  hundred  yards  from  the  spot.  He  was 
rescued  by  his  companion,  however,  without  having  suffered 
further  injury  than  some  severe  wounds  inflicted  by  the 
bird's  talons." 

Hawks,  are  smaller  members  of  the  falcon  family, 
and  exist  in  several  varieties.  The  American  Spar- 
row Hawk  is  among  the  smallest  of  all — scarce  larger 
than  a  robin.  Hawks  are  powerful,  for  their  size; 
though  they  do  not  approach  the  strength  of  the 
eagle  family.  Their  flight,  when  in  pursuit  of  prey, 
is  very  swift. 

Closely  allied  to  them,  is  the  whole  family  of 
Falcons  proper,  perhaps  the  most  rapacious,  and 
certainly  the  most  powerful  of  all  birds  of  prey,  in 
proportion  to  their  size.  In  the  Middle  Ages,  these 
birds,  when  tamed,  were  largely  used  in  the  art  of 
jalconry  or  hawking,  which  consisted  in  loosing 
trained  falcons  or  hawks,  to  pursue  and  capture  other 
birds.     It  was  customary  to  keep  the  falcon  hooded 


56  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

or  covered,  while  hunting,  until  the  game  was  seen; 
then,  being  freed,  the  bird  would  immediately  start 
in  swift  pursuit,  very  rarely  failing  to  secure  the 
prize.  Falcons  could  be  taught  to  capture  herons, 
kites,  crows,  quails  and  pheasants;  besides  hares,  and 
even  gazelles.  In  Egypt,  India,  China  and  Japan, 
the  sport  is  still  practised. 

All  birds  of  prey  seem  possessed  of  wonderful 
tenacity  of  life;  and  if  uninjured  live  to  a  great  age; 
but  such  is  specially  true  of  the  falcons.  It  is  a 
matter  of  record  that  a  falcon  was  captured  at  the 
Cape  of  Good  Hope  in  1797,  apparently  in  full  vigor, 
bearing  upon  its  neck  a  golden  collar,  on  which  was 
an  inscription  dated  1 G 10  and  stating  that  the  bird 
belonged  to  King  James  I  of  England.  It  must 
therefore  have  been  over  one  hundred  and  eighty- 
seven  years  old. 

Owls  are  nocturnal  or  night-roving  in  their  habits, 
and  in  consequence  have  been  always  regarded  with 
a  sort  of  dread.  In  America  there  are  upwards  of 
forty  separate  kinds,  varying  from  the  size  of  a 
dove  to  that  of  a  turkey.  The  plumage  of  owls  is 
exceedingly  soft  and  full;  and  their  flight  is  so 
noiseless  that  they  seem  really  to  be  borne  upon  the 
air  itself  without  effort  of  their  own.  The  eyes  of 
the  whole  owl  tribe  are  exceedingly  large,  and  are 
directed  forward,  instead  of  sideways  as  is  the  case 
with  most  other  birds,  so  that  the  owl  must  needs 
turn  its  head  even  to  glance  on  one  side;  and  this  it 
does  with  such  comical,  quizzical  movements,  as  to 
appear  really  ludicrous.    The  eyes  are  surrounded  by 


BIRDS  OF   PREY.  57 

a  large  facial  disc  of  slender  and  stiff  feathers.  But 
a  more  important  characteristic  of  the  eye  is  the 
excessive  dilation  of  which  the  pupil  is  capable. 
This  enables  the  bird  to  see  more  clearly  in  dim 
light;  though  of  course  the  idea  that  the  owl,  or  in 
fact  any  othe*r  animal,  can  physically  see  in  absolute 
darkness  is  absurd.  The  brilliancy  of  day,  however, 
seems  to  be  almost  insupportable  to  owls,  and  con- 
sequently they  remain  safely  and  snugly  hidden  in 
their  dark  abodes  till  twilight  comes.  If  an  owl  be 
disturbed  during  the  day  and  driven  into  the  light, 
it  is  almost  helpless.  Many  small  birds,  such  as  the 
saucy  black-bird,  and  the  mischievous  sparrow  delight 
to  catch  their  common  enemy  in  such  a  plight;  they 
join  forces  and  usually  pick  and  annoy  him  without 
mercy,  all  the  time  chirping  and  chattering  as  if 
every  one  of  them  were  giving  the  broad-faced  gentle- 
man a  special  lecture,  with  practical  demonstrations 
on  the  evils  of  his  ways. 

Owls  wage  great  destruction  among  mice,  rats  and 
other  farm  vermin,  and  in  consideration  of  this  alone 
they  are  entitled  to  protection  and  respect.  Mr. 
Waterton,  a  very  reliable  observer,  expresses  as  his 
opinion,  that  a  pair  of  Barn  Owls  while  rearing  their 
young,  bring  to  the  nest  four  or  five  mice  every  hour 
during  the  night.  He  domesticated  a  colony  of  owls, 
and  was  rewarded  for  his  pains  by  the  disappearance 
of  rats  and  mice  about  his  premises. 

These  birds  are  far  more  effectual  than  cats  as 
vermin  destroyers  on  a  farm.  As  is  the  case  with  all 
birds  which  subsist  on  living  or  freshly-killed  prey, 


58  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

the  owl  devours  its  food  entire,  swallowing  alike  the 
flesh,  bones  and  hair — usually  rejecting  the  feathers, 
however,  if  birds  have  been  captured.  The  digestive 
organs  are  so  constructed  as  to  readily  separate  the 
digestible  from  the  non-digestible  portions,  which 
latter  are  formed  into  a  ball  within  the  stomach  and 
then  ejected  by  vomiting. 

An  observer  has  thus  described  the  barn  owl's  style 
of  dining:  "The  mouse  is  first  bitten  smartly  across 
the  back  so  as  to  destroy  all  life,  and  when  it  hangs 
motionless  from  the  bird's  beak  it  is  tossed  into  the 
air  very  adroitly  so  as  to  fall  with  its  head  down- 
ward. The  owl  then  catches  the  head  in  his  mouth 
and  holds  it  for  a  few  seconds;  then  a  sharp  toss 
sends  it  down  his  throat,  leaving  the  tail  hanging  out 
usually  at  the  left  side  of  the  bird's  beak.  The  bird 
rolls  this  about  for  a  bit,  as  a  boy  would  a  stick  of 
candy,  and  then  another  jerk  puts  all  out  of  sight." 


CHAPTER   XL 

CLIMBING    BIRDS. 


§&8$LL  climbing  birds  have  their  toes  equally 
Skw  divided,  two  in  front,  and  two  behind;  and  so 
^o^?  arranged  as  to  firmly  grasp  the  branches  and 
tgf  trunks  of  trees.  Among  our  common  birds  of 
this  sort  are  woodpeckers  and  cuckoos  ;  but  in 
warmer  parts,  many  other  varieties  are  found  com- 
prising the  parrots  and  all  their  kindred. 


CLIMBING  BIRDS.  59 

The  Woodpecker  is  finely  adapted  to  the  habits  of 
its  allotted  life,  which  are  in  many  respects  peculiar. 
The  busy  little  bird  may  readily  be  observed  about 
our  woods  and  orchards,  plying  its  avocation  with 
enthusiastic  ardor.  Its  principal  food  consists  of 
insects  and  their  larvae,  in  search  of  which  it  goes 
from  tree  to  tree,  examining  every  crevice  in  wood 
or  bark,  and  occasionally  sounding  the  tree  by  re- 
peated blows  from  its  stout  bill  to  ascertain  if  the 
trunk  be  in  any  part  unsound;  in  which  case,  it 
would  most  probably  secrete  insects.  The  bird  easily 
cuts  holes  in  tree  and  post  to  reach  its  prey;  its 
tongue  is  very  long  and  barbed  at  the  tip,  and  by 
its  aid  the  bird  readily  secures  any  insect  within 
reach.  This  interesting  little  creature  also  bores  in 
wood  to  form  secure  places  for  its  nest.  In  many 
places,  the  woodpecker  has  been  cruelly  treated, 
under  the  mistaken  notion  that  it  is  injurious  to 
trees.  On  the  contrary  it  is  of  very  great  benefit  in 
the  orchard  and  the  forest,  by  ridding  the  trees  of 
destructive  insects  in  great  numbers.  The  wood- 
pecker never  bores  a  sound  limb;  insects  do  not  hide 
in  any  but  dead  wood,  and  stories  about  the  bird's 
injurious  carpentry  are  unconfirmed.  As  already 
stated,  the  cuckoo  belongs  also  to  the  class  of  climb- 
ing birds ;  many  of  the  peculiar  habits  of  the 
European  cuckoo  have  been  already  dwelt  upon  at 
some  length. 

Parrots  are  to  be  found  native  only  in  the  warmer 
parts  of  the  earth,  where  they  live  amid  the  sur- 
roundings of  a  perpetual  summer;  but  they  are  com- 


60  FIRST  BOOK  OF   NATURE. 

mon  in  a  state  of  captivity  nearly  all  over  the  world. 
Only  one  species,  the  Carolina  Parrot  of  the  South- 
ern states,  not  larger  than  a  dove,  is  to  be  met  with 
in  our  country. 

All  parrots  are  characterized  by  a  stout,  thick  bill, 
the  upper  mandible  of  which  far  overlaps  the  lower 
so  as  to  form  a  hooked  beak,  which  proves  of  as 
much  use  in  climbing  and  grasping  small  objects  as 
the  claws.  The  colors  of  some  species  are  most 
gaudy  and  gay;  all  the  tints  of  the  heavenly  bow 
seem  to  have  been  appropriated  to  adorn  their 
dress.  They  are  proud,  too,  of  their  flashy 
apparel,  and  take  great  pains  to  preserve  their  finery 
in  an  unsullied  state.  Bathing  is  a  delight,  aud  in 
the  warm  weather,  they  splash  about  in  the  water, 
with  keen  enjoyment.  Then  they  smooth  and  stroke 
their  plumage,  till  every  fibre  is  laid  aright. 

Parrots  are  especially  remarkable,  on  account  of 
their  varied  powers  of  voice.  They  readily  learn  to 
pronounce  distinctly,  any  word  or  sentence  they  may 
hear;  and  frequently,  they  imitate  familiar  voices,  so 
perfectly,  as  to  deceive  even  intimate  acquaintances. 
They  may  be  taught  to  speak  in  any  ordinary  voice, 
to  shout,  to  sing,  and  to  laugh,  with  all  the  per- 
fection of  a  trained  actor  In  consequence  of  such 
extraordiuarypDwers,  parrots  have  been  widely  adopted 
as  pets,  and  many  an  I  strange  are  the  stories  told  of 
their  loquacity.  It  is  not  to  be  supposed,  however, 
that  these  birds  partake  of  the  spirit  of  true 
lauguage,  so  as  to  form  new  and  independent  sen- 
tences themselves,  from  the  words  they  have  heard. 


CLIMBING  BIRDS.  61 

They  learn  to  imitate  known  sounds  and  to  repeat 
what  they  hear;  frequently,  also,  gaining  an  idea  of 
the  meaning,  from  the  actions  that  accompany  the 
speech;  but  this  is  only  a  highly  developed  act  of 
imitation.  Articulate  speech,  that  is,  language  con- 
sisting of  separate  sentences  and  definite  words, 
seems  to  be  a  gift  to  the  human  family  alone.  All 
birds  and  beasts,  it  is  true,  possess  some  system  of 
communication  between  themselves,  which,  indeed, 
we  may  call  their  language;  but  this  consists  usually 
of  disconnected  sounds,  and  inarticulate  cries,  often 
associated  with  expressive  gestures,  serving,  however, 
the  purposes  of  their  sphere  of  thought  and  action, 
as  fully  and  as  well  as  does  the  heaven-born  speech 
of  man  fit  him  for  his  mode  of  being.  The  language 
of  man  differs  from  that  of  the  animal  creation,  over 
which  he  rules,  in  kind,  as  well  as  in  mere  degree  of 
perfection;  and  his  speech  is  as  far  above  theirs,  as 
are  his  spirit  and  his  mind  superior  to  them.  Parrots, 
however,  and  some  few  other  birds,  learn  to  repro- 
duce the  words  .of  man,  oftentimes  with  strange 
effect. 

The  author  knew  a  fine  gray  parrot  once,  which 
had  been  taught  to  stretch  out  her  foot  when  told  so 
to  do,  and  each  time  she  did  this  her  master  rewarded 
her  with  a  piece  of  sugar.  She  heard  him  say,  "Polly, 
hold  out  your  claw,"  so  often  that  at  length  she 
learned  to  repeat  the  words  in  a  very  perfect  imita- 
tion of  his  voice  and  manner.  Frequently  she  would 
call  out  herself,  "Polly,  hold  out  your  claw;"  and  at 
such  times  she  would  invariably  stretch  out  her  foot, 


62  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

as  if  someone  else  had  told  her  to,  and  then  she  would 
appear  extremely  disappointed  because  the  sugar  was 
not  forthcoming.  The  bird  seemed  not  to  recognize 
the  difference  between  her  own  voice  and  that  of  a 
person  by  her.  Her  performance  then  was  purely  an 
act  of  imitation. 

I  remember  making  the  acquaintance  of  another 
parrot  under  somewhat  peculiar  circumstances. 
Calling  once  at  a  gentleman's  house  on  business,  I 
was  left  alone  for  a  time  in  the  sitting-room — at 
least  I  thought  I  was  alone;  but  soon  I  was  very 
much  surprised  to  hear  in  a  pleasing  time  the  words, 
"Please  scratch  my  head."  Looking  around  with 
no  common  interest  to  discover  the  person  asking 
such  an  unusual  accommodation  at  the  hands  of  a 
stranger,  I  saw,  in  a  corner  of  the  room,  a  large  cage 
containing  a  magnificent  green  parrot.  As  I  ap- 
proached the  cage,  the  pretty  prisoner  repeated  the 
request  and  in  exactly  the  same  tones  of  voice,  at 
the  same  time  bending  her  poll  forward  so  that  I 
could  reach  it  easily  through  the  bars.  I  complied, 
of  course,  rubbing  her  head  for  some  time;  in  which 
process  she  seemed  to  take  considerable  delight,  and 
at  the  conclusion,  in  a  very  distinct  and  pleasant 
manner  she  said,  "Thank  you,  sir."  I  was  inquisitive 
enough  to  ask  the  owner  of  the  bird  how  she  had 
acquired  such  an  education.  He  told  me,  that  finding 
the  parrot  enjoyed  having  her  head  rubbed,  he  made 
it  a  rule  to  do  this  for  her  every  day,  invariably 
repeating  before  beginning  the  process,  "Please 
scratch    my   head,"  and   at   the"    conclusion   always 


CLIMBING  BIRDS.  63 

saying  "Thank  you,  sir,"  till  the  bird  picked  up  the 
words  and  used  them  for  herself.* 

The  many  truly  interesting  species  of  macaws, 
parrakeets,  love-birds  and  cockatoos,  which  we  are 
always  sure  to  find  in  any  traveling  menagerie,  are 
all  varieties  of  the  parrot  tribe. 

Before  forsaking  our  present  subject  of  climbing 
birds,  we  must  mention  the  truly  wonderful  Toucan 
of  the  South  American  forests.  It  has  an  enormous 
bill,  almost  as  large  as  a  boy's  wrist,  while  the  body 
of  the  bird  is  but  little  bigger  than  that  of  a  tame 
pigeon.  Though  apparently  clumsy,  this  wonderful 
beak  is  in  reality  very  light,  being  of  a  spongy  or 
honey-combed  structure,  and  the  bird  seems  to  take 
great  care  of  it — carefully  hiding  it  in  the  feathers 
of  its  wing  and  breast  when  at  roost,  at  the  same 
time  also  curving  its  long  tail  over  the  back,  and 
thus  disposing  of  the  two  lengthened  appendages,  so 
that  its  whole  body  appears  compact  and  inconspicu- 

*  Goldsmith  tells  a  story  about  a  parrot  owned  by  King 
Henry  VIII  of  England.  This  bird  was  usually  confined 
in  a  room  overlooking  the  river  Thames,  in  which  abode  it 
had  learned  many  phrases  from  the  boatmen  and  others 
passing  on  the  river.  One  day  it  fell  from  the  window 
into  the  river,  when  it  cried  with  a  powerful  voice;  "A 
boat!  a  boat!  twenty  pounds  to  save  me."  A  man  on  the 
bank,  hearing  the  cry,  and  thinking  some  one  was  drown- 
ing, sprang  into  the  water  without  delay,  and  was  con- 
siderably surprised  to  find  it  was  only  a  bird.  Recognizing 
the  king's  pet,  he  carried  it  to  the  royal  palace  and  claimed 
the  reward  promised  by  the  bird  when  in  distress.  We 
are  assured  by  the  narrator  that  when  the  circumstance 
was  related  to  the  king,  he  laughed  heartily  and  paid  the 
money  with  a  good  grace. 


64  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

ous.  The  tongue  of  this  bird  is  long,  straight  and 
barbed  on  each  side  like  a  stiff  feather.  From  this 
peculiarity  the  people  of  Brazil,  where  the  bird  is 
often  found,  gave  it  the  name  it  bears.  In  their 
language  toucan  means  "feather." 

The  toucan  feeds  mostly  on  insects  and  soft  fruits, 
in  eating  which  it  tosses  its  head  back  so  that  the 
food  falls  of  itself  into  the  throat,  appearing  at  first 
sight  as  if  the  bird  really  threw  the  morsel  into  the 
air  and  caught  it  again. 


% 


CHAPTER    XII. 

SCRATCHING    BIRDS. 

,*ANY  birds  seem  to  be  adapted  mostly  for  a 
(yj®  life  on  the  ground.  Such  are  the  doves, 
pigeons,  farm -yard  fowls,  turkeys,  prairie- 
chicken,  etc. ;  all  of  them  feeding  mostly  on 
seeds  and  grains.  From  their  habits  when  searching 
for  food  they  are  called  scratching  birds.  These  are 
to  man  among  the  most  useful  of  birds,  furnishing 
him  with  some  of  his  daintiest  foods. 

But  few  of  this  class  are  adapted  for  long  continued 
flight;  but  to  this  a  notable  exception  is  found  in  the 
Wild  Pigeons,  which  are  really  among  the  strongest 
and  swiftest  of  flyers.  Audubon,  the  great  Ornith- 
ologist (one  who  studies  birds)  states  that  he  has 
killed  pigeons  in  the  vicinity  of  New  York  City, 
having  their  crops  still  full  of  rice  which  must  have 


SCRATCHING  BIRDS.  65 

been  gathered  on  the  fields  of  Georgia  and  South 
Carolina — places  from  six  hundred  to  seven  hundred 
miles  away.  As  it  has  been  proved  that  the  digestive 
organs  of  a  pigeon  will  decompose  a  grain  of  rice  in 
less  than  twelve  hours,  these  birds  must  have 
traveled  that  distance  with  the  speed  of  a  fast 
express  train.  A  mile  a  minute  is  said  to  be  common 
flight  for  such  birds.  Wild  pigeons  live  together  in 
large  numbers,  and  frequently  migrate  in  a  body 
when  the  supply  of  food  runs  short.  A  flock  of  such 
travelers  on  the  wing  is  an  imposing  sight.  The 
light  of  the  sun  at  such  times  is  obscured,  as  if  a 
solar  eclipse  were  in  progress,  and  the  sound  of  their 
wings  can  be  compared  only  to  the  rush  of  a  tornado. 
When  they  alight,  they  frequently  pile  upon  each 
other  to  a  considrable  height,  and  the  whole  region 
is  speedily  cleared  of  everything  edible  to  them; 
while  their  weight  frequently  breaks  down  the  trees 
upon  which  they  seek  to  rest.  The  same  authority 
already  referred  to,  Audubon,  estimated  that  a  single 
flock  of  these  birds  which  he  viewed  in  flight,  com- 
prised about  eleven  hundred  and  fifteen  millions; 
and  that  the  food  required  for  such  a  host  would  be 
nearly  nine  millions  of  bushels  per  day. 

Pigeons  have  been  domesticated  by  man  for  many 
years;  and  at  present  a  very  great  number  of  varie- 
ties are  known.  The  Carrier  Pigeon  has  proved 
itself  of  great  service  in  bearing  messages  from  place 
to  place;  and  especially  was  this  benefit  felt  before 
the  invention  of  the  electric  telegraph.  Knowing 
that  these  birds  would  always  go  straight  to  their 


66  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

homes  when  liberated  at  a  distance,  travelers  used  to 
take  several  with  them  on  their  journeys;  and  after 
having  fastened  a  small  note  to  a  carrier's  wing  or 
foot,  would  set  the  bird  free.  It  would  be  seen  im- 
mediately to  rise  in  the  air,  and,  having  made  several 
circular  sweeps  as  if  to  ascertain  the  direction  of  its 
home,  it  would  dart  off  on  a  straight  line  for  its  des- 
tination almost  with  an  arrow's  flight.  Carrier 
pigeons  have  been  known  to  make  an  exceptional 
speed  of  over  one  hundred  miles  in  an  hour,  such, 
however,  could  not  be  continued  for  any  considerable 
length  of  time. 

The  Domestic  Fowl,  another  familiar  example 
among  the  scratchers,  and  fully  deserving  of  the  class 
title,  becomes  readily  attached  to  its  home.  These 
birds  are  poorly  fitted  for  flight,  and  seldom  attempt 
to  rise  in  the  air,  except  as  a  recourse  of  safety  in 
time  of  danger,  or  to  reach  some  elevated  place  to 
crow  or  to  roost.  At  such  times  they  seem  so 
awkward  in  their  attempts,  and  accompany  the  effort 
with  such  a  noisy  cackling  and  fuss,  that  one  must 
think  them  engaged  in  an  unusual  undertaking.  The 
male  fowl,  called  the  cock  or  rooster,  is  a  magnifi- 
cent bird,  carryiug  himself  with  a  dignity  scarcely  to 
be  surpassed;  but  he  is  an  aristocratic  ruler,  if  not 
indeed  a  tyrant  at  times,  in  his  dominion,  and  so 
jealous  is  he  of  his  authority  and  rights,  that  the  in- 
troduction of  another  rooster  within  his  kingdom  is 
a  signal  for  battle:  this  will  be  continued  between 
the  rivals  until  one  is  vanquished.  After  the  victory 
is  decided,  the  defeated  hero  scarcely  ever  ventures 


RUNNING  BIRDS.  67 

to  meet  the  victor  in  combat  again,  usually  fleeing 
even  upon  his  approach.  The  fighting  propensities 
of  these  birds  used  to  be  taken  cruel  advantage 
of  to  furnish  barbarous  sport  for  depraved  people. 
The  trained  birds,  pitted  against  each  other,  would 
usually  fight  to  the  death,  in  a  determined  manner, 
with  both  beak  and  spur.  The  spur  can  be  seen  on 
the  back  of  the  rooster's  leg,  just  above  the  toes;  it 
is  a  stout  and  sharp  projection  of  a  horny  nature, 
and  the  owner  knows  how  to  use  it  to  good  advan- 
tage. 

The  flesh  and  the  eggs  of  tame  fowl  are  highly 
prized  as  food,  and  man  bestows  great  care  and  makes 
ample  profit  in  their  breeding.  As  w7ith  all  other 
domestic  animals,  chickens  must  be  kept  among  clean 
surroundings  if  they  are  to  be  healthy  in  body  and 
wholesome  for  food.  Too  often,  however,  their  coops 
are  allowed  to  become  filthy,  and  in  consequence  the 
birds  sicken  and  die. 

RUNNING    BIRDS. 

There  are  some  birds  that  live  naturally  upon  the 
ground,  being  entirely  devoid  of  the  power  of  flight. 
Such  is  the  case  with  the  ostrich  and  its  relatives, 
in  all  of  which  the  wings  are  so  small  that  they  are 
entirely  useless  as  organs  of  flight,  whereas  the  legs 
are  extremely  stout.  These  have  been  called  by 
naturalists,  Running  Birds. 

The  true  Ostrich  is  found  native  in  Africa,  and 
occasionally  on  the  plains  of  Arabia.  It  is  the 
tallest  of  all  birds,  frequently  attaining  a  height  of 
six  feet,  and  sometimes  even  eight  feet;  and  weighing 


68  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

upwards  of  a  hundred  pounds.  It  is  the  swiftest  of 
all  animals.  A  hunter  mounted  on  the  fleetest  horse 
could  not  overtake  the  bird  in  a  line  of  direct  pur- 
suit; but  the  ostrich  always  runs  in  a  curve,  and  the 
pursuer  follows  along  a  straight  line  in  the  same 
main  direction  so  as  to  intercept  the  creature  along 
its  course.  Dr.  Livingstone  says:  "The  legs  of  an 
ostrich  running  at  full  speed  can  no  more  be  seen 
than  the  spokes  in  the  wheel  of  a  vehicle  drawn  at  a 
gallop." 

Various  artifices  are  resorted  to  in  hunting  the 
ostrich.  Beside  the  method  of  chase  and  capture 
already  described,  the  hunter  sometimes  hides  himself 
in  a  hole  in  the  sand,  near  the  bird's  nest.  He  takes 
his  position  while  the  owners  of  the  nest  are  away  in 
search  of  food,  and  usually  succeeds  in  killing  both 
the  male  and  female  birds  when  they  return.  Among 
the  negroes,  some  hunters  dress  themselves  in  ostrich 
skins  and  in  this  disguise  are  able  to  approach  the 
birds  within  bow  shot.  The  ostrich  is  hunted  mainly 
for  its  plumage.  If  taken  young  it  may  be  tamed 
and  even  trained  to  carry  burden.  The  negroes  in 
Africa  ride  this  bird  as  we  do  the  horse. 

The  ostrich  has  a  voracious  appetite,  though 
capable  of  enduring  hunger  and  thirst  for  long 
periods.  It  swallows  at  times,  gravel,  and  even 
large  pebbles,  and  other  hard  substances  probably  to 
aid  in  grinding  its  food,  as  fowls  swallow  sand.  Its 
senses  of  taste  and  smell  seem  extremely  imperfect, 
and  this  renders  the  creature  less  particular  than  it 
would  otherwise  be,  as  to  the  things  it  swallows. 


PERCHING  BIRDS.  69 

The  Rhea  is  a  running  bird  of  South  America, 
and  from  its  general  form,  is  frequently  called  the 
"American  ostrich."  It  is  usually  not  more  than  half 
the  size  of  its  African  brother. 

Besides  the  peculiarities  of  structure  before 
noted,  as  fitting  these  birds  for  life  on  the  ground, 
instead  of  in  the  air,  the  plumage  of  the  Runners 
must  be  mentioned.  The  blades  of  the  feathers  are 
not  joined  compactly,  by  means  of  barbs,  as  in  the 
case  of  flying  birds.  The  wings  are  not  used  in 
beating  the  air,  and  there  is  no  need  of  a  continuous 
feather- vane ;  in  such  feathers,  therefore,  barbs  would 
be  useless,  and  consequently  they  are  not  provided. 


CHAPTER   XIII. 

PERCHING    BIRDS. 

jjSKSJIRDS  that  habitually  build  and  dwell  in  trees, 
qgjjs^  and  that  do  not  belong  to  the  other  orders 
n£$j?  already  named  are  called  Perching  Birds.  The 
~6L  class  is  so  large,  presenting  such  great  varia- 
tions and  wide  extremes  that  it  is  difficult,  if  not 
indeed  impossible,  to  give  any  distinctive  features  of 
the  whole  tribe.  We  find  included  here  most  of  the 
common  birds  of  our  orchards  and  fields,  the  happy 
songsters  whose  pleasing. music  imparts  such  a  charm 
to  both  hill  and  valley,  as  well  as  others  whose  voices 
are  by  no  means  entrancing  to  the  ordinary  ear. 

In  this  respect  let  it  be  noted  that  the  gifts  of 
Nature,  even  among  birds,  are  distributed  upon  a  plan 


70  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

of  equity  if  not  indeed  of  exact  equality.  Favorites 
are  difficult  to  find.  The  Father's  preserving  care 
and  kind  concern  is  exercised  over  all  alike.  The 
birds  most  famed  for  song  are  generally  dressed  in 
the  plainest  garb.  Look  at  the  lark,  the  mocking- 
bird, the  nightingale  and  the  thrush — they  all  are 
clothed  in  simple  unostentatious  colors,  though  they 
charm  the  hours  of  sunrise,  and  even  rob  midnight 
of  its  dreariness  by  their  songs;  then  glance  at  the 
humming-bird  bedecked  in  its  robes  of  crimson  and 
of  gold,  but  with  no  power  of  voice  above  a  chirp; 
and  at  the  elegant  bird  of  paradise — so  proud  of  its 
gaudy  attire  that  it  will  not  touch  earth  with  its 
feet  unless  of  necessity — then  listen  to  its  compar- 
atively inharmonious  notes;  think  too  of  the  gorgeous 
peacock  with  the  eyes  of  Argus  upon  its  train,  but 
no  nearer  approach  to  a  song  than  a  discordant 
scream.  Thus  it  is  among  birds  as  among  men,  the 
endowments  of  Nature  are  not  all  bestowed  on  one. 
The  eagle  excels  in  majestic  strength,  the  nightin- 
gale in  soul-inspiring  notes;  the  pigeon  and  the 
swallow  tax  our  belief  in  their  feats  of  endurance 
and  speed;  the  paradise  bird  has  gained  its  name 
out  of  our  homage  to  its  almost  heavenly  lustre.  So 
it  is  that  each  surpasses  all  in  the  special  gift  to 
which  he  is  the  lawful  heir,  everyone  superior  and  at 
once  inferior  to  all  others,  and — 

"Thus  all  enjoy  the  power  which  suits  them  best." 
Here  also  is  a  lesson  for  us. 

Among  the  Perchers,  belongs  the  Humming  Bird, 
the  tiniest  of   all  the  feathered  tribes — the  flying 


PERCHING  BIRDS.  71 

gem,  as  it  is  called.  There  are  many  species  of  these 
remarkable  little  creatures,  though  all  native  to  the 
American  Continent.  The  gayest  in  color  are  to  be 
found  in  the  warmer  countries.  Their  long  beak 
and  flexible  tongue,  are  admirably  fitted  for  draining 
the  honey  cups  of  flowers — and  such  dainty  food 
forms  their  chief  support;  though,  indeed,  they  relish 
a  meal  of  insects,  occasionally.  But  it  is  the  sad 
fate  of  these  fairy-like  creatures,  to  suffer  for  their 
beauty.  The  humming  birds  are  eagerly  caught  to 
adorn  the  dress  of  those  who  aspire  to  a  beauty  not 
their  own.  The  sacrifice  of  such  innocent  lives,  for 
the  cruel  requirements  of  fashion,  is  both  unnatural 
and  wicked.  Who  sees  aught  of  true  beauty  in  the 
stuffed  body  of  a  bird,  sewn  on  a  head-gear?  Are 
not  the  observer's  feelings  of  sympathy  and  pity 
aroused  to  the  exclusion  of  admiration;  except, 
indeed,  for  the  dead  glories  of  the  tiny  creature? 
True  beauty  and  proper  taste  are  opposed  to  cruelty 
in  any  form;  and  will  never  countenance  such  bar- 
barous practices,  as  are  here  referred  to,  by  any  act 
of  encouragement. 

The  Mocking  Bird,  though  common  only  in  the 
Southern  States,  is  a  bird  whose  praises  every  Amer- 
ican is  proud  to  spread.  It  is  in  reality  a  member  of 
the  great  family  of  thrushes.  In  size,  it  is  about 
that  of  the  meadow  lark,  of  a  dull  ashy  color,  with  a 
long  tail;  but  in  no  manner  remarkable  either  for 
brilliancy  of  plumage  or  beauty  of  form.  It  is  a 
matter  of  surprise  that  such  powers  of  song  are 
concentrated  within  its  little  throat.     But  its  music 


72  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

is  beyond  description;  it  will  never  be  forgotten  by 
one  who  has  once  listened  to  those  notes  with  all 
their  wealth  of  inexpressible  melody.  It  has  a  won- 
derful faculty  too  of  imitating  the  voices  of  other  birds 
or  even  quadrupeds;  and  this  feat  it  accomplishes 
with  such  perfection  as  to  deceive  the  animals  them- 
selves, who  move  about  with  evident  coucern  thinking, 
they  heard  the  call  of  their  mates.  The  Indians  call 
the  mocking-bird  the  "bird  of  four  hundred  tongues." 
Many  of  its  admirers  declare  its  voice  to  be  superior 
even  to  that  of  the  far-famed  nightingale. 

The  class  of  birds  known  as  the  Perchers  include 
also  the  numerous  varieties  of  night-hawks,  king- 
fishers, fly-catchers,  warblers,  thrushes,  sparrows, 
larks,  black-birds,  crows,  jays  and  many  others. 

WATER    BIRDS. 

In  our  mention  of  the  chief  classes  of  birds,  we 
must  not  fail  to  speak  of  the  Water  Birds,  both 
Waders  and  Swimmers. 

The  former  are  provided  with  very  long  legs;  so 
long  in  fact,  that  some  naturalists  call  them  stilt- 
walkers.  Through  this  peculiarity  of  their  shape, 
they  are  able  to  wrade  into  the  water  in  search  of 
food,  consisting  of  worms,  fish,  or  in  fact  any  small 
aquatic  animals.  Herons,  cranes,  bitterns,  snipes 
and  plovers  are  common  around  our  lakes  and  big 
streams.  The  largest  ones  are  very  dignified  and 
imposing  in  their  bearing.  The  snipes  and  plovers 
(the  latter  sometimes  called  "pee-wits"  from  the 
peculiar  cry  which  they  utter  when  disturbed)  are 
the  only  ones  commonly  used  for  food. 


WATER  BIRDS.  73 

The  swimmers,  including  our  common  ducks,  geese, 
swans,  pelicans,  divers  and  gulls  are  fitted  for  life  in 
the  water.  They  all  have  webbed  feet,  and  swim 
and  dive  with  skill.  Their  plumage  is  heavy  and 
thick,  and  is  kept  well  oiled  from  certain  glands  of 
the  skin,  so  that  their  feathers  are  not  saturated  and 
their  bodies  moistened  by  the  water.  Every  thing 
is  arranged,  it  seems,  to  cause  the  water  to  slide 
off  the  polished  surface  of  the  outer  feathers,  while 
the  thick  undergrowth  of  down  furnishes  an  admir- 
able protection  even  from  the  severe  cold  of  winter. 
None  of  these  birds  build  very  complicated  nests; 
being  usually  content  with  a  simple  hollow  among 
the  rushes,  always  lined  and  carpeted  however  with 
the  softest  down,  often  obtained  from  their  own 
breasts.  The  celebrated  eider-down,  of  which  the 
most  expensive  pillows  and  beds  are  made,  is  procured 
from  the  nest  of  a  northern  species  of  duck  called 
the  eider-duck. 

Many  swimming  birds  are  able  to  remain  under 
water  for  a  surprising  length  of  time;  while  others, 
as  the  tern  and  gull,  do  not  dive  at  all.  The  family  of 
the  last  named,  the  Gulls,  are  of  peculiar  and 
affecting  interest  to  the  inhabitants  of  this  Terri- 
tory; from  the  way  in  which  they  were  brought  by 
Divine  power,  in  vast  hosts  in  answer  to  the  prayers 
of  the  people,  to  devour  the  ravenous  locusts,  which 
were  producing  such  terrible  destruction  among  the 
crops.  Gulls  have  shown  themselves  to  be  veritable 
scavengers;  and  the  good  they  accomplish  by  this 
propensity  is  extremely  great. 


74  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

CHAPTER  XIV. 

REPTILES. 


s 


i^HE  word  Reptile  is  derived  from  a  Latin  term 
%2/Sl  meaning  "to  creep,"  or  "to  crawl,"  and  is 
applied  to  a  large  class  of  cold-blooded  animals 
characterized  by  such  actions.  Some  of  them, 
it  is  true,  have  limbs,  but  these  are  so  short  that  part 
of  the  body  is  drawn  on  the  earth.  Turtles,  lizards 
and  serpents  constitute  our  commonest  classes  of 
reptiles,  and  to  these  should  be  added  the  crocodiles 
and  alligators,  which  though  practically  unknown  in 
a  wild  state  among  us  are  unpleasantly  common  in 
the  warm  regions  of  both  hemispheres. 

Turtles  or  Tortoises  are  reptiles  of  a  flat  sprawling- 
form,  but  particularly  noted  for  their  strange 
covering.  This  consists  of  a  shell  of  bony  and  horny 
matter,  made  up  of  two  parts,  an  arched  roof- like 
upper  part  called  the  carapace;  and  a  flat  plate 
below  called  the  plastron.  The  carapace,  though 
composed  largely  of  bone,  is  covered  on  the  outside 
by  a  great  many  plates  or  scales  of  horn,  fitted  one 
to  the  other  as  accurately  as  are  the  ornamental 
tiles  in  a  figured  floor;  and  frequently  of  very  varied 
colors.  It  is  from  this  that  the  highly  prized  tortoise- 
shell  ornaments  are  made.  In  most  of  the  species, 
the  two  parts  of  the  shell  are  immovably  fixed  to 
each  other;  the  animal  being  able  however  to  with- 
draw the  head  and  limbs  completely  within  as  a  plan 
of  defense  in  case  of  threatened  injury.     But  the 


REPTILES.  75 

Box  Tortoise  has  a  movable  plastron  or  lower  plate 
fixed  to  its  hard  covering,  by  which  it  so  effectually 
closes  its  shell,  that  a  knife-blade  can  scarcely  be 
forced  into  the  joints. 


Fig.  11. — Box  Tortoise,  with  closed  shell. 

Figure  1 1  is  a  very  good  picture  of  the  box 
tortoise,  with  its  shell  closed,  as  has  been  described, 
and  lying  upon  its  back.  The  tightly-fitting  plas- 
tron is  well  shown,  and  the  curiously-marked  sections 
of  which  it  consists,  are  very  distinct.  Dead  and 
empty  shells  of  these  reptiles,  are  often  used  as 
boxes  and  trays.  The  senses  of  these  creatures, 
seem,  as  a  rule,  to  be  extremely  dull;  and  many 
injuries  that  usually  prove  fatal  to  the  water-blooded 
animals,  are  borne  by  them  with  but  few  signs  of 
discomfiture.  They  are  said  to  live,  under  favorable 
circumstances,  more  than  two  hundred  years.  Many 
varieties  of  tortoises  are  known,  of  which,  the  land 
tortoises,  fresh -water  tortoises  (the  last  named  more 
precisely  called  turtles),  are  the  chief. 

From  a  hasty  glance,  it  would  seem  impossible  for 
an  animal  so  heavily  laden  as  the  tortoise,  with  its 
cumbrous   shell,  to    move   at   all   readily,    on   land 


76  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

or  in  water;  but,  contrary  to  such  superficial  appear- 
ance, those  tortoises  that  frequent  the  water,  are 
expert  swimmers  and  divers;  the  whole  internal 
structure  being  an  admirable  adaptation  to  such 
actions.  The  lungs  are  connected  with  numerous 
air-cells,  looking  much  like  small  bladders,  and 
situated  in  many  parts  of  the  body;  so  that  when 
the  creature  inhales,  all  these  air-bags  become  in- 
flated, and  the  whole  body  is  made  specifically  light. 

Land  tortoises,  though  seldom  larger  than  a 
dinner-plate,  and  usually  very  much  smaller  in 
temperate  countries,  grow  to  great  size  in  warm 
parts;  some  specimens  weighing  over  two  hundred 
pounds  each.  They  live  almost  exclusively  on  vege- 
table food.  The  flesh  of  some  kinds  of  land  tortoises 
is  eaten  and  considered  a  luxury;  the  animals 
being  fattened  for  the  purpose  as  we  would  feed  a 
fowl  or  a  tame  duck  for  the  table.  Fresh-water  tor- 
toises are  to  be  found  in  the  marshes  and  rivers  of 
heated  regions.  Their  feet  differ  from  those  of 
land  tortoises  in  being  webbed,  thus  enabling  the 
animals  to  swim  easily.  They  are  in  general  car- 
nivorous in  habit,  feeding  largely  on  fish,  frogs  and 
toads,  small  birds  and  insects. 

The  Snapping  Turtle  of  many  American  rivers  is 
represented  in  Figure  12  and  deserves  special  men- 
tion. It  is  larger  than  other  fresh-water  species, 
measuring  over  three  feet,  and  in  exceptional  cases 
four  feet  from  the  tip  of  the  nose  to  the  end  of  the 
tail.  The  head  of  this  turtle  is  comparatively  large 
and  is  terminated  by  a  pair  of  strong  hooked  jaws, 


REPTILES.  77 

which  it  can  fasten  with  wonderful  strength  upon  an 
enemy  in  case  of  molestation. 


Fig.  12.— The  River  Tortoise,  or  "Snapping  Turtle." 
Sea  Turtles  are  in  general  very  large.  Their  feet 
are  shaped  like  fins  or  flippers,  which  are  admirable 
organs  of  locomotion  in  the  water,  but  give  to  the 
animal  a  very  awkward  appearance  when  it  tries  to 
make  progress  on  land.  These  appendages,  however, 
are  of  great  service  in  scooping  holes  in  the  sand  on 
the  shore,  in  which  to  deposit  its  eggs.  When  laid, 
these  eggs  are  carefully  covered  with  sand  and  then 
abandoned,  the  heat  of  the  sun  being  sufficient  to 
effect  the  incubation. 

Although  turtles  are  strong  for  their  size,  some  of 
the  largest  being  indeed  possessed  of  a  muscular 
vigor  little  less  than  marvelous,  yet  they  are  entirely 
helpless  when  turned  on  their  backs.  Hunters  take 
advantage  of  this  in  capturing  large  sea  turtles, 
by  rushing  suddenly  upon  the  creatures  when  on  the 
shore,  and  turning  them  over  before  they  are  able  to 
regain  the  water.  After  having  disabled  as  many  as 
possible  in  this  novel  way,  the  captors  return  and 
kill  their  game  at  leisure. 


78  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

CHAPTER   XV. 

SNAKES. 

jjjgajNAKES  are  characterized  by  very  long  bodies, 
SSI  covered  with  scales,  but  without  external 
limbs  of  any  sort.  Even  a  hasty  examination, 
however,  shows  their  scales  to  be  materially 
different  from  those  of  fishes,  being  formed  really  as 
wrinkles  or  folds  in  the  skin,  and  covered  with  a  thin 
delicate  membrane,  which  is  sloughed  or  shed  at  in- 
tervals, once  a  year,  or  oftener.  Though  devoid  of 
limbs,  snakes  are  able  to  move  over  the  ground  with 
great  rapidity  by  a  sliding  or  telescoping  action  of 
the  scaly  rings  around  their  bodies.  Their  teeth  are 
sharp  and  well  fitted  for  holding  their  prey;  for  such 
purpose,  indeed,  the  teeth  are  intended  to  serve,  rather 
than  as  organs  of  mastication,  as  serpents  swallow 
their  food  whole.  The  mouth  and  throat  are  capable 
of  distension,  in  consequence  of  which,  a  snake  is 
often  known  to  swallow  animals  many  times  larger 
than  itself.  Some  of  the  largest  of  snakes,  such  as 
the  boa  constrictor  and  anaconda  reach  a  length  of 
thirty  or  forty  feet.  As  a  proof  of  their  great  mus- 
cular strength,  it  needs  only  be  stated  that  either  of 
them  can  easily  crush  the  bones  of  a  sheep  or  a  deer 
by  the  embrace  of  its  powerful  coils. 

The  ordinary  black,  striped  and  water  snakes  of 
America  are  harmless  in  their  bite,  though  usually 
held  in  great  dread.  Their  chief  food  consists  of 
small  animals  such  as  mice  and   rats,  frogs,  toads, 


SNAKES.  79 

and  birds,  which  seem  to  be  overcome  with  fear  at 
the  presence  of  a  snake,  and  so  become  a  ready  prey 
to  the  devourer. 

The  rattlesnake  on  the  other  hand  is  of  so  venom- 
ous a  character  that  its  bite  is  commonly  fatal  to 
large  animals,  and  even  to  man. 

An  examination  of  figure  13  will  aid  in  gaining  a 
clear  idea  as  to  the  manner  in  which  the  poisonous 
bite  is  inflicted. 


Fig.  13.— Rattlesnake's  skull,  showing  the  fangs. 

In  the  upper  jaw  are  two  fangs  or  curved  teeth 
which  are  hollow,  and  connected  with  a  little  sac  or 
pouch  containing  the  deadly  poison.  This  is  injected 
into  the  wound  made  by  the  two  fangs  whenever  the 
animal  bites. 

The  rattlesnake  derives  its  name  from  a  series  of 
hard,  horn-like  rings  on  the  tail,  with  which  the  rep- 
tile produces  a  peculiar  rattling  noise  whenever  dis- 
turbed. Were  it  not  for  this  warning  sound,  the  ani- 
mal would  be  even  more  dreaded  than  it  is.  In 
color  it  is  usually  two  shades,  of  brown  with  points 
of  yellow.     The  arrangement  of  the  rattles,  as  well  as 


80 


FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 


the  general  shape  and  appearance  of  the  rattlesnake 
may  be  fairly  understood  from  figure  14. 

The  poison  from  any  venomous  serpent  seems  of 
little  effect  unless  introduced  into  the  blood  of  the 
body,  which  of  course  is  the  case  whenever  a  bite 

from  such  a  snake 
is  received  on  the 
flesh;  and  in  these 
emergencies,  quick 
and  efficient  meas- 
ures should  be  tak- 
en. If  possible,let  the 
wound  be  promptly 
and  vigorously  suck- 
ed; there  is  no  dan- 
ger of  injury  from 
drawing  the  venom 
into  the  mouth,  un- 
less sores  or  abra- 
sions  exist   on   the 

lips  or  within.    The 
;  Fig.  14. — Rattlesnake.  j      i       u      i 

wound   should   also 

be  enlarged  by  a  cut  from  a  sharp  knife — unless,  of 
course,  located  where  such  surgery  would  be  danger- 
ous. If  the  bite  be  on  a  limb,  a  tight  ligature  should 
be  bound  on  the  side  of  the  wound  toward  the  heart 
so  as  to  prevent  as  much  as  possible  the  spread  of  the 
poison  through  the  medium  of  the  circulating  blood. 
The  injured  part  may  with  great  advantage  be 
washed  with  hartshorn,  or  ammonia,  previously 
diluted  with  twenty  times   its  bulk  of  water;  and 


REPTILES.  81 

with  alcohol.  Small  quantities  of  alcoholic  liquor 
may  very  properly  be  taken  inwardly  at  such  time: 
but  the  common  belief  that  the  injured  person's 
chances  of  recovery  are  in  direct  proportion  to  the 
amount  of  liquor  drunk  by  him,  is  erroneous. 

Lizards  are  reptiles,  usually  possessing  a  long, 
slender  body  and  tail,  and  a  comparatively  large 
mouth,  well  filled  with  teeth.  Many  pretty  and 
harmless  creatures  of  this  class  are  found  in  our  Utah 
valleys,  but  none  of  a  venomous  kind.  In  tropical 
lands,  lizards  are  met  with,  whose  bite  is  dangerous 

The  Horned  Toad,  of  the  Western  plains,  is  a 
true  lizard,  the  name  toad,  being  a  great  misnomer; 
though  its  broad  and  comparatively  short  boby,  is 
an  exception  to  the  ordinary  shape  of  lizards.  The 
head  is  provided  with  spines  and  the  body  is  covered 
with  tubercles,  suggesting  the  character  of  a  mail- 
clad  reptilian  knight;  this  armor,  however,  is  about 
its  only  means  of  protection.  It  is  a  timid,  harmless 
little  creature;  and  in  the  warm,  Southwestern  States, 
is  tamed  as  a  house  pet.  A  very  slight  degree  of 
cold  causes  it  to  become  torpid  and  inactive. 

Chameleons  are  peculiar  and  interesting  lizards 
found  only  in  the  warm  portions  of  the  Old  World, 
and  possessing  a  number  of  strange  distinctive 
features.  The  tongue  is  really  a  long  tube,  with  an 
enlargement  on  the  end,  and  can  be  darted  out  with 
unlooked-for  rapidity,  if  a  small  insect  comes  within 
its  reach.  The  chameleon's  eyes  can  be  moved  inde- 
pendently of  each  other— a  strange  feature,  and  one 
that  imparts  to  the  animal  a  most  remarkable  appear- 


82:  FIRST   BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

aace  at  times.  Then  its  tail  is  prehensile,  that  is,  it 
can  be  used  for  grasping  and  holding  branches  of 
trees — and  this  is  an  unusual  power  among  reptiles. 
The  skin  does  not  adhere  to  the  body  in  all  parts; 
spaces  are  left  into  which  air  at  times  enters, 
causing  the  skin  to  expand,  and  the  whole  body  to 
appear  enormously  inflated;  perhaps  in  less  than  a 
minute  following  one  of  such  actions,  the  air  cells 
are  emptied,  and  the  animal  appears  curiously  lean 
and  shrunken.  In  addition  to  these  peculiarities, 
the  creature  is  able  to  modify  the  color  of  its  skin  by 
expanding  or  contracting  certain  pigment  cells  situ- 
ated just  below  the  cuticle  or  outer  layer  of  the  skin, 
by  which  means  the  chameleon  assumes  the  tint  of 
the  tree  or  ground  upon  which  it  happens  to  be,  and 
so  is  in  far  less  danger  of  detection  by  its  enemies 

The  largest  members  of  the  whole  lizard  tribe,  often 
reaching  a  length  of  thirty  feet,  are  the  dreaded  Croco- 
diles of  Africa  and  India;  then  follow  in  order  the 
somewhat  smaller  Alligators  of  the  Southern  States 
of  America.  The  crocodile  infests  the  rivers  and  sea 
shores,  and  surpasses  even  the  fiercest  of  carnivorous 
mammalia  in  its  powers  of  destruction.  Its  favorite 
method  of  attack  is  to  remain  concealed  on  or  near 
the  river  shore  till  some  animal  or  man  draws  near; 
then  by  a  swift  movement  of  its  powerful  tail  the 
victim  is  stunned,  and  if  not  at  once  thrown  into  the 
water  by  the  force  of  the  blow,  is  seized  and  dragged 
beneath  the  surface,  there  drowned  and  devoured  at 
the  pleasure  of  its  captor. 

The  alligators  of   America,  though  smaller  than 


REPTILES.  83 

their  African  relatives,  are  yet  deservedly  dreaded 
in  their  native  swamps.  As  winter  approaches,  the 
alligators  usually  bury  themselves  in  the  mud,  on 
the  margins  of  their  summer  homes,  and  there  sleep 
till  the  warmth  of  spring  awakens  them  to  a  life  of 
cruel  rapacity.  Travelers  relate  the  thrilling  concern 
with  which  they  have  sometimes  viewed  the  heaving 
and  swelling  of  a  baked  mud  patch  in  the  early 
part  of  the  year;  at  such  a  sight  they  usually  seek 
a  place  of  safety  without  idle  delay,  knowing  well 
that  a  hungry  alligator  is  there  throwing  off  the  covers 
of  its  winter  bed  and  getting  ready  for  breakfast. 

The  Indians  of  the  south  usually  capture  the 
alligator  by  baiting  a  huge  hook  with  meat,  then 
securing 'it  to  a  long  stout  rope,  and  placing  it  in  a 
promising  locality.  When  hooked,  the  huge  game 
is  soon  drawn  ashore  and  despatched  with  clubs.  A 
method  more  ingenious  and  effective  is  practised  oif 
the  banks  of  the  Orinoco  iu  South  America.  A 
bamboo,  or  some  other  elastic  tree  near  the  water  is 
selected,  the  top  is  then  bent  down  to  the  butt,  and 
a  baited  hook  is  attached  to  the  depressed  top 
by  a  stout  line.  The  tree  is  so  arranged  that 
its  top  is  automatically  released  the  instant  a  strain 
is  felt  upon  the  line;  and  consequently  as  soon  as 
the  alligator  seizes  the  bait  the  tree  forthwith 
straightens  itself  with  great  velocity  and  the  victim 
is  dragged  from  the  water. 

Alligators  seem  to  hold  dogs  in  high  favor  as  food, 
and  it  is  said  the  voracious  creatures  may  be  enticed 
from  the  water  by  the  real  or  imitated  bark  of  a  dog. 


84  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

CHAPTER   XVI. 

FROGS   AND   TOADS. 

@j5jHESE  strange  creatures  undergo  such  wonder- 
ful changes  in  the  course  of  their  life,  that 
there  is  very  little  resemblance  between  the 
young  and  the  adult.  Their  eggs  may  be  seen 
during  the  early  spring  floating  in  the  water  of 
ditches  and  ponds,  and  looking  like  numerous  black 
specks  enclosed  in  a  mass  of  jelly;  those  of  the  frog 
existing  in  large  clusters,  while  the  toad  eggs  are 
joined  in  long  glutinous  strings.  Under  the  warm 
rays  of  the  sun,  these  soon  develop  into  small  living 
structures,  each  looking  much  like  a  very  little  fish, 
with  a  disproportionate  head  and  a  flattened  tail. 
These  are  called  Tadpoles  or  Polly wogs.  They  live 
wholly  in  the  water,  are  entirely  destitute  of  limbs, 
and  breathe  by  means  of  gills,  as  do  fishes.  These 
gills  are  seen  as  little  feathery  appendages  on  the 
sides  of  the  head.  In  this  stage  of  their  existence 
they  are  extremely  active,  and  grow  with  great 
rapidity;  but  soon,  changes  far  more  striking  than 
mere  increase  in  size  manifest  themselves.  The  legs 
are  seen  to  grow,  the  hind  ones  appearing  first.  As 
these  appendages  become  larger,  the  tail  diminishes 
in  size,  and  finally  is  entirely  absorbed:  the  gills  at 
the  same  time  disappear,  and  to  supply  their  place 
lungs  are  developed  within  the  body.  All  traces  of 
the  fish-like  tadpole  are  soon  obliterated,  and  the 
mature  toad   or   frog  is  the   result.      Originally  a 


FROGS  AND  TOADS. 


85 


thoroughly  aquatic  animal,  it  becomes  in  adult  life 
of  an  aerial  or  air-breathing  nature,  though  it  is 
still  able  to  remain  for  considerable  time  submerged 
in  water;  it  can  only  breathe,  however,  in  the  air. 
In  figure  15  are  shown  the  principal  stages  in  the 
wonderful  development  of  a  frog  or  toad. 


Fig.  15. — Tadpole  changes. 

Figure  1 6  represents  the  skeleton  or  bony  frame- 
work of  the  adult  frog. 

Frogs  may  be  distin- 
guished from  toads  by 
their  stronger  hind  legs, 
their  large  horny  ears 
seen  just  behind  the 
eyes  and  the  presence 
of  teeth  in  the  upper 
jaw.  Both  feed  largely 
Fig.  16.— Skeleton  of  a  Frog.  Up0n  insects,  and  to 
aid  in  capturing  their  winged  prey  the  tongue  is 
made  very  long  and  supple,  and  fastened  at  the 
front  of  the  mouth,  so  .that  the  greater  part 
when  inactive  reaches  down  the  throat.  Yet  the 
animal  can  dart  this  forward  with  surprising  quick- 
ness and  unerring  accuracy  upon  any  unlucky  fly 
that  may  venture  within  range.     Unlike  most  cold- 


86  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

blooded  animals  the  frog  and  the  toad  are  endowed 
with  powers  of  voice,  and  these  too  of  no  low  order. 
The  croaking  bull-frog  of  American  waters  may  be 
heard  at  the  distance  of  a  mile,  in  fact  it  has  re- 
ceived its  impressive  name  from  the  low,  bellowing 
tone  of  its  voice;  while  the  gentle  warbling  chirp — it 
can  scarcely  be  called  a  croak — of  the  festive  toads, 
as  they  congregate  in  still  ponds  and  quiet  marshes 
on  a  summer  evening  and  indulge  in  their  mutual 
serenade,  is  known  to  all.  Many  people  believe  the 
toad  to  be  of  a  venomous  nature,  whereas  it  has  no 
means  of  wilfully  injuring  anything  larger  than  a  fly 
or  a  moth.  Of  insects,  however,  it  destroys  great 
numbers,  and  deserves  therefore  a  more  considerate 
protection  than  is  commonly  awarded  to  it.  The 
toad's  skin  is  frequently  seen  covered  with  drops  of 
moisture  even  though  the  creature  be  at  a  considera- 
ble distance  from  water;  this  is  a  fluid  which  exudes 
from  the  skin  under  certain  conditions,  very  much  as 
does  the  perspiration  of  our  own  bodies.  This  fluid, 
which  appears  in  greatest  quantity  if  the  toad  be  an- 
noyed or  frightened,  is  really  of  an  acrid  irritating 
nature  and  produces  unpleasant  and  even  severe 
smarting  if  conveyed  to  one's  hand  through  touch- 
ing a  toad,  and  thence  to  the  eyes.  A  dog  is  often 
seen  to  snap  a  toad  in  his  mouth  as  if  in  a  freak  of 
sport;  but  he  usually  drops  his  plaything  with  a  yelp 
of  surprise,  caused  without  doubt  from  the  irritating 
effect  of  this  exudation,  upon  the  delicate  lining 
membrane  of  the  mouth. 

During  the  winter  frogs  and  toads  hibernate  in 


FROGS  AND  TOADS.  87 

large  companies,  having  previously  buried  themselves 
deep  in  the  soft  earth. 

Frogs  and  toads,  and  several  other  animals  that 
pass  through  similar  peculiar  changes  of  growth  are 
called  by  naturalists  amphibians,  a  word  meaning 
"with  a  double  life,"  because  they  pass  part  of  their 
lives  in  water,  breathing  by  means  of  gills  as  do  the 
fishes,  and  spend  the  other  part  of  their  existence  on 
land,  breathing  through  lungs  as  do  true  reptiles  or 
any  of  the  other  animals  of  which  we  have  thus  far 
spoken.* 

Naturalists  who  have  traveled  and  studied  much, 
tell  us  of  many  rare  and  peculiar  forms  of  frogs  and 
toads  to  be  found  in  various  parts  of  the  world 
though  not  common  with  us  here.  There  is  a  some- 
what remarkable  variety  of  the  former  called  the 
Tree  Frog,  common  in  many  parts  of  the  globe.  It 
is  a  smaller  animal  than  the  ordinary  frog,  and,  as 
its  name  indicates,  lives  mostly  on  trees.  To  properly 
fit  the  animal  for  such  a  life,  several  wise  provisions 
have  been  made  by  the  Creator.  In  the  first  place, 
each  toe  of  the  tree  frog  is  terminated  by  a  small 
pad,  looking  and  operating  much  like  the  leathern 

*  In  this  class  belong  the  different  varieties  of  Newts  of 
which  some  are  found  hereabouts,  and  the  curious  Sal- 
amanders regarding  which  so  many  strange  and  exagger- 
ated stories  are  told.  It  is  incorrectly  said  they  can 
remain  in  fire  without  injury;  the  only  fact  upon  which 
such  a  statement  rests  being  that  these  animals  are  able 
to  cover  themselves  with  a  sort  of  milky  fluid  or  perspira- 
tion, which  perhaps  protects  them  in  a  small  degree  from 
moderate  heat. 


88  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

suckers  with  which  boys  often  amuse  themselves. 
These  little  cushions  are  covered  with  a  sort  of  glue; 
and  by  their  action  the  animals  cling  tight  to  the 
trunks  or  branches  of  trees.  Then  again  these  frogs 
are  of  a  singular  color; — a  sort  of  dull  green,  very 
much  resembling  the  hue  of  the  leaves  among  which 
they  live  and  move.  Such  is  an  odd  color  for  an 
animal,  but  to  the  tree-frog  such  an  oddity  is  a  matter 
of  very  great  advantage,  as  by  it  the  little  creature 
can  lie  among  the  leaves  and  branches  with  very 
little  danger  of  being  discovered.  But  its  sight  is 
just  as  keen  as  if  it  were  of  some  bright  and  con- 
trasting color.  It  can  see  therefore  with  little  danger 
of  being  seen,  and  is  consequently  able  to  lie  safely 
in  wait  for  the  insects  which  form  its  chief  food. 
Tree-frogs  are  capital  trappers  and  hunters,  and  a 
study  of  their  ways  is  an  interesting  and  deeply 
instructive  lesson.  The  voice  of  the  tree-frog  is 
mellow  and  agreeable  in  comparison  with  that  of 
other  species;  it  is  heard  chiefly  in  the  cool  of  the 
morning  and  evening. 

Among  toads  there  is  a  very  strange  individual 
called  the  Pipa  or  Surinam  Toad,  found  on  this 
continent  only  in  some  parts  of  Guiana  and  Brazil. 
Unlike  ordinary  toads  it  has  very  small  eyes,  and  no 
tongue.  But  the  distinguishing  feature  about  this 
queer  creature  is  the  manner  in  which  its  eggs  are 
hatched.  Our  common  kinds  of  toads  always  deposit 
their  eggs  in  the  water  and  then  abandon  them;  but 
not  so  with  the  Surinam  Toad.  The  female  takes 
the  eggs,  as  soon  as  laid,  upon  her  back,  where  they 


FISHES.  89 

soon  sink  beneath  the  skin,  forming  each  for  itself  a 
little  socket  or  hole.  The  heat  of  the  body  soon 
hatches  the  eggs,  and  it  is  a  funny  sight  to  see  the 
young  brood  in  their  queer  nests. 


Ct 


CHAPTER    XVII. 

FISHES. 

8S?HE  animals,  about  which  we  talked  last,  viz., 

19s  the  frogs  and  toads,  and  their  kindred,  were 
seen  to  live  part  of  the  time  in  water  and 
part  of  the  time  on  land.  Fishes,  however, 
seem  intended,  by  the  Creator,  to  pass  the  whole  of 
their  lives  in  water.  Let  us  examine  carefully,  either 
of  our  common  stream  fishes,  such  as  a  trout,  a  chub,  or 
a  herring,  and  we  will  discover  a  great  many  valuable 
facts  about  the  curious  lives  these  finny  creatures 
pass  in  their  watery  home. 

In  the  first  place,  we  cannot  fail  to  observe  the 
slender  form  and  regular  shape  of  the  fish.  There 
are  no  irregularities  about  it  as  are  to  be  seen  in 
other  animal  bodies;  not  even  a  depression,  where 
the  neck  would  seem  to  be.  This  spindle  form 
enables  the  fish  to  move  more  readily  through  the 
water;  any  irregularity  in  shape,  on  the  other  hand, 
would  tend  to  retard  the  swimmer. 

Men  have  learned  this,  among  many  other  lessons, 
from  the  animal  world;  they  now  build  their  marine 
torpedoes,  which  are  to  be  shot  with  great  speed 


90 


FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 


through  the  water — in  a  form  very  much  like  that  of 
an  ordinary  fish. 

Now  let  us  look  at  the  sail-like  appendages  on  the 
back  and  sides  of  the  body,  the  fins  and  the  tail. 
These  serve  the  fish  as  means  of  propelling  and 
steering  itself  through  the  water;  the  tail  operating 
chiefly  as  a  sculling-oar  and  the  fins  serving  to 
balance  and  direct  the  animal  in  its  rapid  course. 
Then  there  are  to  be  noticed  the  scales  with  which 
most  fishes  are  covered — so  different  from  the  hair, 
fur,  wool  or  feathers,  which  form  the  dress  of  most 
land  animals.  These  scales  are  inserted  separately 
in  folds  of  the  true  skin  beneath,  and  they  are  made 
to  overlap  each  other  as  do  the  shingles  or  slates  on 
a  roof,  the  free  edges  all  being  directed  backward. 
The  whole  surface  is  covered  with  a  slimy,  oil-like 
matter  which  is  also  effectual  in  aiding  rapid  motion 
through  the  water. 


Fig.  17.— Skeleton  of  a  Fish.  • 

A  fair  idea  of  the  plan  after  which  the  body  of  the 
fish  is  shaped  may  be  obtained  from  a  careful  study 
of  the  skeleton  as  represented  in  figure  17. 

From  the  fact  that  fishes   naturally  live  in  the 


FISHES,  91 

water  throughout  their  whole  existence,  some  people 
think  that  they  do  not  need  air  by  which  to  breathe 
as  do  other  animals.  But  fishes  offer  no  exception 
to  the  rule;  they,  like  other  animals,  must  receive 
air  into  their  bodies,  by  which  the  blood  is  purified, 
or  they  die.  We  all  well  know  that  if  a  land  animal 
such  as  a  dog  or  a  fowl,  be  closely  confined  in  a  box 
or  a  small  room,  as  soon  as  all  the  air  contained 
therein  has  been  breathed  and  rendered  impure, 
the  animal  is  suffocated  to  death.  So  with  fishes;  if 
they  be  deprived  of  a  free  supply  of  fresh  air,  they 
will  suffer  and  die.  Naturally,  fishes  breathe  the  air 
contained  in  the  water-  in  which  they  live.  That 
water  does  so  contain  air — entangled  perhaps  between 
the  liquid  particles — may  be  readily  proved  by 
watching  an  open  vessel  of  water  when  placed  over 
the  fire.  In  a  very  short  time  after  heat  is  first 
applied — long  before  the  water  has  become  heated  so 
as  to  produce  steam,  bubbles  are  seen  to  rise  to  the 
surface  and  there  break  and  escape.  These  bubbles 
are  portions  of  the  air  originally  contained  in  the 
water;  and  upon  this  supply  the  living  inhabitants 
of  the  liquid  element  subsist. 

A  very  conclusive,  though  cruel  experiment  is 
often  performed  to  illustrate  and  prove  this  fact.  If 
a  vessel  of  water  be  boiled  so  that  all  the  air  con- 
tained in  it  is  driven  away  and  if  then  it  be  cooled 
to  the  ordinary  temperature,  and  a  small  fish  intro- 
duced into  it,  the  little  creature  swims  around  as  if  in 
agony  for  a  short  time,  keeping  its  mouth  close  to 
the  surface  seeking  what  little  air  it  can  reach,  but 


92  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

soon  it  becomes  exhausted  and  dies.  It  has  been 
drowned  in  fact  for  want  of  air.  It  is  true  that  fishes 
do  not  need  as  much  air  as  land  animals  do;  the 
water  in  which  they  live  usually  contains  air  suf- 
ficient for  their  use.  Instead  of  lungs,  fishes  have 
peculiar  organs  called  gills,  so  constructed  as  to 
readily  separate  the  air  from  the  water;  and  this,  the 
lungs  of  animals  are  unable  to  do.  These  gills  are 
seen  on  the  sides  of  the  head,  looking  like  small, 
blood-red  feathers,  fixed  to  arches  of  bone;  there  are 
usually  four  of  them  on  each  side,  covered  by  a  hard, 
bony  lid,  called  the  gill-cover,  or  operculum.  By 
watching  a  fish  quietly  at  rest  in  the  water,  we  may 
easily  see  how  these  peculiar  organs  are  used.  We 
notice  the  little  swimmer  continually  opening  and 
closing  its  mouth,  and  just  as  regularly,  the  gill- 
covers  are  seen  to  rise  and  fall — in  fact,  water  is 
constantly  being  taken  in  through  the  mouth,  and 
driven  out  between  the  gills,  from  under  the  gill- 
covers,  thoroughly  bathing  the  little  feathery  fringes 
with  a  continuous  supply  of  fresh  water  charged 
with  the  life-giving  air. 

Through  the  filaments  of  the  gills  blood  is  con- 
stantly flowing  in  very  fine  vessels  or  tubes;  there 
are  so  many  of  them  that  if  looked  at  with  a  magni- 
fying glass,  the  gills  appear  almost  like  bundles  of 
blood-vessels;  it  is  the  large  quantity  of  blood  in 
these  vessels  that  gives  to  the  gills  their  bright  red 
color.  While  passing  through  the  gills,  the  blood  is 
purified  by  the  action  of  the  air,  and  cleansed  from 
the  many  foul  matters  with  which  it  had  become 


FISHES.  93 

contaminated  in  its  former  courses  through  the  body, 
and  is  again  started  on  its  rounds  to  invigorate  and 
to  strengthen.  These  fringe-like  gills  are  kept  apart 
from  each  other  by  the  action  of  the  water  passing 
between  them;  but  when  a  fish  is  taken  from  the 
water  the  fringes  fall  together  and  become  dry, 
although  supplied  more  plentifully  than  usual  with 
air.  Some  fishes  can  keep  their  gill-covers  forcibly 
closed  for  considerable  time  in  the  air,  so  that  the 
feathery  gills  beneath  are  kept  moist;  such  fishes  live 
much  longer  than  others  out  of  water. 

A  fish  weighs  almost  exactly  the  same  as  a  quan- 
tity of  water  equal  in  bulk  to  itself,  consequently  it 
has  no  tendency  through  its  weight  alone  either  to 
rise  or  fall  in  the  wrater,  and  a  very  slight  change  is 
sufficient  to  enable  it  to  move  easily  up  or  down. 
There  is  found  inside  the  fish's  body  and  near  the 
back  bone  a  peculiar  membranous  sack  called  the 
swimming-bladder,  filled  with  air,  and  capable  of 
being  contracted  or  enlarged  at  pleasure.  When  the 
fish  compresses  this  bladder  by  a  muscular  effort  the 
bulk  is  decreased,  though  the  weight  in  reality 
remains  the  same,  and  consequently  the  fish  sinks. 
On  the  other  hand,  if  the  fish  removes  the  pressure 
from  the  bladder  of  air  so  that  it  assumes  a  larger 
size,  the  bulk  of  the  fish  is  increased,  whereas  its 
weight  remains  unchanged,  and  as  a  consequence  the 
animal  rises  toward  the  surface. 

The  eyes  of  fish  are  generally  large  and  motion- 
less and  as  they  are  kept  constantly  moist  by  the 
water  in  which  the  animals  live,  there  is  no  need 


94  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

of  protecting  lids  or  lashes,  nor  of  any  apparatus  to 
produce  tears,  which  are  of  such  service  in  our  own 
eyes,  by  preventing  the  delicate  coverings  from 
becoming  dry.  Only  a  thin  transparent  skin  covers 
the  most  delicate  parts  of  the  eye. 

Most  fishes  are  voracious  feeders,*  living  mostly 
upon  the  various  kinds  of  aquatic  animals  inhabit- 
ing the  same  water;  indeed  many  of  them  feed  on 
fishes  smaller  than  themselves,  and  do  not  always 
hesitate  to  include  their  own  young  in  their  bill  of 
fare. 

Most  fishes  have  large  mouths,  containing  several 
rows  of  teeth;  the  tongue  and  palate  are  also  very 
frequently  covered  with  teeth;  while  others,  devoid 
of  teeth,  habitually  swallow  their  food  whole. 

Fishes  are  generally  oviparous,  that  is  to  say  they 
are  hatched  from  eggs  previously  deposited  in  the 
water.  Most  of  them  are  prolific  to  an  astonishing 
degree,  a  single  salmon  being  known  to  lay  some- 
times twenty  thousand  eggs;  a  herring  over  sixty 
thousand,  and  a  cod-fish  frequently  deposits  nine 
millions  of  eggs.  In  contrast  with  this  there  are 
some  fishes  that  deposit  but  very  few  eggs;  and  here 
is  another  illustration   of  Divine  wisdom;  the  fishes 

*  "At  a  lecture  delivered  before  the  Zoological  Society 
of  Dublin,  Dr.  Houston  exhibited  as  'a  fair  sample  of  a 
fish's  breakfast'  a  frog-fish  two  and  a  half  feet  long,  in 
the  stomach  of  which  was  a  codfish  two  feet  in  length. 
The  cod's  stomach  contained  the  bodies  of  two  whitings 
of  ordinary  size;  and  the  whitings  in  their  turn  held  the 
half-digested  remains  of  many  smaller  fishes,  too  much 
broken  up  to  be  identified. 


SOME    PISHES.  95 

most  useful  to  man  are  of  all  the  most  abundantly 
prolific,  while  the  dangerous  and  injurious  kinds 
multiply  but  slowly. 


CHAPTER    XVIII. 

SOME    FISHES. 

g£?0  ATTEMPT  any  sort  of  a  description  of  the 
different  classes  or  kinds  of  fishes,  is  almost  a 
hopeless  undertaking,  from  their  wonderful  and 
surprising  number.  There  are  no  less  than 
ten  thousand  kinds  of  fishes  now  known  and  in  part 
described.  The  ordinary  fresh  water  fishes  of  our 
rivers  and  lakes  exhibit  the  features  already  pointed 
out;  but  for  species  of  almost  incredible  size  and 
strength,  the  finny  denizens  of  the  ocean  must  be 
examined. 

Many  sea  fishes,  as  for  instance  shad  and  salmon, 
go  up  the  rivers  aud  deposit  their  eggs  in  fresh  water; 
the  young  fry,  however,  soon  seek  the  briny  ele- 
ment. Among  salt  water  fishes,  some  are  of  migratory 
or  wandering  habits,  appearing  off  certain  coasts 
regularly  at  particular  seasons.  It  is  found  to  be  a 
fact  also,  that  individual  fishes  frequently  visit  the 
same  place  year  after  year.  This  interesting  item 
has  been  proved  by  fishermen  taking  fishes  from  the 
uets,  marking  them  and  setting  them  at  liberty  again. 
The  same  marked  fishes  have  been  re-caught  year 
after  year. 


96  FIRST  BOOK  OF    NATURE. 

Among  ocean  fishes,  the  Sharks  are  of  great  inter- 
est. Sharks  grow  sometimes  to  a  length  of  thirty 
feet,  and  all  varieties  of  them  are  extremely  ferocious. 
They  are  the  tigers  of  the  ocean,  the  dread  and  the 
scourge  of  all  other  inhabitants  of  the  deep.  Their 
covering  is  not  scaly,  but  formed  of  a  hard,  tough, 
leathery  skin,  and  the  bones  are  soft  and  gristle-like. 
Such  bones  are  said  to  be  cartilaginous  in  structure. 

The  shark's  mouth  is  comparatively  large  and  filled 
with  numerous  rows  of  sharp,  lance-like  teeth.  These 
readily  attack  men  who  may  be  swimming  or  diving 
in  the  water,  and  are  able  to  bite  off  a  human  leg 
with  ease  at  a  single  snap. 

Though  these  savage  monsters  are  doubtlessly  in- 
tended to  be  butchers  and  destroyers,  the  Creator 
has  wisely  checked  their  facilities  for  unrestricted 
slaughter.  The  shark's  mouth  is  not  at  the  end  of 
the  nose  as  is  the  case  with  most  fishes,  but  under- 
neath the  head — much  as  the  mouth  of  a  hog  is  situ- 
ated. The  shark  therefore  is  unable  to  bite  without 
first  turning  over  on  its  back;  and  while  doing  this, 
its  intended  victims  sometimes  make  good  their 
escape.  * 

*  Many  accounts  of  shark  fishing  have  been  given;  and 
the  following  is  taken  from  one  of  our  popular  works  on 
zoology,  the  author  of  which  quotes  it  from  some  unspeci- 
fied source: — "I  was  holding  the  heavy  hook  and  wire 
rope  over  the  side,  when  I  felt  that  I  had  caught  a  big 
fish,  and  pulling  it  cautiously,  a  shark  came  to  the  surface. 
I  called  out,  when  the  passengers  ran  to  my  help.  He 
struggled  so  violently,  lashing  the  water  with  his  tail  and 
trying  to  bite  the  hook  asunder,  that  we  were  obliged  to 
keep  dipping  his  head  under  the  water  and  then  haul  him 


SOME  FISHES.  97 

The  Sword-fish  often  reaches  a  length  of  from 
twelve  to  fifteen  feet.  It  owes  its  celebrity  and  its 
name  to  a  peculiar  elongation  of  its  upper  jaw  into  a 
kind  of  dagger,  called  its  sword,  of  surprising 
strength.  This  it  uses  in  transfixing  its  prey,  and 
some  species  have  so  powerful  a  sword,  that  they 
have  been  known  to  drive  it  for  a  third  of  its  length 
through  the  copper-covered  hull  of  a  vessel.  There 
is  preserved  in  the  British  Museum  an  interesting 
specimen,  it  being  a  part  of  a  ship's  side  with  a  sword 
of  a  sword-fish  thrust  through. 

The  Saw-fish  is  appropriately  named  from  the 
notched  or  toothed  prolongation  of  its  jaw.  This  is 
a  formidable  weapon,  and  the  owner  is  not  afraid  to 
attack  with  it  any  inhabitant  of  the  sea;  even  the 
gigantic  whale  not  being  exempt. 

The  Flying-fish,  about  which  so  many  "fish 
stories"  have  been  told,  is  a  brilliantly  colored  crea- 

up  two  or  three  feet  to  let  it  run  down  his  throat.  At  last 
he  was  nearly  drowned,  when,  sending  a  running  bow-line 
down  the  rope  by  which  he  was  caught,  and  making  it 
taut  under  his  back  fin,  we  clapped  it  round  the  steam 
winch,  and  turned  the  steam  on.  Some  then  hauled  him 
up  while  all  available  hands  dragged  at  the  other  line, 
which  held  his  head.  As  soon  as  we  got  him  on  board  he 
broke  off  about  three  feet  of  the  ship's  bulwarks  by  a 
single  lash  of  his  tremendous  tail.  This  was  then  cut  off 
by  the  boatswain  with  a  hatchet,  while  a  dozen  of  us  with 
bowie-knives  finished  him.  We  found  in  his  stomach  six 
large  snakes,  two  empty  quart  bottles,  two  dozen  lobsters, 
and  a  sheep-skin  with  the  horns  and  shank-bones,  which 
the  cook  had  thrown  overboard  two  days  before.  The 
liver  filled  two  large  wash-deck  tubs,  and  when  tried  out 
gave  us  ten  gallons  of  oil," 


98  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

ture  with  very  broad  pectoral  or  breast  fins,  so  large 
in  fact,  that  when  the  animal  swims  with  great 
velocity  to  the  surface  of  the  water,  these  fins  sus- 
tain the  impetus  for  a  sufficient  time  to  bear  the  fish 
a  considerable  distance  through  the  air.  It  cannot 
flap  the  tins  at  all,  neither  change  the  direction  of 
its  so-called  "flight"  when  once  in  the  air;  and  it 
falls  into  the  water  again  at  the  expiration  of  a  short 
time. 

Then  there  is  the  so-called  Fishing  Frog,  common 
about  the  coasts  of  Europe  and  America.  Its  bead 
is  so  large  that  the  rest  of  the  body  looks  much  like 
a  mere  appendage  thereto.  The  wide  mouth  is  lined 
with  long  and  sharp  teeth.  The  front,  or  pectoral 
fins  are  so  large  and  spiny,  that  they  support  the 
weight  of  the  body  when  the  creature  rests  upon 
them;  and  this  it  often  does,  seeming  really  to  walk, 
or  crawl  along  the  bottom  of  the  sea.  All  around 
the  head,  and  on  some  parts  of  its  body  are  fringed 
outgrowths,  looking  very  much  like  the  sea-weeds, 
among  which  it  usually  lies  concealed.  Along  the 
top  of  the  creature's  head,  in  the  median  line,  are 
three  long  filaments,  the  first  terminating  in  a  kind 
of  drooping  fringe.  This  is  the  fisher's  bait;  by 
lying  quiet  in  the  weeds  and  causing  its  brightly- 
colored  filaments  to  wave  back  and  forth,  it  readily 
attracts  the  smaller  fishes  of  the  neighborhood,  who 
seem  to  be  deceived  by  the  bait,  thinking  it  to  be, 
perhaps,  a  worm,  or  an  insect;  as  soon  as  they  are 
within  easy  range,  by  a  quick  movement,  they  are 
engulfed  in  the  capacious  gape. 


INSECTS.  99 

A  very  large  fish  family  are  knowu  under  the 
name  of  Flat  Fish.  They  usually  lie  while  at  rest 
flat  on  one  side  at  or  near  the  bottom  of  the  water; 
but  while  swimming  they  take  the  usual  vertical 
position.  The  under  side  is  light-colored,  and  the 
upper  surface  dark — a  provision  of  Nature  shown  also 
in  the  case  of  other  fish — by  which  they  are  difficult  to 
see  from  above  or  below,  the  dark  upper  side  appear- 
ing much  of  the  same  color  as  the  bottom;  and  the 
light  under  surface  being  scarcely  visible  from  below. 
In  the  case  of  the  turbot — a  common  flat  fish,  the 
eyes  are  both  placed  on  the  same  side  of  the  head. 
When  the  fish  rests  upon  its  side,  this  is  the  position 
of  greatest  service. 

For  the  description  of  many  interesting  fishes,  the 
reader  is  recommended  to  any  good  work  on  Zoology. 


CHAPTER    XIX. 

INSECTS. 

[EXT  to  the  joyous  song  of  birds,  there  is  per- 
haps no  sound  more  pleasing  to  the  ear  than 
the  merry  buzz  and  cheerful  hum  of  insects 
abroad  among  the  flowers,  in  the  brilliant 
summer  time.  They  seem  so  happy  in  their  darting 
flight;  stopping  here  to  sip  a  tiny  drop  of  nectar 
from  the  lncern  or  clover  flower;  and  yonder  to  pick 
honey  from  the  wild  blossoms  of  the  roadside:  chas- 
ing  each  other  through  the  air  with  untrammeled 


100  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

gaiety,  and  all  the  unconcern  of  romping  schoolboys — 
every  day  seems  a  holiday  with  them. 

Yet  oftentimes  when  we  think  that  they  are  sport- 
ing in  the  depths  of  fun  they  are  in  reality  accom- 
plishing the  work  of  their  lives;  but  they  have 
acquired  the  happy  faculty  of  looking  upon  labor 
with  joy  and  of  taking  pleasure  in  their  work.  Here 
is  a  lesson  for  us  from  the  butterflies  and  the  bees. 

Most  of  these  little'  winged  beauties  seem  deter- 
mined to  extract  all  the  pleasure  and  joy  that  life 
can  lend,  as  if  they  realize  that  their  time  of  exist- 
ence is  very  brief. 

Some  of  them  live  but  a  day  in  a  full)'-  developed 
state;  but  before  reaching  that  perfection  they  pass 
through  great  and  complicated  changes,  occupying 
weeks  and  in  the  case  of  some  insects  even  years. 

A  more  wonderful  series  of  changes  than  that 
which  is  shown  in  the  course  of  an  insect's  life,  it  is 
difficult  to  imagine.  There  appears,  for  instance,  but 
little  resemblance  between  the  green  caterpillar  so 
often  seen  crawling  about  the  cabbages,  amusing 
itself  by  making  sieves  of  the  leaves,  and  the  white 
or  yellow  butterfly  noticed  a  short  time  after;  yet 
the  caterpillar  is  in  truth  the  baby  butterfly.  It  will 
be  worth  the  trouble  to  capture  a  few  of  these  cater- 
pillars, and  keep  them  under  observation  during  the 
time  of  their  growth,  supplying  them  with  plenty  of 
leaves  upon  which  to  feed. 

The  caterpillar  is  usually  called  the  larva  of  the 
insect — this  word  means  literally  a  mask  and  is 
applied  in  this  way  because  the  insect  seems  to  be  in 


INSECTS.  101 

a  sort  of  disguise,  the  future  appearance  of  the  fully 
developed  insect  not^being  at  all  recognizable.  Most 
insects  in  the  larval  condition  are  prodigious  feeders; 
they  seem  to  consider  eating  as  the  main  object  of 
their  existence;  and  in  consequence  many  of  them 
prove  pests  and  nuisances  to  man.  Their  growth 
is  so  rapid  that  at  very  short  intervals  they  find 
themselves  too  big  for  their  skin;  whenever  this 
is  the  case,  the  skin  is  cast  away,  as  one  might  discard 
an  outgrown  coat,  and  another  covering  soon  comes  in 
its  place. 

After  several  of  such  "moults"  have  occurred,  the 
larva  seems  to  lose  its  appetite;  it  seeks  some  quiet 
and  sheltered  place,  under  a  leaf,  or  in  a  crevice  of 
a  building  or  the  bark  of  a  tree,  or  perhaps  it 
buries  itself  in  the  earth,  and  there  prepares  for  a  long 
sleep.  This  preparation  consists  in  very  carefully 
constructing  a  sleeping  apartment;  it  may  be  a  woven 
chamber  of  fine  silk  called  the  cocoon  in  which  the 
larva  incloses  itself — or  perhaps  the  little  creature 
forms  a  cell  in  the  earth  or  on  a  tree,  and  lines  this 
with  its  own  fine-spim  silk;  in  other  cases  it  becomes 
coated  with  a  hard  leathery  shell,  in  which  the  out- 
lines of  the  future  insect,  its  wings,  feet  etc.  can  be 
readily  traced.  In  this  case  the  little  thing  does  not 
look  unlike  a  miniature  baby  trussed  up  in  its  swad- 
ling  clothes;  and  from  such  resemblance  the  insect 
in  this  stage  is  called  a  pupa,  from  an  ancient  word 
meaning  an  infant.  Many  of  these  pupae  are  to  be 
found  in  the  spring  lying  on  the  newly  plowed  land 
as  they  have  been  turned  up  by  the  plow  from  their 


102  FIRST  BOOK  OF|  NATURE. 

underground  sleeping  quarters.  But  soon  another 
change  follows;  the  pupa  case,  whether  leathery  shell 
or  silken  cocoon,  bursts  open,  and  the  winged  insect 
called  the  imago  issues  therefrom. 

In  figure  nineteen  are  shown  the  larva  and  imago 
of  one  of  our  common  moths;  and  in  figure  twenty 
may  be  seen  the  larva,  pupa,  and  imago  of  the 
mosquito. 

Let  us  capture  a  butterfly  or  a  moth,  or  in  fact  any 
flying  insect,  and  carefully  look  at  its  parts.  A  large 
volume  could  well  be  written  upon  the  wonderful 
structure  of  an  insect's  body.  Its  head  is  seen  to 
bear  two  appendages  looking  something  like  horns; 
these  are  smooth  in  the  butterfly,  jointed  in  the 
beetle,  and  feathered  or  plume-like  in  the  moth. 
These  peculiar  organs  are  called  antenna;  and  they 
seem  to  serve  important  purposes  in  the  insect's  little 
life.  With  them  it  feels,  and  perhaps  also  smells. 
By  their  aid  insects  seem  able  to  converse  with  one 
another,  and  so  perfect  their  understanding  appears 
to  be  that  Huber,  a  great  naturalist,  has  called  this 
system  of  communication  antennal  language.  Watch 
a  couple  oi  ants  from  the  same  nest  when  they  meet; 
they  approach  and  seem  to  tap  each  other  with  their 
antennas  in  a  very  significant  way,  and  apparently 
with  perfect  success.  It  is  not  hard  to  imagine  that 
they  are  making  a  mutual  report  as  tD  the  results  of 
the  morning's  hunt  for  food;  or  perhaps  consulting  as 
to  the  best  way  home,  or  discussing  the  affairs  of 
their  ant-world  in  general. 

Look  carefully  now  at  the  insect's  eye — it  is  far 


BEES  AND  WASPS.  103 

different  from  the  visual  organs  of  most  other  ani- 
mals. By  the  assistance  of  a  magnifying  glass  we 
shall  doubtless  discover  a  most  remarkable  arrange- 
ment. Select  for  instance  the  large,  prominent  eye 
of  the  dragon-fly  for  examination.  It  seems  to 
be  made  up  of  a  great  many  brilliant  little  plates 
placed  edge  to  edge  like  the  facets  on  the  surface  of 
a  cut  diamond.  Each  of  these  facets  or  plates  faces 
in  a  different  direction,  so  that  although  the  insect's 
eye  is  fixed  and  immovable  in  its  place,  yet  by  its 
peculiar  shape  and  setting  the  little  creature  is  aWe 
to  see  in  nearly  all  directions.  Such  an  eye  is  said 
to  be  compound  in  distinction  from  the  simple  eye  of 
most  other  animals,  which  consists  of  but  one  ball 
and  face.  In  the  ant's  eye  there  are  fifty  such  facets, 
in  the  eye  of  the  common  house-fly  over  four  thou- 
sand, some  butterflies  possess  upwards  of  seventeen 
thousand,  and  many  beetles  show  over  twenty-five 
thousand.  We  are  not  able  to  tell  the  range  of  in- 
sect vision;  some  of  the  tiniest  have  to  all  appear- 
ances powers  of  sight  but  poorly  imitated  by  man 
even  with  his  wondrous  microscopes. 


CHAPTER    XX. 

BEES  AND  WASPS. 

tfjsajEES  and  wasps,  and  all  their  relatives,  are  pro- 

oSSi   vided    with   thin,    nearly   transparent   wings. 

&£a    Bees  have  a  short  body,  covered  with  crisp, 

3a)      dark  hair;  the  first  joint  of  the  hind  legs  is,  in 

comparison,  very  large,  with  grooves  and  channels 


104  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

upon  it,  for  collecting  and  carrying  the  pollen  of 
flowers.  They  are  very  industrious  little  creatures, 
living  generally  in  communities,  in  which,  there 
appears  to  be  a  most  perfect  system  of  organization. 

A  queen  bee,  is  recognized  in  each  colony;  she  is 
the  only  perfectly  developed  female  among  them  all; 
and  by  her,  all  the  eggs  are  produced.  Beside  the 
queen,  there  are  workers  and  drones,  the  latter, 
being  the  male  bees,  and,  for  the  most  part,  con- 
summate idlers;  they  are  stung  to  death  by  the 
workers,  without  mercy,  as  soon  as  the  pairing  season 
is  over. 

The  honey-comb,  which  is  manufactured  by  the 
bees  from  the  pollen  of  flowers,  is  built  in  the  form 
of  numerous  little  rooms,  or  cells,  each  six-sided  in 
form,  and  all  placed  side  by  side,  so  that  each  divid- 
ing partition  is  in  fact  a  wall  for  two  cells  at  once. 
This  is  the  shape  by  which  all  the  waste  room  between 
the  cells  is  avoided,  and  at  the  same  time  the  struct- 
ure is  the  strongest  imaginable,  and  the  amount  of 
wax  employed  in  the  construction,  is  the  smallest. 

The  division  of  labor  within  the  hive,  seems  to  be 
most  perfect;  the  workers  laboring  with  such  pre- 
cision, that  an  ordinary  swarm  of  bees  can  construct 
upwards  of  four  thousand  comb-cells  within  twenty- 
four  hours.  As  soon  as  the  cells  are  completed,  the 
working  bees  industriously  gather  the  nectar  and 
sweet  juices  of  flowers,  and  store  the  same  as  honey 
within  the  comb.  The  value  of  this  delicious 
material,  as  one  of  our  most  wholesome  sweets,  is 
known  and  appreciated  by  us  all.     It  has   always 


BEES  AND  WASPS. 


105 


been  held  in  high  esteem; — Deseret,  the  honey-bee, 
was  carried  by  the  Nephites  of  old,  from  place  to  place 
in  their  wanderings,  and  gave  the  sweet  fruits  of  its 
industry  for  sustenance  and  enjoyment. 

Humble  Bees,  or,  as  they  are  sometimes  named, 
Bumble  Bees,  are  considerably  larger  than  the 
ordinary  honey  bees.  They  are  of  a  wild  nature, 
preferring  not  to  accept  any  of  the  provisions  that 
men  may  make  for  their  residence,  such  as  hives  or 
boxes;  they  usually  build  their  nests  under  the 
surface  of  tne  ground,  or  beneath  a  large  stone  or 
some  such  object. 

Figure  18  shows  the  humble  bee,  natural  size,  and 
its  peculiarly-shaped  honey  cells. 

The  bees  already 
spoken  of  are  some- 
times called  social 
bees  from  their  in- 
stinctive association 
in  communities;  but 
beside  such,  there 
are  a  number  of  bees 
that  lead  a  more  se- 
cluded life,  each  liv- 
ing by  itself;  all  such 
are  termed  for  dis- 

Fig.18. — Humble  Bee  and  its  honey  " 

ceils.  bees.     Of  these  there 

are  some  that  build  for  themselves  little  cells,  covered 

with  sand  grains  or  small  stones  fastened  together  by 

means  of  a  sticky  fluid  formed  in  their  mouths;  these 


106  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

are  called  Mason  Bees.  Then  there  are  the  truly 
ingenious  little  Carpenter  Bees,  those  that  bore 
holes  in  dry  tree  trunks  and  the  like,  in  which  they 
deposit  their  eggs.  In  each  of  the  cells  so  formed, 
along  with  the  eggs,  they  lay  away  a  store  of  pollen 
gathered  from  flowers,  to  serve  as  food  for  the  larvae, 
as  soon  as  hatched  from  the  eggs.  And  still  another 
kind  are  noted  for  their  wonderful  skill  in  shaping 
cells  from  leaves;  they  cut  and  fashion  these  leaves 
with  all  the  precision  of  trained  workers,  and  they 
fully  deserve  their  title  of  Upholsterer  Bees. 

Many  kinds  of  Wasps  show  a  remarkable  dexterity 
in  the  construction  of  their  homes.  They  usually 
build  with  a  stout  sort  of  paper  which  they  produce 
by  first  gnawing  wood  to  a  fine  powder,  and  then 
mixing  it  with  the  saliva  to  form  a  kind  of  pulp; 
this  dries  and  becomes  very  hard  and  tough  in 
the  air.  It  is  only  during  the  last  few  years  that 
man  has  learned  to  follow  the  example  so  long  set 
by  these  humble  insects — using  of  wood  in  paper- 
making.  From  this  tough  material  the  "paper  wasps" 
build  their  cells,  six-sided  in  form  like  the  cells 
of  the  honey-bee's  comb.  The  wasps  arrange  their 
cells  within  the  nest  in  stories  or  floors  of  different 
levels,  each  floor  being  suspended  from  the  one 
above  it  by  stout  rods  of  paper.  Wasps  build  their 
nests  as  homes  for  themselves  and  their  young  and 
not  for  the  storing  of  food.  They  do  not  gather  or 
eat  honey  as  do  bees,  but  feed  on  insects  more 
defenseless  than  themselves. 

The  Hornet  is  a  large  and  fierce  kind  of  wasp, 


BEES  AND  WASPS.  107 

which  lives  in  a  paper  house  constructed  as  before 
described  and  usually  hung  from  the  branch  of  a 
tree.  Such  nests  frequently  measure  from  one  and 
a  half  to  two  feet  in  diameter.  The  inmates  are  so 
pugnacious  in  their  dispositions,  and  so  ready  to 
resent  any  intrusion  on  their  domains,  that  one  has 
usually  cause  to  regret  his  temerity  in  approaching 
the  paper  mansion  too  closely. 

The  Mud  Wasps  construct  with  great  skill  and 
precision  small  cylindrical  cells  of  mud,  the  material 
for  which  they  temper  and  mix  as  carefully  as  a 
brickmaker  does  his  clay.  These  are  used  only  as 
depositories  for  the  eggs  and  as  nurseries  for  the 
young.  As  soon  as  a  cell  is  completed,  the  wasp 
places  an  egg  or  two  within,  then  fills  the  remaining 
space  with  spiders  or  caterpillars  or  the  like,  and 
seals  up  the  opening.  These  imprisoned  insects  are 
designed  to  serve  as  food  for  the  larvae  as  soon  as  de- 
veloped from  the  eggs;  for  these  infantile  wasps  seem 
to  inherit  and  show  from  their  birth  the  prodigious 
appetites  and  ravenous  dispositions  of  their  parents. 

The  female  insects  of  nearly  all  of  the  wasp  and 
bee  families  sting  severely  if  angered.  The  sting  of 
the  working  bee  is  curved,  so  that  when  thrust  into 
the  flesh  of  an  animal  it  is  held  there;  it  is  usually 
therefore  torn  from  the  stinger's  body  and  remains 
in  the  wound.  Such  is  not  true  of  the  stings  be- 
longing to  the  queen  bee  and  the  wasps,  which  are 
straight  and  can  be  repeatedly  used  without  serious 
injury  to  the  owner,  but  always  with  considerable 
inconvenience  to  the  unfortunate  victim. 


108  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

The  sting  is  connected  with  a  poison  gland,  from 
which  an  irritating  fluid  issues  and  enters  the 
wound  whenever  the  sting  is  used. 

The  effects  are  in  all  cases  painful  and  in  some 
actually  dangerous  to  health  and  life.  In  case  of 
such  a  sting,  great  relief  may  be  gained  from  rub- 
bing a  little  dilute  ammonia  (hartshorn  as  it  is  fre- 
quently named) -over  the  affected  part.  If  this  be 
not  obtainable,  a  little  soda  dissolved  in  water  may 
be  used.  The  poison  from  the  sting  is  of  an  acid 
character  and  any  weak  alkali  will  tend  to  neutralize 
it  and  diminish  the  distressing  effects.*  Even  mud, 
if  applied  immediately  after  the  injury,  will  afford 
relief,  owing  to  the  action  of  the  free  alkali  always 
present,  though  in  very  small  quantity,  in  the  earth. 

Most  of  us  have  perhaps  observed  at  times  a 
number  of  small  hard  swellings  on  the  leaves  of  such 
plants  as  the  oak,  willow,  or  rose.  These  so-called 
galls  are  produced  through  punctures  in  the  leaves 
made  by  insects  very  much  like  bees  and  wasps  in 
character,  and  known  as  Gall  Flies.  Let  us  cut 
through  some  of  these  galls  with  a  sharp  knife; 
within  we[are  apt  to  find  either  eggs  or  young  gall- 
flies; or  perhaps  a  little  hole  through  the  side  of  the 
gall,  tells  us  that  the  tenant  has  already  taken  his 
breakfast  and  left  home.     As  soon  as  hatched  the 

♦Ordinary  prudence  will  indicate  the  care  to  be  used  in 
applying  any  remedy  if  the  injury  be  near  the  eye  or  any 
such  delicate  part  of  the  body.  In  such  a  case,  the  appli- 
cation may  cause  greater  trouble  than  the  original  injury, 
unless  very  feeble  solutions  are  used. 


ANTS,  GRASSHOPPERS,  BUTTERFLIES.      109 

larva  feeds  vigorously  on  the  soft,  pulpy  material  of 
the  gall,  which  strange  food  seems  to  be  of  all  kinds 
best  adapted  to  its  nature.  Nut-galls  formed  on  oak 
trees  in  tropical  parts  are  used  very  extensively  in 
the  manufacture  of  ink  and  other  coloring  matters, 
and  also  in  medicine. 


CHAPTER  XXI. 

ANTS,  GRASSHOPPERS   AND    BUTTERFLIES. 

p^SSNTS  are  usually  wingless  for  the  greater  part 
of  their  lives;  in  fact  they  voluntarily  tear 
off  their  wings  as  soon  as  a  place  has  been 
selected  for  a  permanent  residence.  Most  of 
them  live  underground,  their  houses  being  marked 
by  mounds  of  sand,  or  earth,  or,  even  such  loose 
material  as  bits  of  sticks  and  the  like.  The 
interior  arrangement  of  the  ant-dwelling  shows 
numerous  chambers  and  halls,  in  which  food  is 
stored,  and  the  young  are  protected  and  reared. 
These  little  creatures  seem  to  live  under  a  remark- 
able system  of  organization  and  government.  The 
wise  man  of  old  gave  good  advice  when  he  said: 
"Go  to  the  ant,  thou  sluggard;  consider  her  ways 
and  be  wise."  Within  the  ant  kingdom,  labor  is 
divided,  and  each  inhabitant  follows  the  profession 
for  which  it  is  best  fitted;  some  of  them  are  builders, 
others  hunters,  and  some  do  nothing  else  but  fight; 
these  are  soldiers  by  profession,  and  seemingly  take 
no  part  in  ordinary  labor  and  household  duties. 


110  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

Most  ants  are  extremely  fond  of  sweets;  and  we 
may  often  find  a  score  of  red  or  black  ants  feasting  on 
a  fallen  pear  or  peach,  if  soft  and  ripe,  provided  there 
is  a  crack  in  the  rind.  But  they  frequently  seek  to 
satisfy  their  liking  for  sweet  things  in  a  more  inter- 
esting way.  There  is  a  remarkable  little  insect 
called  the  Aphis  or  plant-louse,  in  size  about  that  of 
a  large  pin  head,  and  usually  of  a  greenish  or  black 
color,  often  to  be  seen  on  the  leaves  of  peach  and 
plum  trees  and  many  garden  plants.  These  little 
creatures  have  the  power  of  forming  within  their 
bodies  a  sweet  fluid  called  honey-dew,  and  of  this 
the  ants  are  extremely  fond.  Toward  the  plant- 
lice  they  show  the  greatest  respect,  and  the  kindest 
of  treatment,  often  carrying  them  off  bodily  to  their 
nests,  and  there  tending  them  with  all  the  solicitous 
care  of  a  faithful  herder  watching  his  cattle.  The 
plant-lice  have  been  called  the  ant's  milch  cows;  and 
these  they  keep  in  little  pens  or  stables  within  their 
nests,  feeding  and  fattening  them,  and  frequently 
taking  them  out  to  pasture  when  the  day  is  fine,  and 
returning  them  to  their  stalls  at  proper  time.  The 
ants  greedily  devour  the  honey-dew  as  fast  as  pro- 
duced; and  frequently  excite  the  flow  of  the  juice  by 
stroking  the  aphides  with  their  antennas,  as  a  milker 
presses  the  teats  of  the  cow. 

ABOUT    GRASSHOPPERS   AND    LOCUSTS. 

Grasshoppers  and  Locusts  have  many  peculiarities 
by  which  they  are  distinguished  from  other  insects. 
They  do  not  pass  through  the  complete  changes 
already  spoken  of,  as  common   to  insects  generally, 


ANTS,  GRASSHOPPERS,  BUTTERFLIES.      HI 

appearing  first  as  larvae,  then  as  pupae,  and  finally 
as  imagos  or  perfect  insects. 

As  soon  as  hatched  from  the  eggs,  they  exhibit  a 
ravenous  appetite,  and  seem  to  retain  it  throughout 
their  lives.  Ordinarily,  we  make  little  or  no  distinc- 
tion in  speaking  of  grasshoppers  or  locusts;  but,  for 
the  sake  of  precision,  it  should  be  known  that  the 
insects  we  usually  call  grasshoppers,  are,  according  to 
the  classification  of  entomologists,  in  reality,  locusts. 
The  pretty  little  katy-did.  with  its  delicate  wings, 
its  pale  green  color,  and  its  monotonous  sound — from 
which  it  gets  its  name — is  a  species  of  the  true  grass- 
hopper. It  is  thought  that  the  male  katy-did,  pro- 
duces the  characteristic  sound,  by  rubbing  together 
a  couple  of  stiff  membranes,  like  drum -heads,  situ- 
ated at  the  base  of  the  wings. 

Locusts  have  larger  bodies,  shorter  antenna},  and 
much  smaller  limbs  than  grasshoppers.  As  is  known 
to  us  through  the  sad  and  painful  experiences  of  our 
early  settlers  in  these  parts,  locusts  prove  a  most 
distressing  scourge  when  present  in  great  numbers. 
They  swarm  at  times  so  thick  as  to  partially  obscure 
the  sun's  light  in  their  flight.  The  land  was  "as  the 
Garden  of  Eden  before  them,  and  behind  them  as  a 
desolate  wilderness."  But  terrible  as  their  visitation 
has  proved  itself  in  these  mountain  vales,  they  have 
been  miraculously  removed  through  [the  prayers  of 
the  people  and  the  mercy  of  a  kind  Protector 

BUTTERFLIES  AND  MOTHS. 

These  may  be  called  the  aristocrats  of  the  insect- 
world;  with  their  delicate  wings  painted  as  if  by  fairy 


112  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

fingers  in  heavenly  tints,  and  their  dainty  tastes, 
they  offer  truly  a  strange  contrast  with  the  worm- 
like caterpillars  from  which  they  sprang.  They  are 
usually  called  Scale-  ivinged  Insects,  from  the  feathery 
scales  that  form  the  gaily  colored  covering  of  their 
wings.  These  brilliant  scales  are  easily  rubbed  off  if 
the  insect  be  at  all  roughly  handled;  and  a  little  of 
this  dust  looked  at  through  a  powerful  microscope 
shows  itself  to  be  made  up  of  many  little  plates, 
each  as  distinct  and  perfect  as  the  coarse,  heavy 
cales  on  the  body  of  a  fish.  Each  is  shaped  some- 
what like  a  blunt-tipped  leaf,  with  a  little  stalk  by 
which  it  is  inserted  into  the  membranous  frame- 
work of  the  wing.  They  are  so  placed  as  to  overlap 
and  by  their  symmetrical  and  truly  artistic  arrange- 
ment to  produce  the  wondrously  beautiful  effects  of 
color — too  gorgeous  in  fact  to  admit  of  an  adequate 
description;  but  why  should  such  be  attempted  in 
words  when  the  living  wonder  in  all  its  glorious 
beautjr  can  be  observed  by  every  one  who  has  such  a 
desire.  Upon  the  butterfly's  wing  the  brightest  hues  of 
nature  seem  to  be  assembled;  there  we  behold  the 
flashing  light  of  the  diamond  together  with  the 
brilliancy  of  the  sapphire  the  depth  of  the  emerald, 
and  the  lustre  of  burnished  gold. 

Let  us  glance  now  for  a  moment  at  the  peculiar 
form  of  the  insect's  head.  The  antennae  are  long 
and  club-shaped  in  the  case  of  the  butterfly,  and 
generally  of  a  featherly  form  in  the  moth.  On  the 
under  side  of  the  head  of  a  butterfly  is  seen  a  long 
slender  trunk,  usually  coiled  up  as  a  rope  when  not 


ANTS,  GRASSHOPPERS,  BUTTER  ^LIES.      113 

in  use-  This  is  a  tube,  which  can  be  made  to  operate 
as  a  perfect  little  suction  pump  and  pipe.  By  this 
ingeDious  mechanism  the  insect  readily  pumps  up 
the  juicy  sweets  from  the  flower  cups  which  it  honors 
by  its  visits. 

Butterflies  feed  and  fly  in  the  day-time  and  rest  at 
night,  but  most  moths  are  night- fliers.  Many 
moths  are  of  great  use  to  man,  by  furnishing  a 
kind  of  silk  in  their  cocoons.  This  is  especially 
true  of  the  silk  worm,  which  spins  a  large  oval 
cocoon  in  which  it  rests  during  its  sleep  as  a  pupa. 
The  silk  is  in  fact  a  hardened  kind  of  glue  or  gum, 


Fig.  19.— Tent  Caterpillar  Moth,  showing  the  eggs,  larva, 

and  imago. 

which  the  insect  secretes  in  a  cavity  near  the  head; 
and  the  cocoon  consists  of  a  single  continuous 
thread.     In  the  processes  of  preparing  this  silk  for 


114  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

use,  the  pupae  within  the  cocoons  are  killed  by  heat 
or  suffocation,  else  they  would  cut  their  way  through 
the  silken  house  and  thus  destroy  the  continuity  of 
the  thread.  The  silk  is  then  unwound,  reeled  and 
spun. 

Fig.  19  shows  the  "Tent  Caterpillar  Moth,"  which 
has  several  times  destroyed  the  fruit  crops  in 
different  parts  of  Utah.  The  eggs  are  deposited 
as  a  collar  around  some  small  twig.  The  caterpillar  is 
a  pretty  creature  in  spite  of  its  destructive  nature, 
ornamented  with  brilliant  tufts  of  colored  bristles. 
The  name  tent  caterpillar  is  given  to  these  insects 
from  the  silken  net  which  they  spin  upon  the  tree, 
and  which  serves  as  a  temporary  house  or  tent. 


CHAPTER  XXII. 

FLIES   AND   BEETLES. 

HOUSE-FLIES,  mosquitoes,  and  all  their  kindred 
^  are  characterized  by  having  but  two  wings 
instead  of  four,  the  latter  being  the  usual 
number  with  insects.  In  place  of  the  hind 
wings,  they  have  a  pair  of  thread-like  appendages 
with  knobs  at  the  extremities  called  balancers. 

The  ordinary  house-fly  is  well  worth  our  attentive 
study.  Watch  it  while  it  is  quietly  feeding,  you 
see  it  thrust  out  apparently  from  the  head  a  short 
club-shaped  organ,  usually  of  a  brown  color,  and 
commonly   called   the    tongue,    but   more   properly 


FLIES  AND  BEETLES.  115 

the  trunk  ^  or  proboscis,  for  the  appendage  serves 
many  purposes  foreign  to  the  ordinary  uses  of  a 
tongue.  It  is  in  fact  a  very  delicate  though  perfect 
pump,  by  means  of  which  liquids  may  be  drawn 
into  the  fly's  mouth.  A  piece  of  dry  sugar  or 
any  such  solid  substance  must  first  be  moistened 
by  a  fluid  from  the  fly's  mouth,  so  as  to  form  a 
syrup  which  is  then  drawn  through  the  trunk  into  the 
mouth.  Each  tiny  foot  of  the  fly  has  a  sole  con- 
sisting of  a  couple  of  expanded  plates  or  discs,  acting 
like  suckers.  By  pressing  these  little  discs  firmly 
against  any  smooth  surface,  the  fly  is  enabled  to 
hold  itself  attached,  though  hanging  back  down- 
ward. The  flaps  are  lifted  and  the  foot  loosened  by 
means  of  a  set  of  little  hooks  with  which  each  foot  is 
provided. 

Mosquitoes  are  on  quite  intimate  terms  of  acquaint- 
ance with  most  of  us,  and  need  no  introduction.  In 
the  early  part  of  their  existence,  they  live  in  the 
water  and  are  known  among  the  boys  as  wigglers,  or 
wiggle-tails.  They  are  extremely  active  in  all  their 
movements,  offering  a  strong  contrast  to  the  slow- 
moving  caterpillars  and  maggots,  which  are  the  lar- 
va? of  some  other  insects.  Swarms  of  wigglers  ma3^ 
be  seen  frequently,  during  the  warm  weather  in 
stagnant  pools,  each  hanging  head  downward  in  the 
water,  the  posterior  part  of  the  body  being  kept  at 
the  surface.  A  small  breathing  tube  is  attached 
near  the  extremity  of  the  body. 

The  appearance  of  the  larval  mosquito,  also  the 
pupa,  the  imago  just  escaping  from  the  pupa- case, 


116 


FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 


and  the  perfect  insects,  male  and  female  are  shown 
enlarged  in  figure  20. 


Fig.  20. — The  Mosquito — male,  female;  imago,  pupa 
and  larva. 

The  activity  of  the  wiggler  is  not  lost  even  when  the 
mosquito  reaches  its  adult  age.  The  lances  with  which 
the  little  creature  bores  the  skin  of  its  victim  are 
very  sharp,  and  when  not  in  use  the3T  are  kept  care- 
fully protected  within  a  double  sheath  or  covering. 

We  are  very  apt  to  think  of  mosquitoes  as  if  they 
were  worthless  pests,  calculated  only  to  cause  annoy- 
ance and  pain  to  man  and  beast.  Such  an  extreme 
judgment  is  in  a  degree  unjust.     Earnest  students  of 


FLIES  AND  BEETLES.  117 

nature  have  not  yet  been  able  to  declare  any  created 
thing  positively  worthless :  the  Creator  has  a  purpose  in 
all  his  works;  and  even  flies  and  mosquitoes  are  of  cer- 
tain benefit  to  the  rest  of  the  animal  world,  and  to 
man  who  claims  superiority  over  all.  Flies  devour 
vast  quantities  of  decaying  matter  about  our  houses 
and  premises,  which,  if  left  unconsumed,  would 
prove  a  most  fertile  soil  for  disease  germs;  and  mos- 
quitoes do  similar  work  in  the  marshes  and  swamps, 
which  form  their  homes.  They  are  found  in  great- 
est numbers  during  the  heated  season,  when  their 
services  are  most  needed.  They  certainly  do  not 
seem  to  have  been  created  as  ministers  to  man's 
present  comfort;  but  they  do  him  good  nevertheless, 
and  that  too  in  spite  of  his  enmity  and  disgust  for 
them. 

Dragon  Flies  or  Darning  Needles,  as  some  are 
used  to  call  them,  have  very  large  wings  of  a  beauti- 
ful gauzy  character,  looking  finer  than  the  finest 
muslin.  They  possess  very  long  bodies,  and  large 
lustrous  eyes,  and  cannot  fail  to  attract  one's  notice 
by  their  swift  and  graceful  flight.  Far  from  being 
harmful,  as  many  suppose  them,  they  are  incapable 
of  doing  hurt  to  anything  larger  than  a  mosquito  or 
a  gnat,  but  upon  the  hosts  of  these  troublesome  little 
creatures  they  wage  an  incessant  warfare.  They  are 
indeed  the  hawks  of  the  insect  world;  and  whenever 
we  see  them  darting  about  over  pools  of  water  or 
across  the  meadow  lands,  we  may  know  that  a  whole- 
sale destruction  is  going  on  among  the  smaller  flies 
hovering  in  those  places. 


118  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

Beetles  are  frequently  called  sheath-winged  in- 
sects from  the  fact  that  the  first  pair  of  wings 
are  hard  and  horny,  forming  an  effectual  sheath 
for  the  more  delicate  wings  beneath.  Only  the 
hind  wings  are  used  for  flight,  and  when  not  in 
use  these  are  safely  packed  away  beneath  the  cases. 
Watch  a  beetle  just  alighted  from  its  flight;  see 
how  skillfully  it  folds  and  lays  aside  its  lace-like 
wings  by  the  help  of  its  hind  legs.  The  known 
varieties  of  beetles  are  said  to  exceed  thirty  thousand 
and  these  differ  widely  in  size.  There  is  the  delicate 
little  Half-winged  Beetle,  smaller  than  a  millet  seed, 
which  flies  mostly  at  night,  and  occasionally  makes 
its  presence  uncomfortably  felt  by  getting  inside  our 
eye-lids.  There  is  also  the  gaudily-dressed  Lady- 
bird Beetle,  so  common  about  our  gardens  and  flower 
plats,  which  should  be  carefully  protected  for  the 
good  it  works  by  destroying  such  vast  numbers  of 
plant  lice.  Then  we  meet  frequently  with  the  busy 
little  Tiger  Beetle  and  a  great  many  forms  of  Water 
Beetles. 

A  very  remarkable  beetle  is  shown  in  figure  21. 
It  is  called  the  Stag  Beetle,  or  stag-horn  beetle, 
from  the  stout  branched  projections  upon  its  head, 
resembling,  somewhat,  the  antlers  of  a  deer.  It 
flies  mostly  at  night,  and  is  often  attracted  by  the 
light  into  our  houses,  where  it  usually  is  an  innocent 
cause  of  much  alarm  among  the  frightened  inmates. 
The  stag-beetle,  however,  is  harmless;  though,  ir 
picked  up  and  handled  roughly,  it  may  resent  such 
treatment  by  a  sharp  pinch  from  its  powerful  jaws. 


FLIES  AND  BEETLES. 


119 


Figure  21. — Stag-horn  Beetle. 

The  Grave-diggers  are  remarkable  little  beetles, 
almost  sure  to  be  found  near  any  small  animal  carcass 
left  upon  the  ground.  They  usually  travel  in  pairs, 
and  seem  to  discover  the  existence  of  their  prey 
from  very  great  distances.  Several  roving  couples 
soon  congregate  about  the  body  of  a  mouse  or  a 
small  bird;  and  by  shoving  away  the  earth  around  and 
beneath  the  same,  soon  lower  it  below  the  surface. 
The  females  then  deposit  their  eggs  in  the  flesh — 
where  the  maggots  or  larvae  will  be  sure  of  finding 
abundant  food.  By  performing  such  offices  for  the 
unburied  dead,  they  not  alone  provide  suitable  places 
for  the  growth  of  their  offspring,  but,  in  addition, 
benefit  us  all  by  safely  removing  from  the  surface  of 


120  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

the  ground  decaying  and  offensive  matters,  and  also 
do  much  in  fertilizing  the  soil.  Thus  the  beetle, 
by  serving  itself  does  good  to  all. 


CHAPTER    XXIII. 

SPIDERS. 

„  jpROM  what  has  already  been  said  we  are  fairly 
k^S  acquainted  with  the  essential  characteris- 
¥^2>    tics  of  true  insects.     Now,  let  us  catch  and 

V5  examine  some  common  spider.  We  would 
better  select  for  our  study,  a  fairly  small  kind;  the 
bite  of  nearly  all  is  severe,  and  of  many,  poisonous. 
But  we  do  not  need  to  handle  the  specimen,  so  as  to 
be  bitten  at  all.  Our  spider  has  eight  legs — insects 
have  but  six;  its  body  is  naturally  divisible  into  two 
parts,  the  front  being  head  and  chest,  and  the  hind 
part  the  abdomen;  while,  in  insects,  three  divisions 
are  noticeable;  the  head,  chest,  and  abdomen  being 
each  distinct.  The  spiders  are  devoid  of  wings,  and 
do  not  pass  through  the  changes  of  life,  characteristic 
of  insects.  In  consequence  of  such  facts,  spiders  are 
usually  considered  apart  from  the  true  insects. 

Most  spiders  have,  connected  with  the  abdomen,  a 
reservoir  of  sticky  fluid,  which  hardens  in  the  air; 
and  from  this,  the  web  is  spun.  The  microscope 
shows  each  delicate  thread  of  the  spider's  web  to  be 
composed  of  four  thousand  smaller  ones;  and  each 
of  these  comes  from  a  separate  opening  in  the 
spider's  spinneret. 


SPIDERS.  121 

These  threads  are  so  fine,  that  Leowenhoeck, 
calculated  that  it  would  require  four  millions  of 
them  to  make  a  thread  as  large  as  a  human  hair. 
The  holes  in  the  spider's  body,  through  which  these 
threads  issue,  are  so  small  that,  according  to  Reamur, 
a  thousand  of  them  occupy  a  space  no  larger  than 
the  point  of  a  pin.  The  four  thousand  strands,  of 
which  each  thread  of  the  web  consists,  are  united  at 
some  little  distance  from  the  spinnerets,  so  that  each 
is  dry  before  it  is  joined  to  the  rest.  By  this  arrange- 
ment, greater  strength  is  secured;  for  it  is  a  well- 
known  fact,  that  a  rope  or  cable,  made  of  many 
fine  cords,  is  much  stronger  than  one  of  the  same 
size  consisting  of  a  single  cord. 

Many  spiders  construct  large  and  beautiful  webs, 
which  are  spread  out  in  various  forms  to  serve  as  nets 
for  the  capture  of  insects. 

Let  us  seek  a  freshly  made  web,  and  watch  the 
spider  as  it  captures  its  prey.  As  soon  as  a  fly  or 
other  insect  becomes  ensnared  in  the  meshes  of  the 
web,  the  spider  rushes  from  its  place  of  concealment 
near  the  centre  of  its  silken  net,  and  pounces  upon 
the  body  of  its  victim,  holding  it  firmly  by  means  of 
its  own  powerful  jaws;  or  if  the  captive  be  of  large 
size,  the  spider  spins  additional  cords  about  its  body, 
so  as  to  keep  it  as  secure  as  possible  during  its  death 
struggles,  and  avoid  all  unnecessary  injury  to  the 
web.  The  body  of  the  victim  is  sucked  dry  of  its 
juices  at  leisure,  and  the  dessicated  remains  are  dis- 
carded. 

Not  all   spiders   spin  webs  however;  some  called 


122  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

Mason  Spiders  make  for  themselves  nests  of  clay  in 
the  earth,  lining  the  cavity  with  a  stout  silky  tissue, 
and  fitting  to  the  opening  on  the  surface  of  the 
ground,  a  door  which  works  on  a  durable  hinge. 
When  hiding  within,  the  spider  keeps  the  door 
closed  against  intrusion  by  holding  firmly  to  the 
under  side;  and  when  the  ingenious  little  builder 
leaves  its  nest,  it  is  careful  to  close  the  opening  in 
as  perfect  a  manner  as  possible,  so  that  it  is  almost 
invisible.  These  interesting  little  creatures  are  not 
common  in  these  parts:  occasionally  specimens  are 
met  with  in  the  warm  south,  and  in  California. 

The  Tarantula  is  a  hairy  spider,  common  in  all 
parts  of  our  Territory,  sometimes  attaining  a  spread 
of  feet  of  over  three  inches,  and  capable  of  inflicting 
a  dangerous  bite.  Several  enormous  spiders  abound 
in  the  tropical  regions,  characterized  by  powers  of 
quick  movement  and  surprising  strength.  They 
capture  and  kill  the  largest  insects,  and  even  small 
lizards  and  birds. 


CHAPTER  XXIV. 

WORMS   AND   SNAILS. 

SJSi^ORMS  and  snails!     Not  a  very  elegant  title 

JSsStaia   for  a  chapter,   you  say!     Well,  no;  but  an 

H©^    interesting  and  instructive  subject  neverthe- 

G§S      less.      Let   us   capture   an   ordinary   Earth 

Worm  or  Angle  Worm;  we  can  find  them  in  numbers 


WORMS  AND  SNAILS.  123 

thrown  up  by  the  spade  or  plow  in  rich  soil.  Its 
body  seems  to  consist  of  a  number  of  rings  or 
segments,  each  of  which  is  provided  on  the  under 
surface  with  several  little  bristles  or  short  hairs, 
tolerably  stout,  and  all  directed  backward.  By 
rubbing  a  worm  lightly  between  the  fingers,  from 
head  to  tail,  the  body  seems  perfectly  smooth,  but 
on  attempting  to  stroke  the  animal  in  an  opposite 
direction  the  bristles  can  be  distinctly  felt.  By  the 
aid  of  these  little  appendages  the  worm  holds  itself 
steady  while  boring  its  way  through  the  soil, 
and  resists  any  effort  made  to  draw  it  forcibly 
from  its  burrow.  Earth  worms  prove  of  very  great 
benefit  to  the  farmer  by  boring  and  loosening  the 
ground  below  the  reach  of  the  plow.  They  eat  by 
swallowing  large  quantities  of  soil,  and  after  the 
vegetable  matter  has  been  extracted  within  their 
bodies,  the  rest  is  rejected  in  the  form  of  worm-casts, 
which  are  composed  of  the  richest  and  most  produc- 
tive mould.  In  some  parts,  especially  in  moist 
climates,  these  little  creatures  are  found  in  very 
great  numbers,  and  the  labor  that  they  accomplish 
in  rejuvenating  the  soil  is  surprising.  These  common 
worms  upon  which  we  are  inclined  to  bestow  hardly 
a  single  serious  thought,  will  often  convert  a  barren 
patch  into  a  most  productive  field. 

We  may  often  observe  a  number  of  dark  colored 
worms  crawling  on  the  bottoms  of  our  ditches 
and  ponds,  especially  in  low  marshy  places.  These 
are  called  Leeches;  but  the  boys  have  given  them  the 
title  of  blood-suckers,  and  with  very  good  reason  too, 


124  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

as  we  shall  see.  Let  us  pick  one  of  them  from  the 
water  and  look  at  it  closely.  We  see  on  each  end  of 
the  body  a  flat  disc  by  means  of  which  it  can  fasten 
itself  firmly  to  any  solid  object,  such  as  an  animal's 
body.  In  its  mouth  we  observe  three  sharp  teeth; 
which  very  readily  bore  through  the  skin  of  its 
victims.  The  most  active  leeches  are  met  with  in 
the  running  streams  of  southern  Europe,  and  one 
common  variety  is  called  the  medicinal  leech  from 
having  been  once  so  extensively  used  by  the  surgeon 
in  drawing  blood  from  the  body  of  his  patient,  for 
the  purpose  of  allaying  fever  or  local  inflammation. 
When  applied  to  the  affected  part,  the  leech  soon 
perforates  the  skin  with  its  lance-like  teeth  and  draws 
the  blood  with  vigor.* 

But  there  are  worms  much  smaller  than  these. 
The  little  Hair-worm,  or  as  we  erroneously  name  it 
the  hair-snake,  is  a  common  inhabitant  of  our 
ditches.  Ordinarily  it  grows  from  four  to  six  inches 
long,  and  in  thickness  about  equal  to  a  hair.  The 
notion  has  gained  a  foundation  in  the  minds  of  many 
that  this  little  creature  is  a  transformed  horse-hair. 
The  author  has  talked  with  many  people  who  feel 
absolutely  certain  that  such  an  unnatural  change  as 
the  resurrection  of  a  lifeless  hair  into  a  living  worm 

*  This  professional  use  of  leeches  is  now  very  greatly 
restricted;  but  a  few  years  ago  they  were  as  common  as 
the  lance  is  at  present  in  medical  practice.  In  1846  it  is 
said  that  between  twenty  and  thirty  millions  were  used 
in  France,  and  in  1863  there  were  used  in  London  alone 
over  seven  millions,  and  in  the  hospitals  of  Paris  from  five 
to  six  millions. 


WORMS  AND  SNAILS.  125 

is  a  matter  of  every  day  occurrence.  A  careless 
experiment  is  always  likely  to  suggest  erroneous 
conclusions.  If  you  throw  a  handful  of  horse-hair 
into  a  pool  of  standing  water,  very  likely  in  a  few 
days  several  hair-worms  will  be  found  wriggling 
among  the  hairs,  but  the  little  wrigglers  have  probably 
come  there  from  other  portions  of  the  pool.  Such  is 
an  improper  way  to  make  a  trial.  Now,  count 
several  hairs,  place  them  in  water  in  a  safe  place, 
then  if  you  are  lucky  enough  to  find  a  hair-worm 
among  them,  count  again;  and  all  the  hairs  will  be 
there.  No  such  transformation  can  be  effected;  a 
hair  is  a  hair  and  a  worm  is  a  worm,  and  nothing 
short  of  a  Creator's  power  can  form  one  from  the 
elements  [of  the  other.  The  hair-worm  during  its 
early  life  is  a  parasite  in  the  intestines  of  many 
insects  and  small  aquatic  animals.  Lying  coiled  up 
within  the  body  of  its  host  it  attains  a  great  length; 
but  at  maturity  it  escapes  and  deposits  its  eggs  in 
the  water. 

There  are  many  parasitic  worms,  that  is  to  say 
worms  that  live  in  the  bodies  of  other  animals.  One 
of  these  called  the  Trichina  is  found  in  diseased 
flesh,  especially  that  of  hogs. 

Figure  22  shows  the  appearance  of  a  piece  of  in- 
fected pork,  as  seen  under  the  microscope,  highly 
magnified;  1  shows  the  worms  migrating  in  the 
fibres  of  the  muscles;  2  represents  a  single  worm 
encysted  in  the  flesh,  and  3  is  a  picture  of  a  worm 
very  much  enlarged. 

The  trichinae  usually  lie  coiled  within  a  little  cell, 


126 


FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 


in  the  muscles  of  the  animal.    If  such  meat  be  eaten, 
these  dreaded  parasites  live  and  multiply  within  the 


m* 


1.1 1  J . 

Fig.  22. — Trichina  in  flesh  of  Swine, 
body,  and  terrible  disease,  or  even  death  frequently 
follows.  * 

SNAILS-  AND    THEIR   KINDRED. 

Now  let  us  catch  a  common  snail,  and  see  what  it 
has  to  tell  us.  The  most  striking  peculiarity  is  its 
colored  shell,  in  which  the  soft  body  is  enclosed. 
This  snail  is  a  member  of  a  very  large  family  of 
animals,  called  Mollusks,  from  a  word,  meaning 
"soft."  It  can  withdraw  its  body  completely  within 
the  shell  when  alarmed,  and  even  close  the  entrance, 

*  Only  meat  from  clean  and  healthy  animals  should  be 
eaten;  swine's  flesh,  never:  and  all  meat  should  be  thor- 
oughly cooked,  so  as  to  kill  the  parasites  if  they  are 
present.  Living  worms  are  not  good  for  food.  Meat  need 
not  be  burned  or  scorched,  but  it  should  be  cooked 
through.  Meat  "done  rare,"  may  be  a  favorite  article  of 
diet  with  some,  but  it  is  always  liable  to  contain  living 
germs  of  troublesome  parasites. 


SNAILS  AND  THEIR  KINDRED.  127 

by  means  of  a  horny  plate  or  disc.  When  extended, 
however,  the  head  and  main  part  of  the  body  are 
outside  the  shell;  and  a  couple  of  little  pillars  are 
seen  affixed  to  the  head,  on  the  top  of  which  the 
eyes  are  placed.  Kather  strange,  isn't  it,  that  the 
little  creature  should  carry  its  eyes  on  a  couple  of 
poles,  so  that  it  can  see  farther? 

Some  mollusks  live  on  land  in  damp  parts,  but  by 
far  the  greater  number  inhabit  the  water,  either 
fresh  or  salt.  The  beautiful  sea  shells  with  such  an 
infinite  variety  of  color  and  form,  and  an  indescribable 
lustre  are  examples  of  the  houses  in  which  these 
humble  creatures  dwell.  The  highly- prized  "mother 
of  pearl"  is  obtained  from  the  shells  of  such  mollusks; 
and  the  beautiful  pearls  so  much  used  in  jewelry 
are  derived  from  a  species  of  oyster. 

Returning  to  our  snail  once  more,  we  seethat  its 
shell  consists  really  of  one  continuous  piece;  the 
snail  and  all  such  mollusks  are  called  univalves  in 
consequence,  while  the  oyster,  clam  and  the  like,  the 
shells  of  which  consist  of  two  parts,  are  called 
bivalves. 

Some  mollusks  are  destitute  of  any  shell,  such  is 
the  case  for  instance  with  the  common  garden  slug, 
a  thick  fleshy  mollusk,  usually  covered  with  slime 
and  looking  much  like  a  snail  that  has  escaped  from 
its  shell.  On  the  head  are  four  little  pillars,  the 
longer  pair  bearing  the  eyes.  The  head  can  be  drawn 
in  somewhat  as  the  finger  of  a  glove  is  inverted. 


128 


FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 


CHAPTER   XXV. 


SOME   TINY   CREATURES. 


RESIDE  the  many  forms  of  animal  life  at  which 

J5   we  have  already  glanced,  there  are  countless 

^g)c    others  too  small  to  be  perceived  by  the  un- 

^>    aided  vision.     A  drop  of  stagnant  water  by  the 

magic  power  of  the  microscope  is  seen  to  be  literally 

a  world  of  wonders:  it  is  densely  inhabited  by  crea- 


Fig.  23. — Chalk  from  Gravesend. 

tures,    whose   smallness    alone    would    make    them 
remarkable,  and  yet  as  wonderfully  formed  and  as 


SOME   TINY   CREATURES.  129 

admirably  fitted  for  their  prescribed  course  of  life,  as 
is  the  kingly  lion  or  the  eagle  in  its  sphere. 

Figure  23  is  a  picture  made  from  a  drawing  by 
the  celebrated  microscopist,  Ehrenberg,  of  a  bit  of 
chalk  dust  seen  under  the  microscope.  Chalk  then 
is  seen  to  be  made  up  of  the  shells  and  calcareous 
skeletons  of  these  minute  animals. 

Who  of  us  has  an  imagination  sufficiently  strong 
to  picture  the  myriads  of  separate  shells  in  a  moun- 
tain of  chalk?  Much  of  the  beautiful  marble  and 
the  solid  limestone  of  our  hills  consisted  once  of 
such  hard  shells  and  the  stony  skeletons  of  similar 
minute  animals. 

Many  of  these  smallest 
f forms  are  so  simple  in 
structure  that  they  seem 
to  consist  only  of  a  little 
fleshy     sac,    filled     with 

Fig.  24.-The  Amoeba.  flu  ' 
Two  pictures  are  given  m  figure  24  of  a  form  fre- 
quently found  in  the  water  of  our  ponds  and  streams, 
invisible  to  the  unaided  eye,  and  looking,  when  mag- 
nified, like  a  very  small  patch  of  jelly,  with  no  regu- 
lar shape.  It  is  called  the  Amoeba;  and  though  so 
simple,  it  lives  and  moves  in  its  allotted  way  with 
perfect  order.  Some  people  have  argued  that  from 
such  minute  and  simple  structures  as  this  one,  all 
the  higher  animals  have  been  developed  in  course  of 
time  through  a  process  of  growth  or  evolution.  Such 
an  idea  is  without  the  least  foundation  in  fact  or 

observation;  no  man  has  yet  succeeded  in  producing 
io 


130  FIRST  BOOK  OFLNATURE. 

from  the  amoeba  any  other  kind  of  animal  than  itself. 
Each  animal  produces  others  of  its  own  kind,  and  its 
own  kind  only.  This  seems  to  be  a  law  of  creation. 
An  animal  may  grow  and  develop  till  it  becomes 
perfect  in  its  own  sphere ;  but  one  cannot  transform 
itself  into  others.  The  Creator  has  placed  upon  His 
earth  a  vast  variety  of  living  forms,  small  and  large, 
simple  and  complicated,  some  to  live  in  the  air, 
others  in  the  water,  and  still  others  on  the  ground, 
yet  each  with  a  special  purpose  to  meet,  and  a  par- 
ticular place  to  fill  in  the  great  household  of  Nature; 
and  every  one  is  contented  to  live  and  to  move  within 
the  sphere  for  which  its  Maker  intended  it. 


Part    II. 

The   Vegetable  or  Riant  Kingdom, 


"Consider  the  lilies  of  the  field,  how  they  grow;  they 
toil  not,  neither  do  they  spin,  and  yet,  I  say  unto  you  that 
even  Solomon  in  all  his  glory  was  not  arrayed  like  one  of 
these."— Matthew  vi,  28,  29. 


CHAPTER   XXVI. 

PLANTS,    AND    HOW   THEY   GROW. 

gtftN  THIS  great  kingdom  of  Nature,  we  may  find 
^JJ    a   variety    and   diversity   even    greater    than 

fthat  already  seen  to  exist  among  animals. 
Like  animals,  plants  also  live;  they  need  food 
and  drink,  which  they  absorb  through  their  roots,  and 
they  breathe  through  their  leaves.  Their  nourish- 
ment is  derived  from  the  soil,  water  and  air;  and  in 
turn  they  furnish  food  for  animals.  It  appears  to 
be  a  universal  law  that  plants  should  form  the  food 
of  animals.  Carnivorous  or  flesh-eating  animals 
feed  upon  the  bodies  of  other  animals,  which  in 
their  turn  lived  upon  plants;  and  thus  even  they 
are  indirectly  sustained  by  the  great  vegetable  king- 
dom.    The  food  of  all  animals  is  produced  by  plants. 


132  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATUFE. 

As  a  consequence  of  this  alone  the  study  of  plants 
should  be  of  interest  to  us.  Surely  Solomon  was 
wise  in  his  declaration:  "The  profit  of  the  earth  is 
for  all:  the  king  himself  is  served  by  the  field." 

Plants  exist  under  most  extreme  circumstances  in 
different  parts  of  the  globe.  Wherever  man  has  gone 
on  the  surface  of  the  earth,  he  has  found  vegetation 
of  some  kind,  even  far  beyond  the  limits  of  animal 

life. 

Among  natural  objects,  there  are  none  others  that 
do  so  much  as  plants  to  change  and  diversify  the 
general  aspect  of  the  landscape.  Without  flowers 
and  trees  this  would  be  to  most  of  us  a  dreary  world 
indeed.  But  these  fixed  residents  of  the  soil  do 
more  for  man  than  merely  ministering  to  his  sense  of 
beauty,  they  offer  him  shade  and  shelter  from  the 
heat  of  summer,  and  bring  him  sweet  perfumes,  and 
untold  treasures  for  food  and  useful  service.  From 
plants  come  the  almost  endless  variety  of  fruits, 
which  furnish  us  with  so  many  of  the  necessaries  and 
luxuries  of  diet:  sugar  and  spices,  the  frankincense 
and  the  myrrh;  tonic  herbs  and  wholesome  medicines, 
resins  and  waxes;  starch  and  oil,  cotton,  linen  and 
paper,  gums,  rubber,  cork  and  dyes,  beside  the  many 
varieties  of  truly  beautiful  woods,  for  his  buildings, 
furniture  and  fuel — woods,  hard  and  soft,  coarse  and 
fine — 0f  almost  every  conceivable  shade  and  condition, 
and  of  universal  adaptability  to  the  needs  of  man. 

Let  us  change  our  attention  from  the  general 
aspect  of  vegetation  to  the  more  intimate  examina- 
tion of  a  single  plant.     We  may  select  a  young  fruit 


PLANTS,  AND  HOW   THEY   GROW.  133 

tree,  for  example.  We  perceive  that  it  consists  of 
three  distinct  and  separate  parts.  There  is  the  root, 
deeply  inserted  in  the  soil,  and  firmly  holding  the 
growing  tree  in  position;  next,  the  stem  rising  above 
the  ground  and  oftentimes  to  a  great  height,  and  bear- 
ing branches  from  which  grow  the  leaves.  It  is  through 
these  organs,  root,  stem  and  leaves,  that  the  ordinary 
processes  of  vegetation  are  performed,  and  hence 
they  are  frequently  termed  the  vegetative  organs  of 
the  plant:  contrasting  with  the  reproductive  organs, 
which  comprise  the  flower,  fruit  and  seed. 

THE     ROOT. 

The  roots  of  all  plants  show  a  natural  tendency 
to  grow  downward.  They  are  usually  colorless, 
though  occasionally  of  a  reddish  or  brown  tint,  but 
never  green.  Suppose  we  now  continue  our  exam- 
ination of  the  young  fruit  tree  already  selected,  by 
digging  around  it  and  removing  the  soil  from  its 
roots.  Without  doubt,  we  will  find  the  main  roots 
divided  into  many  branches,  as  we  follow  them  in 
their  winding  courses  through  the  ground,  and  these 
branches  again  divide,  to  form  still  smaller  ones,  and 
so  on,  till  the  final  divisions  are  so  small,  that  they 
are  to  be  seen  only  by  means  of  the  microscope. 
The  ordinary  branches  of  the  root  are  called  rootlets, 
and  the  finest  divisions  are  termed  root-hairs. 

Of  what  use  are  these  hair-like  outgrowths?  To 
obtain  an  answer  to  this  question  let  us  transfer  our 
attention  from  the  young  fruit  tree  already  examined 
to  some  smaller  plant;  an  ordinary  "weed"  will  do. 
If  we  pull  it  from  the  ground  carefully,  but  little  or 


134  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

no  injury  will  befall  the  roots;  a  gentle  shake  will 
remove  the  bulk  of  soil  which  clung  to  the  roots  as  we 
pulled  the  plant  and  the  general  form  and  structure 
of  the  underground  parts  will  be  easy  to  follow.  There 
is  the  main  root,  connecting  with  the  stem  at  the 
surface  of  the  ground,  and  giving  rise  to  numerous 
rootlets.  A  careful  scrutiny  of  the  rootlets  by  the 
help  of  a  pocket  glass  will  show  the  root -hairs  in 
great  numbers;  and  it  is  these  little  structures  that 
entangle  and  hold  the  soil  so  firmly.  The  roots 
striking  into  the  soil  and  branching  in  so  many 
different  directions  give  the  plant  a  firm  support  in 
the  earth,  insuring  it  against  the  danger  of  being 
torn  from  its  established  home  by  any  ordinary 
force.  And  it  may  be  noticed  that  the  plants  hav- 
ing the  longest  main  roots  and  the  greatest  number 
of  branches  are  the  firmest  in  position.  Try  to  pull 
from  the  ground  a  thriving  lucern  or  clover  plant, 
and  see  if  you  have  cause  to  doubt  the  statement. 

We  may  illustrate  in  a  very  pretty  and  instructive 
way  the  growth  of  roots,  and  at  the  same  time  observe 
the  germination  or  sprouting  of  seeds,  by  performing 
the  following  simple  experiment:  Take  a  piece  of 
muslin, — cheese  cloth  will  be  best,  but  a  double 
thickness  of  mosquito  netting  will  answer;  tie  it  over 
the  top  of  an  ordinary  tumbler,  and  fill  the  glass 
with  water.  Press  the  muslin  or  netting  lower  in  the 
middle,  so  that  it  is  kept  moist,  but  not  flooded; 
then  sprinkle  over  it  a  pinch  of  seed  of  any  small 
garden  vegetable — the  common  garden  cress  seed 
will  answer  admirably.     Set  the  glass  aside  for  a  day 


PLANT  ROOTS.  135 

or  two,  carefully  supplying  more  water  to  replace 
that  lost  by  evaporation,  so  as  to  keep  the  seeds  con- 
stantly damp.  In  a  few  days  the  seeds  begin  to 
sprout;  each  sends  a  tiny  white  root  between  the 
fibres  of  the  netting  into  the  water  below  and  at  the 
same  time  small  leaves  appear  above.  It  would  be 
well  to  set  the  glass  near  a  window,  so  that  it  may 
have  plenty  of  light;  and  if  it  be  put  in  direct  sun- 
light for  a  short  time  each  day,  it  will  be  all  the 
better,  provided  that  the  roots  be  kept  below  the 
water.  The  roots  will  spread  within  the  glass  till 
they  appear  to  fill  it,  and  a  luxuriant  crop  of  cress 
flourishes  above.  The  writer  frequently  keeps  several 
vessels  of  cress  growing  in  this  manner  during  the 
winter,  and  raises  enough  of  this  pungent  salad  for 
table  use.  And  farther,  a  glass  holding  a  growing 
crop  of  cress  is  no  less  ornamental  than  useful,  and 
it  is  certainly  as  instructive  as  could  be  wished. 


CHAPTER   XXVII. 

PLANT    ROOTS. 

|ITH  a  powerful  magnifying  glass  the  tiny  root 
hairs,  already  spoken  of,  appear  to  be  perfect 

W  tubes,  through  which  the  moisture  of  the 
soil  is  absorbed  and  conveyed  to  the  main 
parts  of  the  plant.  In  this  interesting  way  the  plant 
derives  its  food  and  drink — by  absorbing  the  same 
through  the  tubular  hairs  covering  the  rootlets, 
thence  passing  it  to  the  larger  branches,  and  finally 


136  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

through  the  main  root,  and  the  vessels  of  the  stem 
to  the  most  distant  twigs. 

We  are  usually  not  aware  of  the  great  force  exhib- 
ited by  the  plant  in  absorbing  water  from  the  ground 
and  distributing  the  same  throughout  its  structure. 
Follow  this  simple  experiment,  first  performed  by 
Dr.  Hales  over  a  hundred  and  fifty  years  ago,  and 
since  that  time  repeated  by  many  others.  The 
stem  of  a  young  grape  vine  in  vigorous  growth  was 
cut  off  a  few  inches  above  the  surface  of  the  ground 
and  a  small  pressure  guage,  similar  to  the  kind  used 
on  steam-boilers  and  the  like,  was  attached.  The 
moisture  absorbed  by  the  roots  and  passed  upward 
through  the  stem,  escaped  where  the  stem  was  cut, 
and  exerted  its  force  on  the  liquid  within  the  pres- 
sure guage;  the  pressure  thus  produced  was  sufficient 
to  force  water  to  a  height  of  over  thirty- six  feet  in 
the  long  arm  of  the  guage  tube. 

Since  all  the  material  upon  which  plants  feed  has 
to  be  absorbed  in  this  way,  it  follows  of  necessity 
that  all  such  food  must  be  in  a  state  of  solution,  or 
the  plant  cannot  absorb  and  use  it.  The  soil  may 
be  rich  in  all  the  solid  matters  needed  by  the  plant; 
but  such  cannot  be  absorbed  unless  water  be  supplied. 
The  rain  falling  upon  the  soil,  as  well  as  the  irrigat- 
ing stream  flowing  over  the  surface,  soaks  into  the 
ground,  and  in  so  doing  dissolves  all  that  is  soluble; 
and  when  this  water  passes  through  the  root  hairs 
into  the  plant,  it  carries  with  it  the  materials  in 
solution.  During  the  growing  season,  when  plants 
require  the   largest  amounts  of  food   material,  the 


PLANT  ROOTS.  137 

roots  are  most  active  absorbents;  but  as  soon  as  the 
leaves  fall  and  the  plant  prepares  for  its  winter  sleep, 
the  roots  rest  from  their  labors,  most  of  the  tiny 
root-hairs  shrivel  and  die,  the  soft  parts  become  hard, 
and  the  whole  activity  of  the  plant  is  suspended  till 
awakened  once  more  to  growth  by  the  return  of 
spring  warmth  and  moisture.  During  this  period  of 
rest,  the  plant  may  be  removed  from  the  soil  and  reset, 
with  less  danger  of  injury,  as  there  are  fewer  active 
rootlets  to  be  broken  and  checked  in  their  work. 

The  quantity  of  roots  attached  to  an  ordinary 
plant  is  far  greater  than  is  ordinarily  supposed.  By 
digging  away  the  soil  some  distance  from  plants 
selected  for  examination,  and  then  washing  the  rest 
till  the  roots  are  laid  bare  and  clean,  the  roots  of 
beans,  peas  and  rye  have  been  found  to  form  a 
tangled  mat  beneath  the  ground  to  a  depth  of  about 
four  feet  from  the  surface.  Roots  of  winter  wheat 
have  been  found  seven  feet  in  the  soil  in  less  than 
seven  weeks  from  the  time  of  sowing. 

Complete  measurements  of  the  roots  of  several 
plants  with  all  their  branches  have  been  made  for 
the  purpose  of  determining  the  total  extent  of  root 
material.  A  barley  plant  was  found  in  this  way  to 
possess  one  hundred  and  twenty-eight  feet  of  roots. 
Remembering  that  the  small  rootlets  are  thickly 
covered  with  root  hairs  as  before  described,  the  ab- 
sorbing surface  of  the  plant  is  seen  at  once  to  be  very 
great.  And  this  explains  also  why  the  plants  that 
send  their  roots  deepest  into  the  soil  are  able  to 
endure  the  vicissitudes  of  dry  weather  with  fewest  ill 


138  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

consequences, — the  deep  branches  of  their  roots 
reach  the  moist  subsoil  below,  though  the  ground 
near  the  surface  may  be  parched  and  dry. 

Through  the  uncounted  multitudes  of  root  hairs 
with  their  eager  thirst  for  moisture,  the  plant  is  fed. 
These  are  its  mouths,  and  their  capacity  is  great. 
In  this  perfect  manner  has  the  Creator  provided  for 
the  welfare  of  the  herb  and  tree;  they  too  are  sub- 
jects of  His  care.  He  made  them,  and  in  their 
welfare  -He  takes  delight. 

Another  great  use  served  by  the  roots  of  plants, 
is  that  of  preserving  and  storing  for  future  use  the 
materials  taken  from  the  soil.  This  is  especially 
true  of  plants  that  require  two  seasons  of  growth  in 
which  to  fully  develop  and  produce  their  flowers  and 
seed;  such  as  the  carrot,  turnip,  beet  and  parsnip. 
The  roots  of  these  plants  are  extremely  large  as 
compared  with  the  other  parts  and  very  fleshy  at 
the  end  of  the  first  year's  growth.  If,  however,  we 
carefully  watch  such  a  root  during  the  second  season, 
while  the  plant  is  blossoming  and  maturing  its  seeds, 
we  will  doubtless  see  that  the  root  withers  and 
shrinks  as  if  being  gradually  exhausted  of  its  store. 

By  removing  these  roots  from  the  soil  at  the  close 
of  the  first  season,  the  farmer  secures  the  rich  sup- 
plies of  food  material  for  the  support  of  himself  and 
his  animals;  but  if  left  to  follow  its  natural  course  of 
life  uninterruptedly,  the  plant  employs  that  food  to 
nourish  its  flowers  and  fruit.  All  plants  that  re- 
quire two  growing  seasons  in  which  to  perfect  their 
growth    are   called    biennial  plants;    such    are    the 


PLANT  ROOTS.  139 

carrot,  beet,  parsnip  and  turnip  already  named,  and 
to  this  list  the  cabbage  may  be  added.  Distin- 
guished from  all  such  are  the  annual  plants,  which 
ripen  their  seed  during  the  first  year,  and  then  die 
roots  and  all,  re-appearing  only  through  the  growth 
of  the  seed.  Such  is  the  nature  of  wheat  and  barley, 
and  in  fact  all  our  grains,  beans  and  peas  and  all 
crops  that  need  to  be  re-sown  each  year.  Other 
plants  are  said  to  be  perennial  in  nature;  they  live 
several  years  before  they  bear  flowers  and  seed,  and 
after  that  continue  to  bear  for  a  great  many  seasons 
in  succession  or  at  intervals.  This  we  know  to  be 
the  nature  of  ordinary  trees  and  shrubs,  such  as  the 
apple,  peach,  oak  and  the  rest.  In  all  of  this  class 
the  leaves,  flowers  and  root-hairs  die  with  the  sum- 
mer; but  the  roots  and  stem  retain  their  vitality,  and 
annually  renew  the  beauties  of  flower  and  richness 
of  fruit  with  the  return  of  the  sun  in  its  power. 

These  fleshy  roots,  forming,  as  we  have  seen,  rich 
stores  of  plant  food  appear  in  a  number  of  shapes. 
They  may  be  conical  as  is  the  case  with  the  carrot 
and  parnsip,  or  more  globular  like  the  turnip,  or 
spindle-shaped — that  is  long  and  tapering,  and  thick- 
est near  the  middle  as  are  beets  and  long  radishes. 

We  are  apt  to  speak  of  some  underground  growths 
as  roots  whereas  in  reality  they  are  not  roots  at  all. 
A  potato  for  instance,  though  growing  beneath  the 
surface,  is  a  thickened  part  of  the  stem.  True  roots 
never  produce  buds;  whereas  a  single  potato  tuber 
often  shows  many  buds;  these  are  the  "eyes"  seen 
upon  its  surface  from   which  branches  will  rise  and 


140  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

true  roots  will  sprout  if  it  be  planted.  The  onion 
is  another  example  of  a  plant  stem  being  called 
a  root,  because  of  it  happening  to  grow  under 
ground.  The  large  onion  bulb  is  in  reality  but 
a  swollen  part  of  the  stem,  the  true  roots,  being 
seen  at  the  lower  extremity  in  the  form  of  a  tuft. 
Underground  stems  of  the  rose-bush,  raspberry  and 
other  shrubs  greatly  resemble  roots  in  outward 
appearance;  but  their  true  nature  may  be  unmistak- 
ably recognized  by  the  buds  upon  their  surfaces. 
From  these  buds,  branches  are  sent  upward,  each  of 
which  may  grow  into  a  perfect  stem,  bearing  branches 
smaller  than  itself  and  these  support  leaves,  flowers 
and  fruit.  After  having  reached  a  fair  size  these 
underground  branches  may  be  safely  cut  off  from  the 
parent  stem;  the  severed  parts  strike  root  for  them- 
selves and  become  independent  plants.  Gardners 
frequently  increase  their  stock  of  such  plants  in  this 
way;  the  process  is  called  "multiplying  by  the  root" 
— really  an  incorrect  term,  because,  as  we  have 
already  seen,  the  growth  is  from  stems  below  ground 
and  not  from  roots  at  all. 


CHAPTER    XXVIII. 

PLANT    STEMS. 

^AKE  a  sharp  knife  and  cut  straight  across,  a 

&JM   small  branch  or  stem  of  a  currant  shrub,  or 

^W     other  small,  woody  plant;  and  now,  look  care- 

X       at  the  cut  surface.     Several  distinct  parts  are 

clearly  seen;   there  is  a  rather  dark-colored   bark  or 


fa 


PLANT  STEMS.  141 

skin  on  the  outside;  a  light  and  hard  part  inside  the 
bark,  which  we  call  the  wood,  and  a  very  soft,  central 
core,  or  pith.  Jf  such  a  stem  be  more  closely  looked 
at,  by  the  assistance  of  a  microscope,  a  truly 
beautiful  arrangement  of  parts,  of  complicated 
structure,  is  at  once  apparent.  The  woody  part  of 
the  stem,  for  instance,  looks  like  a  bundle  of  vessels 
or  tubes,  which,  during  the  growing  season,  are  filled 
with  the  sap  of  the  plant,  as  it  flows  from  the  roots 
to  the  farthest  branches  and  twigs.  Not  all  of  these 
tubes,  however,  are  of  exactly  the  same  shape  and 
size;  some  appear  plain  and  others  beautifully  marked 
and  ornamented  with  rings  and  spiral  lines,  and 
orderly-arranged  dots;  all  such  markings  seeming  to 
be  really  thickenings  on  the  walls  of  the  tubes,  im- 
parting thereto  strength  and  stability. 

Thus,  even  in  the  structure  of  these  smallest  of 
small  things,  a  principle  of  order  and  system,  has 
been  followed.  Not  an  ornamental  dot  is  found, 
without  a  purpose  and  a  use. 

The  outside  covering  of  the  stem,  if  hard  and 
coarse,  we  are  apt  to  call  bark,  but  if  softer  and 
finer  in  structure,  we  speak  of  it  as  the  rind. 
To  this  bark  or  rind  also  there  are  an  outer  and  an 
inner  portion;  the  outer  being  in  most  cases  hard, 
and  in  some  scaly  and  apparently  lifeless,  while  the 
inner  part  is  of  a  fine  fibrous  nature.  The  bark  of 
the  birch  tree  is  so  fine  and  smooth  that  it  is  useful 
for  wrapping  and  even  for  writing  purposes  in  place  of 
paper.  People  who  visit  the  great  birch  forests  of 
the  Northern  and  Eastern  States,  frequently  strip  off 


142  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

the  smooth  bark  by  the  aid  of  their  pocket  knives,  and 
use  the  same  in  writing  letters  to  their  distant  friends. 
In  former  days,  before  paper  was  known,  it  was  cus- 
tomary to  write  all  kinds  of  books  and  records  on  the 
smooth  inner  bark  of  trees.  In  fact  the  Latin  name 
for  book,  liber,  is  the  name  given  by  botanists  to  the 
inside  layer  of  the  bark  of  trees.  The  bark  fibres  of 
some  plants  are  of  great  use  to  us  in  the  manufac- 
ture of  ropes  and  cordage.  The  well  known  linden 
tree  derives  its  peculiar  name  from  the  fact  of  its 
bark  being  so  valuable  in  making  lines  or  ropes. 

Let  us  now  examine,  attentively,  the  end  of  a  large 
tree  or  log  that  has  been  sawn  squarely  off.  Here 
we  notice  that  the  hard  part  of  the  stem  or  wood 
proper,  is  marked  by  a  series  of  rings,  all  of  different 
sizes,  arranged  concentrically ,  that  is  around  the  same 
centre,  the  smallest,  of  course,  being  inside.  These 
concentric  rings  indicate  the  different  periods  of 
growth  through  which  the  tree  has  passed.  Some 
people  believe  that  each  ring  indicates  one  year  of 
the  plant's  development,  and  that  the  number  of 
the  rings  expresses  the  age  of  the  plant  in  years. 
This  is  not  strictly  true.  In  tropical  lands,  where 
there  is  no  clear  division  of  the  seasons,  no  summer 
during  which  plants  grow,  and,  no  winter  during 
which  they  rest,  rings  in  the  stems  of  plants,  are  still 
to  be  seen;  and  in  our  own  parts,  several  rings  are 
frequently  produced  during  a  single  year. 

The  soft,  new  wood  found  just  below  the  bark  is 
called  sap  wood;  this  is  comparatively  useless  as  tim- 
ber, and  the  lumber  cutters  strip  it  off  from  the 


PLANT  STEMS. 


143 


trunks  of  their  trees  and  discard  it.  The  hard,  solid 
wood  within — that  which  we  usually  call  wood,  is 
much  harder  and  more  solid;  it  is  called  heart  wood. 
This  is  the  part  of  the  tree  so  useful  to  the  carpenter 
and  the  builder,  and  occurs  in  a  great  many  different 
forms.  In  some  plants  it  is  white  and  soft,  as  in  the 
pine,  grayish  in  the  locust,  dark  brown  and  very 
dense  in  the  walnut  tree,  hard  and  dark-colored  in 
mahogany,  black  and  almost  of  stony  hardness  in  the 
tropical  ebony. 

In  all  of  these  woody  plants,  the  stem  increases  in 
thickness  through  forming  layers  of  new  wood  be- 
tween the  bark  and  the  old  wood,  the  sap  wood 
being  the  newest  and  youngest  part  of  the  stem. 
Such  a  method  of  growth  must  appear  to  us  to  be 
the  most  natural;  it  is  almost  impossible  to  imagine 
very  extensive  growth  and  increase  in  size  occurring 
in  the  solid  heart  wood.     Plants  that  grow  in  this 

way  are  called  Exo- 
genous Plants  or 
outside  growers. 
The  arrangement 
of  parts  in  such 
plants  is  shown  in 
Fig.  25.— Structure  of  an  Exogenous  figure  25;  the  layers 
Stem,  of  inner  and  outer 

bark,  of  wood  and  of  pith  are  clearly  illustrated. 

For  comparison,  let  us  now  look  at  a  stem  of  maize 
or  sorghum  cane,  or  one  of  the  many  kinds  of  rushes 
to  be  found  so  abundantly  in  marshy  places.  Here 
we  find  no  such  arrangement  of  parts  as  we  discovered 


144 


FIRST   BOOK   OF  NATURE. 


while  examining  the  woody  stem.  Take  a  sharp 
knife  and  cut  off  the  stem  of  one  of  these  plants;  it 
will  be  seen  to  consist  mostly  of  a  porous,  spongy 
material  inside  a  hard  rind.  There  is  no  distinction 
of  parts  into  sap-wood  and  heart-wood;  such  plants 
seem  to  increase  in  size  uniformly  throughout  the 
whole  stem,  and  hence  are  called  Endogenous  Plants 

or  inside  growers.  Figure  26 
represents  such  a  stem;  the 
outer  rind  and  the  porous  con- 
tents are  clearly  shown;  the 
dark  dots  seen  in  the  cross  sec- 
tion and  appearing  as  dark- 
colored  streaks  are  the  hard  or 
woody  parts  of  the  stem. 

Nearly  all  the  endogenous 
plants  of  these  regions  are  small 
when  compared  with  the  larger 
trees  of  the  exogenous  class,  but 
in  warmer  climates  many  of  the 
largest  trees  belong  to  the  end- 
ogenous kind.  Such  for  in- 
stance are  the  palmetto  trees  of 

Fig.  26.-Structure  of    the    Soutliem    States    and    the 
an  Endogenous  Stem,    larger  palms  of  the  torrid  zone. 

The  trunk  or  stem  of  these  trees  is  of  nearly  the  same 

thickness  from  the  ground  upward.     Then  again,  the 

palm  throws  off  no  branches  along  the  trunk,  but 

bears  at  the  top  a  wide-spreading  bunch  of  stout  thick 

leaves.     In  these  stems,  though  large,  there  is  no 

distinction  into  bark,  wood  and  pith,  and  no  con- 


PLANT  STEMS.  145 

centric  rings  of  growth  are  to  be  found.  There  are  to 
be  seen  scattered  throughout  the  whole  thickness  of 
the  stem,  hard  black  spots  or  streaks  of  woody  tissue. 

The  difference  between  these  two  great  orders  of 
plants,  does  not  lie  wholly  in  their  stems;  the  leaves 
and  the  seeds  of  these  two  divisions  differ  materially 
from  one  another  as  we  shall  subsequently  see. 

Let  us  now  examine  a  stem  of  some  smaller  plant, 
for  instance  a  straw  of  wheat  or  barley,  or  the 
vine  from  a  pea  or  a  bean.  Cut  this  across  in  the 
same  way,  and  note  the  difference  between  it  and 
the  others  already  examined.  All  of  these  smaller 
stems  are  hollow  and  therefore  extremely  light  and 
yielding.  Every  mechanic  knows  that  an  iron  tube 
is  much  stronger  than  a  solid  iron  bar  of  the  same 
weight;  and  the  Master  Workman  who  fashioned  the 
grass  stalk  and  the  wheaten  straw,  employed  that 
principle  by  which  to  give  pliant  strength  to  these 
lowly  objects  of  His  care.  In  consequence,  the 
stalk  of  grain  supports  an  ear  of  many  times  its  own 
weight,  and  bends  and  bows  before  every  breeze,  but 
does  not  often  break. 

Most  branches  resemble  the  stems  from  which  they 
grow,  in  form  and  structure;  they  seem,  in  fact,  to 
be  divisions  of  the  stem;  but  in  the  case  of  many 
plants,  rather  odd  branches  are  produced.  Look,  for 
instance,  at  a  growing  grape  vine,  a  Virginia  creeper, 
a  squash,  or  a  cucumber  vine;  growing  from  the 
stem  of  each  of  these,  are  several  small,  slender 
branches,  devoid  of  leaves  and  buds,  and  apparently 
not  intended  for  the  offices  that  branches  ordinarily 


146  FIRST  BOOK  OF   NATURE. 

fill.  These  are  called  Tendrils,  and  are  admirably 
devised  to  assist  the  plant  in  climbing  or  spreading 
over  the  ground  as  it  grows.  Observe,  carefully,  such 
a  tendril,  at  intervals,  for  several  days  in  succession. 
It  grows  comparatively  straight,  until  it  reaches 
some  support  near  by,  such  as  a  post,  or  an  adjacent 
stem;  the  point  of  the  tendril  then  hooks  around, 
and  the  slender  branch  twists  itself  into  a  spiral  coil, 
like  a  cork-screw,  thus  drawing  the  growing  plant 
closer  and  closer  to  the  support.  When  such  plants 
grow  near  a  wall,  or  other  flat  object,  around  which, 
the  tendril  cannot  twine,  the  end  of  each  tendril 
flattens  itself,  forming  a  kind  of  sucker-like  disc, 
which  adheres  closely  and  firmly  to  the  neighboring 
surface,  and  thus  supports  the  plant.  Such  a  re- 
markable adaptation  to  circumstances  as  this,  is  not 
mere  chance;  it  is  a  mark  of  infinite  wisdom;  the 
creeping  plant  and  the  twining  vine  speak  forth  in 
their  very  growth,  the  wisdom  and  care  of  their 
Maker. 

CHAPTER  XXIX. 

LEAVES. 


I 


^EAUTY  and  usefulness  are  frequently  associ- 
ated in  Nature.  The  arrangement  of  the 
vegetable  kingdom  offers  an  illustration  and  a 
proof  of  this  remark.  The  most  attractive 
and  strikingly  beautiful  parts  of  plants  are  as  a  rule, the 
most  indispensable  organs.  Look  for  a  moment  upon 
the  tree  in  the  fulness  of  its  summer  foliage;  if  each 


LEAVES. 


147 


of  the  unnumbered  host  of  leaves  does  but  a  trifle 
toward  the  general  good  of  the  plant,  the  result  must 
be  indeed  stupendous. 

To  learn  something  regarding  the  structure  and 
use  of  leaves,  let  us  pluck  some  from  the  tree  and 
look  at  them  with  thoughtful  care.  A  leaf  from  a 
fig  tree  is  pictured  in  figure  27.  There  is  to  be 
noticed  a  stalk  (p)  by  which  the  leaf  was  attached  to 
the  branch;  this  is  called  the  petiole  and  the  two 
small  appendages  (st)  seen  at  the  base  are  the  stipules. 
The  expanded  portion  of  the  leaf  is  called  the  blade 
(b).  Running  through  this  blade  we  see  a  number 
of*  small  lines  of  harder  and  denser  material  than  the 
thinner  and  smoother  parts  of  the  leaf.     These  lines 

or  veins  branch  again  and 
again  till  they  form  a  per- 
fect network  of  fibres  over 
which  the  true  fabric  or 
membrane  of  the  leaf  is 
stretched.  In  the  case  of 
leaves  belonging  to  the 
K  endogenous  plants,  already 
described,  the  veins  are 
nearly  parallel  with  one 
another  from  base  to  tip, 
and  in  consequence,  such 
leaves  are  said  to  be  par- 
allel-veined, while  the 
leaves  from  exogenous 
plants  are  net-veined. 


Fig.  27.— Leaf. 


Figure  27  is  a  good  'picture  of  a  leaf  from    an 


148  FIRST   BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

exogenous  plant.  The  frame  or  skeleton  upon  which 
the  green  tissue  is  stretched  can  be  readily  observed. 
If  the  thin  membrane  or  skin  from  the  under  side 
of  a  leaf  be  carefully  stripped  off  by  means  of  a  small 
pair  of  forceps  or  pliers,  and  then  examined  with  the 
microscope,  it  would  be  found  to  be  full  of  little 
holes  which  we  call  the  stomata  or  breathing  pores 
of  the  plant.  The  number  of  these  present  in  com- 
mon leaves  is  indeed  surprising;  five  thousand  of 
them  are  found  in  a  single  square  inch  of  the  rhu- 
barb leaf;  twelve  thousand  per  square  inch  in  the 
garden  iris  or  blue-flag,  thirty-six  thousand  per 
square  inch  in  the  leaf  of  the  pink,  and  one  hundred 
and  sixty  thousand  per  square  inch  in  the  hydrangea. 
Through  these  thousands  of  little  pores  the  plant 
breathes,  as  perfectly  as  animals  do  by  means  of 
mouth,  lungs  and  skin.  We  can  very  readily 
prove  that  plants  do  breathe  by  proceeding  as  follows. 
Secure  a  clean  dry  glass  bottle  having  a  large  mouth 
— a  common  fruit-bottle  will  answer  admirably; 
invert  the  bottle  over  any  small  growing  plant,  say  a 
house  plant  in  its  flower  pot;  now  watch  the  bottle 
carefully,  and  within  a  very  short  time  the  inside  will 
be  seen  to  be  clouded  from  the  deposition  of  vapor; 
and  after  a  longer  interval,  so  much  moisture  will  be 
condensed  that  it  gathers  in  drops  and  trickles  down 
the  sides  of  the  bottle.  A  sunflower,  standing  three 
feet  and  a  half  high,  was  found  by  experiment  to 
exhale  between  twenty  and  thirty  ounces  of  water 
every  twelve  hours.  When  tested  in  a  similar  way, 
a  cabbage  breathed  out  between  fifteen  and  twenty 


LEAVES.  149 

ounces  of  water  in  the  same  length  of  time.  This 
would  be  equal  to  the  amount  of  moisture  exhaled  in 
the  breaths  of  half  a  dozen  men. 

But  even  more  surprising  than  this  is  the  almost 
perfect  manner  by  which  the  exhalation  of  moisture 
is  controlled  and  varied.  Around  each  of  these 
tiny  pores,  is  a  thickened  band  which  has  the  power 
of  automatically  opening  and  closing  the  little 
mouth,  according  to  the  amount  of  moisture  present 
in  the  atmosphere.  Thus,  when  the  air  is  drier  than 
usual,  and  there  is  danger  that  the  plant  would 
lose  too  much  moisture,  these  little  pores  close  by 
contraction  of  the  rim  or  band  around  each,  and  so 
any  undue  evaporation  is  checked;  but  whenever  the 
air  is  moist,  the  breathing  pores  are  opened  wide, 
and  free  transpiration  is  encouraged. 

The  green  color  of  leaves  is  an  important  feature. 
Most  leaves  are  of  this  characteristic  tint  when  in  a 
state  of  vigorous  growth,  and  they  lose  it  wholly  or 
in  part  when  they  become  affected  in  any  way  to 
interfere  with  the  proper  discharge  of  their  functions. 
Loss  of  green  color  in  a  leaf  is  indicative  of  a  check 
of  growth,  usually  resulting  in  the  death  of  the  leaf. 

In  general  shape,  we  find  almost  an  endless  diver- 
sity of  leaves;  some  smooth  and  others  rough  on  their 
surface,  some  toothed  like  a  saw,  others  gently 
waved  or  deeply  cut  on  their  margins.  Compare  for 
instance  a  leaf  from  an  apple  or  a  pear  tree  with  that 
of  the  common  dandelion.  Indeed,  the  name  dan- 
delion is  but  a  changed  form  of  a  French  expression 
meaning    "lion-toothed,"    having   reference    to    the 


150  FIRST  BOOK   OF  NATURE. 

tooth-like,  jagged  edges  of  the  leaves.  Look  now 
at  a  leaf  from  a  peach  tree;  it  consists  of  but  a  single 
blade  growing  from  the  stalk;  then  compare  with  it  a 
locust  leaf; — that  is  said  to  be  compound — it  con- 
sists of  a  number  of  separate  blades  all  joined,  how- 
ever, to  a  single  stalk.  We  are  liable  to  mistake 
such  compound  leaves,  and  think  of  each  as  really  a 
small  branch  bearing  several  leaves;  now  let  us 
examine  more  closely  and  discover,  if  we  can,  how  to 
guard  against  such  an  error.  We  find  at  the  bottom 
or  base  of  each  leaf  stalk  a  tiny  bud  from  which  the 
leaf  seems  in  reality  to  grow;  but  one  such  bud  is 
found  in  a  compound  leaf,  and  that  is  situated  at  the 
junction  of  the  main  stalk  with  the  branch.  As  an- 
other method  of  proving  the  true  nature  of  compound 
leaves,  notice  that  in  the  autumn,  the  whole  leaf, 
or  what  appears  to  be  the  branch  of  leaves,  falls 
from  the  tree  entire;  and  such  would  not  be  the  case 
if  the  so-called  leaf  were  really  a  branch  with  leaves 
upon  it,  for  branches  do  not  fall  as  winter  ap- 
proaches. 


CHAPTER  XXX. 

SOME   CURIOUS   LEAVES. 

^fjjjgjHE  general  shapes  and  uses  of  leaves  have  been 


already  pointed  out;  but  Nature  presents  us 
with  a  great  many  variations  from  the  com- 
mon condition,  or,  as  we  may  say,  adaptations 
to  special  purposes.     In  the  case  of  peas  and  wild 


SOME  CURIOUS   LEAYES.  151 

vetches,  for  instance,  the  upper  part  of  each  leaf  is 
prolonged  so  as  to  serve  as  a  tendril,  very  similar  in 
form  and  use  to  the  tendrils  already  noticed  on  the 
grape  vine  and  other  plants,  which,  it  will  be  re- 
membered are,  in  reality,  modified  branches.  By  the 
aid  of  these  tendrils,  these  plants  climb  in  a  very 
perfect  and  well-adapted  way. 

But,  perhaps,  of  all  curious  developments  of  leaves, 
the  strangest  and  most  remarkable  are  shown  in  the 
various  forms  of  Pitcher-plants,  which  are  so  named, 
from  the  peculiar  jug-like  shape  of  the  leaf.  In  the 
Nepenthes — an  East  India  variety  of  pitcher-plant, 
the  blade  of  the  leaf  contracts  into  a  tendril;  but  the 
end  of  the  tendril  expands  again  to  form  a  very 
beautiful  hollow  pitcher,  wonderfully  regular  and 
symmetrical  in  form,  and  usually  from  five  to  six 
inches  in  length.  At  the  top  of  the  pitcher  is  a  lid, 
which  exactly  fits  the  opening,  and  works  auto- 
matically upon  an  admirably-fitted  hinge.  Usually, 
the  pitchers  contain  a  considerable  quantity  of 
water — a  half-pint  in  each,  being  a  very  ordinary 
amount.  Following  are  the  words  of  a  traveler, 
Mr.  Alfred  R.  Wallace,  in  reference  to  our  subject. 
He  is  describing  an  ascent  of  Mount  Ophir,  and 
says:  "The  height  was  about  two  thousand  eight 
hundred  feet.  We  had  been  told  that  we  should 
find  water,  *  *  *  but  we  looked  about  for 
it  in  vain,  as  we  were  exceedingly  thirsty.  At  last 
we  turned  to  the  pitcher-plants,  but  the  pitchers  were 
full  of  insects,  and  otherwise  uninviting.  On  tasting 
it,    however,   we   found   it    very    palatable,    though 


152  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

rather  warm,  and  we  all  quenched   our  thirst  from 
these  natural  jugs." 

Another  variety  of  this  interesting  class  is  called 
by  various  names,  such  as  side-saddle  flower,  hunts- 
man's horn,  Sarracennia,  etc.  Its  leaf  is  curved  and 
the  edges  joined  so  as  to  form  a  slender  cup,  bulging 
near  the  middle  and  bearing  at  the  top  a  hood-like 
expansion  of  the  blade. 

The  California  pitcher-plant  or  Darlingtonia  is 
found  growing  under  favorable  circumstances  in 
various  parts  of  the  Western  and  South-western 
States,  but  principally  in  California.  The  pitcher 
here  seems  to  have  been  produced  by  an  expansion 
or  flattening  of  the  leaf  stalk,  the  thin  part  of  the 
leaf  or  the  blade  as  we  call  it,  appearing  as  an 
appendage  or  a  hood.  This  is  remarkable  for  the 
fact  that  the  opening  to  the  pitcher  is  beneath  the 
curved  or  vaulted  hood,  and  consequently  the  liquid 
contained  therein  cannot  be  attributed  to  rain  or  dew, 
but  must  have  been  secreted  by  the  plant  itself. 
Inside  the  pitcher  at  different  heights  are  fringes  of 
hairs,  all  directed  downward.  Many  insects  enter 
the  hood  and  explore  the  recesses  of  the  pitcher, 
though  but  very  few  of  them  escape  to  tell  their 
fellows  what  they  saw.  It  is  easy  for  an  insect  to 
pass  down  the  pitcher  toward  the  bottom,  but  any 
attempt  to  return  is  frustrated  by  the  hairs  within, 
as  they  cannot  be  pushed  upward,  and  so  the  insect 
is  held  a  prisoner.  Its  death  is  a  matter  of  short 
time  only,  and  as  its  body  decays  within  the  cup,  it 
furnishes  without  doubt  a  rich  nourishment  for  the 


SOME  CURIOUS  LEAVES.  153 

plant.  All  pitcher  plants  partake  somewhat  of  the 
nature  of  insect  traps;  their  victims  being  most 
likely  allured  into  the  treacherous  cups  by  the  spark- 
ling liquid  contained  therein  and  a  sweet  exudation 
to  be  found  on  most  of  the  leaves. 

But  even  more  remarkable  and  strange  in  this 
respect  is  the  so  called  Venus  Fly  Trap,  a  small 
though  common  plant  in  the  bogs  and  marshes  of  the 
south,  as  far  north  as  South  Carolina.  Each  leaf  of 
this  truly  wonderful  growth  is  divided  at  its  end, 
forming  a  pair  of  thick,  somewhat  fleshy  lobes,  so 
placed  as  to  resemble  in  form  a  book  with  rounded 
corners  held  partly  open.  The  surfaces  of  the  lobes 
are  covered  with  a  set  of  stiff  hairs  or  bristles,  which 
are  as  sensitive  as  the  whiskers  of  a  cat.  Whenever 
a  small  insect  alights  on  one  of  the  lobes,  and  brushes 
against  the  bristles,  the  two  portions  of  the  leaf  fly 
together  with  the  rapidity  of  a  spring  trap,  usually 
enclosing  the  intruder  as  a  prisoner.  The  lobes  press 
closer  and  closer  together  till  the  little  victim  is 
crushed  and  smothered  to  death.  The  bodies  of  the 
captured  insects  undergo  a  kind  of  rapid  decay  or 
rather  digestion,  to  accomplish  which  a  fluid  oozes 
out  from  the  surfaces  of  the  lobes,  and  rapidly 
accomplishes  the  process,  after  which  the  softened 
parts  are  absorbed  or  soaked  up  by  the  leaf. 

The  more  common  Sundew  family  of  plants  are 
also  professional  insect  catchers.  Each  member  is 
small;  the  leaves  growing  directly  from  the  roots  flat 
upon  the  ground  so  as  to  form  a  kind  of  rosette. 
The  leaf  is  shaped  somewhat  like  a  tennis  racquet  or 


154  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

an  old-fashioned  wooden  spoon  with  a  comparatively 
large  round  bowl.  On  the  upper  surface  of  the 
expanded  or  bowl-shaped  part  of  the  leaf  a  great 
number  of  fine  long  filaments  are  to  be  found,  each 
of  them  terminated  by  a  little  ball  or  knob.  These 
filaments  and  glands  are  usually  of  some  bright  color, 
and  at  first  sight  the  leaf  looks  very  like  a  small 
flower.  It  may  be  that  insects  visit  the  leaves  under 
such  a  mistaken  notion.  To  render  these  pretty 
leaves  more  attractive  and  illusive,  a  viscid  fluid  is 
secreted  and  poured  out  on  the  surface,  each  tiny 
drop  glistening  like  a  diamond  in  the  sunlight.  This 
sticky  fluid  disables  any  insect  that  may  alight  upon 
the  leaf;  in  its  annoyance  and  efforts  to  escape,  the 
unfortunate  little  creature  struggles  violently,  and  in 
so  doing  touches  the  sensitive  little  knobs  or  glands 
already  referred  to;  immediately  the  filaments  bend 
over  toward  the  excited  spot  and  hold  the  struggling 
prisoner  in  a  secure  grasp.  An  acid  fluid  soon  appears 
on  the  surface  of  the  leaf,  and  the  body  of  the  insect 
is  soon  dissolved  and  absorbed.  The  extreme  sensi- 
tiveness of  these  glands  and  filaments  is  worthy  of 
our  notice  and  admiration.  An  experimenter  found 
that  a  short  piece  of  hair,  weighing  only  one  seventy- 
eight  thousandth  part  of  a  grain  was  sufficient  to 
cause  a  bending  of  the  filaments  with  which  it  was 
in  contact.  Any  small  object,  whether  living  or  dead, 
— a  fragment  of  dust  for  instance,  if  brought  in 
contact  with  the  leaf  surface  will  cause  the  filament 
to  bend  and  hold  it  secure,  but  the  plant  soon  seems 
to   discover   its   error   if  an  indigestible  morsel  be 


FLOWER-GUI'S.  155 

caught,  for  it  soon  releases  its  hold  and  resets  its 
trap.  But  whenever  a  nourishing  substance  is 
secured,  the  plant  loses  its  extreme  sensitiveness  for 
some  little  time — its  hunger  appears  to  have  been 
satisfied  and  it  is  less  eager  and  ravenous  in  its  efforts 
to  capture  additional  prey. 

Truly,  the  Creator  has  inscribed  a  record  of  His 
power,  even  on  the  leaves  of  plants.  Each  bears 
marks  of  the  wisest  adaptation.  What  man  can 
suggest,  even,  in  his  own  mind,  an  improvement  on 
the  purpose  and  effect  of  the  leafy  fabric,  or,  in  fact, 
any  other  item  of  Jehovah's  hand-work?  Each  in 
its  sphere,  every  one  after  its  kind,  is  the  great  law 
in  Nature. 


CHAPTER  XXXI. 

FLOWER-CUPS. 

fw|/Rr^  ARE  now  to  talk  for  a  short  time  about 
Sal<o"»  the  flower,  the  most  conspicuous  and  attrac- 
ffl^d  tive  part  of  the  plant.  To  aid  us  in  this 
i§S  pleasant  undertaking  let  us  procure  any 
well-developed,  bright,  tolerably  large  blossoms,  say 
as  the  fuchsia,  or  "ladies'  ear-drops,"  or  of  the 
geranium,  both  so  deservedly  prized  as  ornamental 
plants. 

Here,  on  the  outside  of  the  colored  part  of  our 
blossom,  borne  upon  the  flower  stalk,  is  a  sort  of  cup, 
formed   of    small,    green    leaves    partly    connected 


156 


FIRST  BOOK  OF   NATURE. 


together;  this  is  ealled  the  calyx,  a  word  meaning 
really  "a  cup,"  and  separate  leaflets  of  which  it  con- 
sists called  the  sepals.  Within  this  outer  cup  grows 
the  brightly  colored  portion  of  the  blossom,  and 
this  is  called  the  corolla,  or  the  ''crown,"  and  is 
seen  to  consist  of  several  leaf-like  parts  which  are 
called  petals.  Still  other  parts  are  visible  within 
this  colored  cluster;  there  we  may  readily  discern  a 
number  of  small  thread-like  organs,  each  bearing  at 
its  top  a  sort  of  little  box;  these  have  been  called  the 
stamens.  Another  "and  stouter  kind  of  a  thread 
is  found  in  the  centre — perhaps  more  than  one,  how- 
ever; it  is  usually  curved  or  expanded  at  the  top  and 
considerably  thickened  in  its  lower  part  near  the 
part  at  which  it  is  attached  to  the  flower  stalk;  this 
is  called  the  pistil. 

An  illustration  of  these  parts  in  their  relative 
positions,  though  dissected  each  from  the  others  is 
shown  in  figure  28. 


Petal. 


Stamen.   Pistil. 


Pislil.  Siamcn. 


Peuil. 


Sepal.  Sepal. 

Fig.  28.— Parts  of  a  Typical  Flower. 
The   number   of  each   of  these   organs   or   parts 
present  is  usually  constant  for  any  one  kind  of  flower 


FLOWER-CUPS.  157 

though  great  diversity  exists  amongst  the  vast 
variety  of  flowers.  By  cultivation  also,  what  appears 
to  be  the  normal  or  regular  arrangement  may  be 
changed,  and  any  one  of  these  organs  may  disappear 
wholly  or  partly  and  be  replaced  by  an  extra  number 
of  another  kind.  For  example  let  us  pluck  a  blossom 
from  the  modest  little  wild  rose,  or  the  scented 
sweet  brier;  by  carefully  examining  it  we  notice  five 
distinct  sepals,  and  within  are  five  petals,  enclosing 
a  multitude  of  stamens  and  pistils.  By  a  proper 
cultivation  and  a  careful  arrangement  of  all  the 
conditions  of  growth,  the  many  queenly  roses 
of  the  green -house  and  garden  have  been  pro- 
duced from  this  simple  flower;  yet  see  the  difference 
existing  between  the  wild  blossom,  and  the  cultivated 
offspring!  Look  at  the  richly  tinted  fragrant  moss- 
rose;  the  flower  seems  little  else  than  an  orderly 
cluster  of  large  petals,  the  stamens  and  pistils  are 
not  to  be  found  at  all,  or  at  least  but  very  lew  of 
them;  while  the  beautiful  petals  may  be  counted  by 
the  score. 

The  pistil  of  nearly  all  flowers,  toward  its  lower 
extremity,  is  considerably  enlarged,  forming  a  swollen 
case,  which  has  been  named  the  ovary,  or  seed  box, 
and  within  which  the  ovules  or  seeds  are  to  be 
found. 

Flowers  consisting  of  all  of  these  separate  parts, 
calyx,  corolla,  stamens  and  pistils  are  said  to  be 
complete;  but  sometimes  one  or  more  of  these  parts 
are  missing,  in  which  case  the  blossom  is  termed 
incomplete.     But  only  the  stamens  and  pistils  are  in 


158 


FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 


reality  essential  for  the  growth  and  perfecting  of  the 
seed.  If  either  of  these  be  missing,  however,  the  plant 
is  unable  to  perpetuate  its  kind  by  producing  seed. 
In  many  blossoms  the  sepals  and  petals  are  connected 
together  so  that  their  separate  parts  can  scarcely  be 
seen.  Look  for  an  example  of  this  at  the  open  cup 
of  a  morning-glory  flower  (figure  29.)     The  corolla 

here  seems  to  consist  of 
but  one  part,  the  separate 
/  petals  being  joined  togeth- 
er into  a  trumpet- shaped 
blossom,  the  fine  edge  how- 
ever is  waving  or  undu- 
late in  outline  showing  five 
notches  or  indentations. 
Such  a  corolla  is  said  to  be 
"monopetalous,"  i.  e.  con- 
sisting apparently  of  but 
one  petal.     In    the   figure, 

Fig.  29.— Morning  Glory   the  calyx   or  outer  cup  is 
Flower.    Monopetalous  ,    , 

Corolla.  seen  below. 

The  arrangement  of  the  blossoms  is  as  varied  as 

are  their  forms  and  colors.     In  many  plants,  each 

flower-cup  stands  separate  and  alone  upon  its  stalk, 

while  others  are  seen  each  to   be  composed  of  many 

distinct  blossoms.     Here,  for  example,  in  the  pretty 

daisy,  each  of  the  little  blade-like  white  or  pinkish 

organs,  shows  itself,  when  magnified,  to  be  in  reality 

a  perfect  flower,  consisting  of  five  little  petals  formed 

in  a  tube — on  the  same  plan  as  the  morning-glory, 

already  examined — within  which  are  five  tiny  stamens 


HOW  FLOWERS  ARE  FERTILIZED.        159 

and  a  pistil,  with  a  little  seed  in  its  ovary.  This  is 
also  the  case  with  the  more  conspicuous  sunflower, 
and  the  familiar  dandelion,  the  marigold,  and  many 
of  the  commonest  of  our  floral  friends.*  There  is 
an  infinite  variety  in  the  flowers  and  leaves,  but 
each  form  proves  itself  to  be  the  best  for  the  condi- 
tions under  which  the  plant  has  been  designed  to 
grow. 


CHAPTER  XXXII. 

HOW   FLOWERS    ARE   FERTILIZED. 

|OW  let  us  select  some  large,  conspicuous  blos- 
som— a  stately  tiger  lily  is  a  superb  illustra- 
tion, and  look  carefully  at  the  little  sack  or 
box  borne  at  the  tip  of  each  stamen.  When 
thoroughly  ripened,  this  is  covered  with  a  kind  or 
powder  of  a  yellowish,  reddish  or  brownish  tint. 
This  powdery  substance  has  been  called  the  pollen, 
and  each  grain  when  magnified  proves  to  be  a  little 
hollow  ball  or  box  filled  with  fluid.  A 
single  pollen  grain  taken  from  the  modest 
little  rose  mallow  flower  is  shown  in 
Figure     30,     very     highly      magnified. 

Pollen  grain  ^ven  among  pollen  grains  there  is  a 
from  rose  variety  wide  enough  to  occupy  our  atten- 
(very  highly  tion  for  a  long  time;  so  many  different 
magnified).  snapes,  and  each  so  beautiful.  Some 
look  like  golden  balls,  chased  and  ornamented  on  the 

*  From  this  peculiarity  of  their  structure,  the  whole 
family  of  such  flowers — and  it  is  a  large  one  is  called  the 
Composite  Family. 


160  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

surface  in  the  most  elaborate  way,  others  are  more 
angular  in  outline,  and  many  are  elongated  or  flat- 
tened; but  all  are  exceedingly  compact  in  form  and 
light  in  weight. 

According  to  the  wise  plan  of  Nature,  it  is  neces- 
sary that  the  fluid  contained  in  the  polleo 
grains  of  any  flower  shall  mingle  with  the  material 
in  the  ovary  from  which  the  ovules  or  seeds  are  sub- 
sequently to  be  produced;  and  unless  such  a  mixture 
takes  place,  the  plant  does  not  produce  fertile  seeds. 
The  pollen  then  must  in  some  way  be  carried  from 
flower  to  flower,  in  order  that  the  seeds  may  be  fer- 
tile; for  the  pollen  from  any  flower  is  not  able  to  well 
and  thoroughly  fertilize  its  own  seeds;  it  is  best  for 
the  development  of  the  plant  and  the  production  of 
strong  and  healthy  seeds,  that  the  pollen  come  from 
some  other  flower  of  the  same  kind.  And  the  meth- 
ods that  Nature  adopts  to  bring  about  this  transfer  of 
the  life-giving  pollen  are  as  wonderful  as  they  are 
efficient.  As  plants  are  rooted  to  their  places  of 
growth,  they  cannot  individually  visit  their  neighbors 
and  relatives,  to  mutually  exchange  their  pollen 
grains,  so  they  employ  trusty  and  long-tried  mail 
and  express  messengers  to  do  the  work  for  them. 
Some  plants  yield  their  pollen  to  the  insects  that 
visit  their  cups  and  entrust  them  with  the  mission  of 
bearing  it  to  others  of  their  kin;  while  others  commit 
it  to  the  wind  and  hopefully  rely  that  the  tiny  grains 
will  reach  the  stigmse  of  other  plants.  These  two 
agents,  insects  and  the  wind,  are  indeed  the  chief  of 
Queen  Flora's   messengers,  and  well  they  do  their 


HOW  FLOWERS  ARE  FERTILIZED.         161 

work;  but  other  means  are  sometimes  employed. 
Thus,  aquatic  plants  discharge  their  pollen  into  the 
water,  each  granule  securely  wrapped  in  a  water- 
proof covering,  and  so  the  transfer  is  made. 

Look  for  a  moment  at  a  bee  just  emerging  from 
some  sweet-scented  flower  cup,  at  which  he  has 
been  making  a  flying  visit  to  enquire  if  he  could 
obtain  a  little  honey  or  nectar  for  himself  and 
family — see  he  is  covered  with  powder  like  a  dusty 
miller  just  fresh  from  the  sacks,  and  this  powder  is 
the  pollen  about  which  we  have  been  talking. 
Then,  flying  to  another  blossom,  and  rubbing  against 
the  stigma  or  pistil  tip,  as  he  needs  must  do  while 
making  his  way  to  the  honey  cup,  he  leaves  some 
of  the  pollen  dust  adhering  thereto.  At  the  proper 
season  too,  the  stigma  becomes  moist  and  sticky 
from  a  kind  of  mucilage  produced  upon  the  surface; 
by  wnich  simple  but  admirable  device  a  grain  of 
pollen  once  falling  upon  the  stigma  is  securely  held. 

It  is  a  well  known  fact,  that  in  seeking  nectar  or 

honey,  insects  show  decided  preferences  for  flowers  of 

one  kind  at  one  time,  rather  than  for  several  kinds  in 

rapid  succession.     Thus  even  the  tastes  of  bees  and 

butterflies  are  to  the  advantage  of  the  flowers.     A 

grain  of  pollen  from  a  violet  cannot  fertilize  a  lily, 

and  would  be  but  wasted  if  left  upon  its  stigma;  but 

an  insect  that  starts  out  to  collect  nectar  from  the 

lily  would  not  be  likely  to  visit  violets  upon  that 

trip.     In  many  of  our  common  plants  the  devices  to 

secure  the  safe  transfer  and  interchange  of  pollen 

through  the  visits  of  hungry  insects  are  of  the  most 
12 


162  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

surprising  and  striking  kind.  Examine  the  small  and 
humble  blossom  of  the  lucern  or  the  clover.  The 
flower  is  somewhat  irregular  in  form  it  is  true,  but 
this  very  irregularity  is  of  the  greatest  importance  in 
the  fertilizing  of  its  flowers.  Take  a  stiff  bristle  or 
horse  hair,  or  a  fine  grass  stalk,  or  something  of 
the  kind  and  thrust  it  carefully  into  the  opening 
of  the  corolla  as  a  bee  would  insert  its  trunk  in 
quest  of  honey.  Look  carefully  into  the  flower  cup  as 
you  do  this,  and  you  will  be  rewarded  by  a  strange 
sight.  Before  the  insertion  has  been  carried  far,  the 
curiously  shaped  stamen,  which  before  this  time  has 
been  hidden,  is  liberated  forcibly  as  by  a  spring,  and 
immediately  it  flies  forward,  striking  the  hair  or 
bristle  and  leaving  pollen  upon  it.  Now  thrust  this 
hair  into  another  blossom  of  the  same  kind,  and  you 
will  doubtlessly  see  that  the  pollen  is  rubbed  off  and 
left  upon  the  stigma  of  the  second  flower.  Such  an 
occurrence  is  common  when  an  insect  inserts  its  long 
hair-like  trunk  into  the  cup,  and  in  this  way  the 
exchange,  so  indispensable  for  the  production  of 
good  seed  is  accomplished. 

A  more  beautifully  perfect  arrangement  and  adap- 
tation than  is  shown  in  the  plan  for  the  fertilization 
of  different  flowers,  can  scarcely  be  seen  or  con- 
ceived. Many  flowers  are  of  so  peculiar  a  shape, 
that  not  all  classes  of  insects  are  able  to  pollenate 
them.  Such,  for  instance,  is  the  case  with  the  clover 
blossom,  which  is  best  fertilized  through  the  visits  of 
bees.  In  this  connection,  it  is  recorded,  that  shortly 
after  the  English  people  began  to  colonize  Australia, 


HOW  FLOWERS  ARE  FERTILIZED.  163 

they  carried  to  that  land,  the  seed  of  their  much- 
prized  clover;  and  though  the  crops  were  heavy,  and 
the  quality  the  best,  yet  no  fertile  seed  was  pro- 
duced. All  the  seed  had  to  be  imported,  though 
appearances  indicated  that  the  plants  grew  perfectly, 
stalk,  leaf,  and  flower,  all  vigorous  and  strong.  An 
observing  student  of  nature,  pointed  out  the  cause 
of  the  difficulty — there  were  no  bees  in  Australia, 
and  consequently  no  transfer  of  pollen  could  be 
effected  between  the  plants.  Instead  of  bringing 
fresh  supplies  of  seed,  the  colonists  began  to  import 
a  great  number  of  bees;  these  throve  so  well  on  the 
clover  flowers,  that  their  stock  of  honey  was  an  ample 
return  for  the  labor  and  expense  of  importation;  but 
of  far  greater  value  was  the  fertilization  of  the  clover 
which  these  insects  brought  about.  As  they  flew 
from  flower  to  flower,  they  bore  the  pollen  with  them, 
and,  in  consequence,  large  crops  of  healthy  seed 
were  produced.  Thus  the  insects  assist  the  flowers, 
and  the  flowers  support  the  insects;  neither  can 
thrive  without  the  other. 

Between  the  two  great  classes  of  flowers,  those 
fertilized  through  the  agency  of  insects  and  those 
whose  pollen  is  carried  from  one  to  the  other  by  the 
wind,  many  great  differences  exist.  In  the  case  of  any 
and  all  flowers  fertilized  by  insects,  the  blossoms  are 
more  or  less  conspicuously  colored,  apparently  with 
the  design  of  attracting  insects  to  them;  and  then 
again,  all  such  flowers  secrete  some  kind  of  sweet 
juice  or  nectar,  to  secure  which  the  insects  eagerly 
enter  the  corollas. 


164  FIRST   BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

Many  flowers  unfold  their  petals  only  at  night,  as 
for  instance  the  large  evening  primrose  family;  such 
plants  are  fertilized  through  the  visits  of  various 
nocturnal  moths,  and  their  flowers  are  always  white 
or  at  least  light-colored,  apparently  so  as  to  be  seen 
the  more  readily  by  these  insects.  It  would  be  a 
decided  disadvantage  to  such  flowers  to  be  open 
during  the  day;  their  fragile  blossoms  would  be 
exposed  to  injury,  and  the  nectar  would  perhaps  be 
stolen  away  by  insects  not  of  the  proper  size  and 
shape  to  effect  the  fertilization,  or  perchance  the  sweet 
juices  would  be  dried  up  by  the  heat  of  the  sun,  so 
that  by  night  they  would  have  no  alluring  nectar 
to  tempt  the  nocturnal  moths  to  visit  them.  In  con- 
sequence, the  Mower  cups  are  tightly  closed  during 
the  day;  but  as  soon  as  the  twilight  comes,  they 
wake  from  their  sleep,  and  spread  out  their  brightly 
colored  petals  like  banners  of  light,  offering  a 
tempting  resting  place  to  the  passing  moth,  and 
asking  in  return  for  such  courtesy  only  the  small 
favor  of  bringing  a  tiny  packet  from  another  plant 
and  carrying  a  similar  parcel  to  the  next.  By  another 
wise  provision,  those  flowers  that  depend  upon  bees, 
butterflies,  and  all  kinds  of  diurnal  fliers  for  then- 
fertilization,  close  their  petals  with  the  sun,  and 
sleep  in  peace  and  quiet  till  the  return  of  day,  with 
its  warmth  and  light  and  merry  insect  hum. 

On  the  other  hand,  wind-fertilized  flowers  are  in 
general  small,  and  inconspicuously  colored,  and  they 
secrete  no  honey.  Such  plants  as  a  rule  grow  in 
large  groups  or  bunches,  as  is   the   case  with    the 


HOW   FLOWERS   ARE    FERTILIZED.  165 

grains  arid  grasses,  so  that  a  greater  quantity  of 
pollen  is  borne  by  the  wind  over  the  region  in  which 
they  grow.  But  this  beautiful  adaptation  is  carried 
even  farther.  It  is  a  well  known  fact  that  insects 
are  usually  attracted  by  brilliant  colors.  Remem- 
bering this,  let  us  examine  any  bright  variegated 
blossom,  a  light-tinted  pansy  or  "heart's  ease"  for 
instance:  notice  the  arrangement  of  the  streaks  of 
most  striking  colors  upon  the  outspread  petals,  all 
directed  like  the  veins  of  a  fairy's  fan  toward  a  centre; 
this  centre  is  the  entrance  to  the  nectary  where  also 
the  pollen-covered  anther  lies  concealed.  Watch 
now  an  insect  as  it  alights  on  the  expanded  lip  of 
the  flower;  it  follows  the  direction  of  the  brightly- 
colored  lines,  and  thrusts  its  proboscis  into  the  nec- 
tary, gaining  the  honey  for  its  pains,  and  receiving 
also  with  very  little  chance  of  failure,  the  pollen 
from  the  well- stocked  stamens.  In  many  variegated 
flowers  bright-colored  hairs  are  seen  pointing  toward 
the  cup  of  sweets  so  much  desired  by  the  flying  visitors. 

Observe  also  that  many  flowers  hang  with  their 
corollas  opening  downward,  by  which  means  the 
nectar  is  protected  in  its  cavity  from  rain;  and  see 
also  how  nearly  all  honey-producing  plants  with 
erect  blossoms  close  their  cups  and  bow  their  heads 
at  the  approach  of  rain  or  storm. 

Such,  then,  seems  to  have  been  the  great  Creator's 
purpose,  that  not  even  the  color  of  a  flower  or  the  tinted 
streaks  on  the  corolla  tube,  or  the  particles  of  dust 
on  the  stamens,  or  the  honey  drop  within  the  blossom 
cup,  is  made  without  a  purpose  both  great  and  wise. 


166  FIRST  BOOK   OF  NATURE. 


CHAPTER   XXXIII. 

FRUITS. 

S$JS  SOON  as  the  fertilization  of  the  flower  has 
been  affected  by  any  of  the  methods  of 
Nature,  some  of  which  have  been  briefly  re- 
ferred to  already,  the  object  for  which  the 
corolla  of  the  plant  seems  to  have  been  created,  is 
accomplished;  and  thereupon  the  most  brilliant  part 
of  the  flower  begins  to  wither  and  very  soon  disap- 
pears. If  the  corolla  continued  in  its  beauty  after 
the  pollen  had  been  given  and  received,  as  far  as  the 
plant  itself  is  concerned,  it  would  be  purely  an  object 
of  display;  and  to  insects  flying  past  it  would  be  but 
a  delusive  snare  to  visit  the  blossom  when  the 
nectary  was  empty  and  the  anthers  devoid  of  pollen. 
Such  a  visit  would  not  be  simply  useless  to  the  visit- 
ing insect,  but  positively  injurious  to  the  flower;  for 
no  insect  can  possibly  enter  a  flower  without  causing 
danger  to  the  delicate  parts:  such  dangers  are  cer- 
tainly best  avoided  in  the  critical  time  at  which  the 
seed  is  forming  within  the  ovary.  Beside,  should  a 
large  insect  alight  upon  a  blossom  and  find  no  nectar 
within  the  cup  to  slake  his  thirst,  nor  honey  to  bear 
away,  after  having  been  attracted  thither  through 
the  bright  tints  of  the  flower,  he  may  show  his  disap- 
pointment by  undue  haste  to  retire,  with  injurious 
consequences  to  the  flower. 

As  fast  as  the  corolla  withers  away,  the  ovary  con- 
taining now  the  fertilized    seeds,   increases  in  size, 


FRUITS.  167 

forming  the  so-called  fruit  of  the  plant.  There  are 
many  varieties  of  fruit,  differing  in  form  and  size; 
though  some  of  the  soft  and  luscious  parts  of  plants 
which  we  esteem  under  the  name  of  fruits,  are  in 
fact  no  fruits  at  all. 

A  fruit,  strictly  speaking,  is  the  ripened  ovary  of 
a  plant  with  its  contents.  The  pod  fruit  is  a  com- 
mon kind,  familiar  to  us  all  through  the  typical  form 
of  peas  and  beans.  And  of  this  one  kind  there  are 
many  minor  varieties  differing  in  proportionate  size 
and  shape;  all  of  them,  however,  readily  splitting 
open  at  maturity  so  as  to  scatter  the  ripened  ovules. 
Examples  of  small  pods  are  furnished  by  the  fruit  of 
the  mustard  plant  and  the  common  pepper  grass,  and 
also  the  sack-shaped  vessel  of  the  modest  little  shep- 
herd's purse.  Then  there  is  the  gourd  fruit,  such  as 
the  melon,  squash,  cucumber  and  pumpkin,  with  its 
hard  rind  on  the  outside,  and  the  soft,  pulpy  interior 
with  its  multitude  of  seeds.  These  monstrous  fruits 
are  simply  the  swollen  ovaries  of  the  spring  blossoms, 
and  it  is  instructive  to  watch  the  development  of  the 
fruit  from  the  flower  through  the  various  stages. 
When  the  gourd  is  ripe,  the  dried  and  withered 
corolla  may  be  seen  still  attached  at  the  end. 

Now  let  us  glance  at  another  form  of  fruit,  the 
berry,  in  which  the  seed  vessel  has  grown  soft 
and  fleshy  throughout,  the  seeds  being  contained  in 
the  pulp.  Examples  of  berries  are  furnished  by  the 
currant,  gooseberry  and  tomato.  Then  there  is  the 
drupe  or  stone-fruit,  in  which  one  part  of  the  ovary 
has  hardened  into  a  shell  like  that  of  a  nut,  enclosing 


168  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

the  kernel  or  seed  proper,  while  the  outer  portion  is 
soft  and  juicy.  For  this  provision  we  have  reason  to 
be  thankful,  since  such  fruits  are  so  delicious  as  food. 

The  pome  fruit,  such  as  the  apple,  pear  or  quince, 
is  a  peculiar  kind.  The  core  is  in  reality  the  true 
seed  vessel;  the  "pips"  contained  within  are  the 
seeds,  while  the  soft  parts,  forming  so  large  a 
proportion  of  the  whole  is  produced  by  an  abnormal 
growth  and  thickening  of  the  calyx  or  outer  tube  of 
the  original  blossom. 

To  produce  flowers  that  finally  ripen  into  fruit 
with  perfect  seeds,  is  apparently  the  great  achieve- 
ment for  which  all  plants  strive;  and  as  soon  as  this 
labor  is  accomplished  the  plant  withers  and  dies, 
either  wholly  as  with  all  annual  plants,  or  partially 
as  in  the  case  of  biennials  and  perennials. 

THE    SEED    AND    HOW    IT    SPROUTS. 

A  vegetable  seed  has  always  seemed  to  me  to  be 
an  object  of  great  interest.  It  holds  within  its  little 
shell  such  wondrous  possibilities.  Who  would  even 
dream,  if  he  had  never  seen  the  actual  occurrence, 
that  the  tiny  apple  pip,  concealed  beneath  its  tough 
little  jacket  the  germ  of  so  vigorous  an  existence, 
a  spark  of  vitality  that  may  develop  into  a  wide- 
spreading  tree,  blazing  in  the  spring-time  with 
beauteous  blossoms  and  verdant  leaves,  and,  in  the 
autumn  months,  laden  with  fruit,  producing  yearly 
thousands  of  other  seeds  like  itself.  It  would  be 
interesting  to  watch  it  as  it  grows,  and  instructive  to 
learn  the  lesson  of  its  little  life.  But  as  the  apple 
seed  is  too  small  to  be  closely  examined  by  our  un- 


FRUITS.  169 

aided  vision,  let  us  select  a  more  convenient,  and  an 
easier  form,  showing,  however,  the  same  principle. 
Take,  for  instance,  a  few  plump  beans,  of  almost  any 
kind — common  white  or  black  beans  will  answer 
well.  Soak  them  for  a  few  hours  in  water,  by  which 
treatment  they  will  lose  their  hard  and  brittle  char- 
acter and  become  soft  and  yielding.  Now,  let  us 
tear  off,  carefully,  the  outside  skin — look  at  it  atten- 
tively before  throwing  it  aside;  note  its  tough, 
leathery  nature — -well  adapted,  indeed,  to  protect 
the  still  more  wonderful  structures  within.  We 
see  that  our  bean  consists  of  two  parts,  readily 
separated  from  each  other;  let  us  open  them — laying 
them  back  as  one  would  the  covers  of  a  book — and 
there,  snugly  packed  between  the  lobes,  is  the  baby 
bean  plant — a  pair  of  little  leaves,  folded  as  Nature 
is  wont  to  fold  her  treasures  when  she  lays  them 
away,  and  a  tiny  root. 

The  process  of  germination  then  is  really  one  of 
development  only;  the  young  plant  is  present  in  the 
seed,  formed  there  through  the  agency  of  the  parent 
plant,  and  only  awaiting  the  influences  of  warmth 
and  nourishment  to  hasten  its  growth.  But  what  are 
these  two  large  thick  lobes  already  spoken  of  between 
which  the  young  bean  was  so  snugly  laid  away? 
Man  values  them  as  food  for  himself  and  animals, 
but  they  were  originally  intended  to  serve  as  food  to 
the  young  plant  when  it  would  begin  to  grow,  and 
before  it  would  have  developed  sufficiently  to  absorb 
its  own  nutriment  from  the  soil. 

By  the  aid  of  the  microscope  we  would  soon  (lis- 


170  FIRST  BOOK   OF  NATURE. 

cover  that  this  bean  is  composed  mostly  of  starch — 
the  form  in  which  the  food  of  plants  is  commonly 
stored  up  for  future  use.  Starch  is  to  plants  what 
fat  is  in  the  animal  body.  Now  we  have  already 
pointed  out  that  no  food  is  available  to  the  plant 
unless  in  a  state  of  solution,  and  starch  cannot  be 
dissolved  in  water.  How  then  can  the  rich  stock  of 
starch  present  in  the  bean  be  made  use  of?  As  soon 
as  the  bean  begins  to  sprout,  a  peculiar  change  is 
effected  in  the  material  of  which  it  is  composed,  the 
starch  being  transformed  into  a  kind  of  sugar,  which 
as  all  of  us  know  full  well,  is  readily  soluble  in  water. 
The  sugar  thus  formed  in  the  germinating  seed  has 
not  been  created  from  any  external  source,  but  is 
formed  from  the  elements  of  the  starch  already 
present.  As  fast  as  the  sugar  develops  the  starch 
disappears.  The  moisture  present  within  the  plant 
dissolves  the  sugar  to  a  kind  of  syrup,  which  is 
absorbed  and  assimilated  within  the  tissues  of  the 
infant  plant.  Some  may  ask,  why  it  would  not  have 
been  better  for  the  plant  if  its  food  had  been  formed 
of  sugar  in  the  first  place;  no  such  complicated  trans- 
formation would  in  such  case  be  required,  and  the 
food  would  have  been  in  a  more  available  state. 
The  answer  to  this  furnishes  another  proof  of  the 
supreme  wisdom  exercised  by  the  Creator  over  the 
many  objects  of  His  care.  If  the  bean  and  other 
seeds  contained  sugar  instead  of  starch,  the  first  rain 
storm  would  wash  it  away  and  leave  the  tiny  plant 
for  whose  benefit  the  food  was  designed,  entirely 
destitute  of  nourishment.     It  is  better  then  that  the 


FRUITS.  171 

food  remain  in  an  insoluble  and  unavailable  form 
until  the  time  of  sprouting.  Again,  many  of  these 
rich  and  starch  filled  seeds  are  of  great  practical 
use  to  man;  and  he  could  not  feed  himself  and  ani- 
mals on  sugar.  Starch  is  very  valuable  as  food  to 
animals  and  is  constantly  being  eaten  by  man  and 
beast  in  great  quantities,  but  sugar  can  only  be 
eaten  sparingly. 

By  taking  advantage  of  this  strange  change  of 
the  starchy  matter  into  sugar  as  the  seed  germinates, 
the  brewer  obtains  his  malt.  A  quantity  of  grain 
is  taken  (barley  is  found  to  be  the  best  adapted  to 
the  purpose)  and  kept  for  some  time  in  a  damp  and 
warm  place — just  the  conditions  which  naturally  pre- 
vail in  the  spring  time,  and  are  so  effectual  in 
awakening  the  sleeping  germ.  Under  these  artificial 
conditions  the  barley  forthwith  sprouts,  at  the  same 
time,  a  quantity  of  sugar  is  developed  from  the 
starchy  material  of  each  grain.  This  we  may  satis- 
factorily prove  by  chewing  a  few  of  the  sprouting 
grains,  or  a  kernel  of  the  prepared  malt — the  sweet 
taste  is  conclusive  evidence  of  the  presence  of  sugar. 
The  malster  then  increases  the  heat  sufficiently  to 
kill  the  tiny  plants  and  thus  he  prevents  them  absorb- 
ing and  using  the  food  now  ready;  then  by  soaking 
and  fermenting  the  malt,  the  sugar  is  transformed 
into  the  intoxicating  alcohol  which  is  present  in  all 
liquors  produced. 

What  has  been  said  of  the  bean  is  true  of  all 
plants  of  the  kind.  There  are  some  seeds  however, 
like  that  of  Indian  corn,  which  consist  of  but  one 


172  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

lobe  in  place  of  two;  and  when  such  seeds  sprout  they 
produce  but  one  leaf  at  first,  instead  of  a  pair.  These 
are  characteristic  features  of  all  endogenous  or 
"inside  growing  plants"  while  the  exogenous  or 
"outside  growers"  possess  double  seeds  and  a  pair 
of  first  leaves  like  the  bean.  This  is  a  distinctive 
feature  between  the  two  classes  of  plants  and 
has  been  already  referred  to.  We  may  readily 
watch  the  seed  through  all  the  wonderful  and  inter- 
esting stages  of  germination  and  growth  at  least 
until  the  distinct  parts  of  the  plant,  root  and  stem 
and  leaves,  have  been  formed,  by  taking  seeds  of 
various  kind,  peas,  beans,  Indian  corn  and  the  like — 
and  sowing  them  on  moist  cotton  wool.  By  keeping 
this  damp  and  warm  for  a  few  days  germination  is 
induced,  and  can  be  easily  watched  and  studied.  If 
it  be  desirable  to  carry  this  method  of  culture  farther, 
the  plants  should  be  taken  one  by  one,  and  each 
loosely  inserted  into  a  vertical  slit  cut  in  a  cork, 
which  has  been  previously  fitted  to  a  bottle  contain- 
ing water.  By  a  careful  arrangement  the  roots  can 
be  kept  immersed,  while  the  seed  itself  and  the  stem 
are  out  of  the  liquid.  Let  us  observe  how  the  thick 
bulky  seed  shrivels  and  shrinks  as  it  gets  rid  of  its 
load  of  food  matter.  The  root  of  the  growing  plant 
soon  spreads  within  the  bottle  and  fills  the  greater 
part  of  the  space  while  the  stem  and  leaves  develop 
with  equal  vigor  above  the  cork.  In  this  experiment 
ordinary  hard  water  should  be  used,  the  solid  matters 
contained  in  the  water  are  needed  within  the  body  of 
the  plant,   and  pure   water   could    not   sustain  the 


FRUITS.  173 

growth.  Unless  the  soluble  matter  which  naturally 
forms  the  food  of  the  plant  when  growing  in  the  soil 
be  added  to  the  solution,  the  growth  will  be  checked 
long  before  maturity  is  reached.  The  process  can  be 
assisted  by  adding  water  in  which  wood  ashes  have 
been  stirred  and  allowed  to  stand  for  some  time; 
the  clear  fluid  being  then  poured  off;  but  to 
secure  the  best  possible  result  with  large  and  mature 
plants,  a  chemically  prepared  solution  is  requisite.* 

By  this  method  of  " water  culture"  we  may  easily 
study  the  growth  of  seeds  with  all  their  wonders. 
By  these  means  plants  can  be  developed  to  maturity; 
maize  plants  have  been  grown  from  five  to  six  feet 
high;  and  buckwheat  plants  nearly  seven  feet  high. 


*  For  the  information  of  those  who  would  desire  to 
carry  this  truly  interesting  subject  further,  the  following 
directions  are  given  for  preparing  a  culture  fluid.  Great 
care  must  be  exercised  in  the  mixing:  Take  75  grains  of 
fine  powder  of  well-burned  bones  (bone-ash  can  be  pro- 
cured at  drug  establishments);  place  in  a  large  bowl  or 
vessel  not  of  metal;  pour  on  it  a  little  boiling  water, 
and  add  cautiously  while  still  hot  a  small  quantity  of 
nitric  acid.  (This  acid  is  sometimes  called  aqua  fortis;  it 
is  extremely  corrosive  and  poisonous  and  must  be  used 
with  great  care.)  Enough  acid  should  be  added  to  nearly 
dissolve  the  bone  ash;  do  not  use  too  much,  however,  not 
enough  to  give  the  solution  a  permanently  sour  taste. 
Then  add  45  grains  of  nitre,  28  grains  of  Epsom  salts,  and 
15  grains  of  potassium  chloride— all  of  which  can  be 
obtained  at  the  druggists  for  a  very  few  cents.  When  all 
are  dissolved,  add  enough  water  to  make  the  solution  up 
to  two  gallons.  This  can  be  used  to  advantage  in  culti- 
vating any  ordinary  plant  by  the  method  before  explained. 


174  FIRST   BOOK  OF  NATURE. 


CHAPTER    XXXIV. 

WANDERING    SEEDS. 

@Jg»HE   number   of    seeds   produced   by   a   single 
£§!/<£   plant,    is  frequently  surprising;    and  if    this 

¥  multitude  of  seeds  were  deposited  when  ripe, 
in  the  neighborhood  of  the  parent  plant,  the 
space  of  ground  would  soon  be  impoverished,  and 
prove  unable  to  furnish  necessary  nourishment  to  the 
increasing  numbers.  As  with  mankind,  when  a  family 
increases  so  that  the  habitation  is  really  too  small 
for  their  accommodation,  the  grown-up  sons  and 
daughters,  leave  the  parental  roof  and  seek  homes 
for  themselves.  So  with  plants.  Nature  has  pro- 
vided many  devices,  by  which  the  seeds  are  borne 
away  from  the  locality  in  which  they  grew,  and  are 
scattered  under  circumstances  best  calculated  for 
their  future  development  and  well-being. 

Some  such  wandering  seeds  travel  to  very  great 
distances.  Look  with  care  at  the  white  plumes  of 
the  dandelion — the  flower  of  civilization.  The  button 
or  head  of  the  ripe  flower  is  seen  to  be  studded  with 
small,  hard  bodies,  each  covered  with  little  barbs 
directed  upward,  and  surmounted  by  a  pretty  little 
tuft  of  shining  hairs,  called  the  pappus.  These  are 
the  seeds,  each  equipped  for  travel  in  the  neatest  and 
most  compact  way;  all  its  belongings  packed  in  the 
smallest  possible  space — packed  as  only  Dame  Nature 
can  pack — no  unwieldy  trunks,  nor  bulky  carpet- 
bags,  and  yet,  containing  within  the   little  parcel, 


WANDERING  SEEDS.  175 

the  possibilities  of  future  flowers,  with  honey  and 
hum  of  bee  associated,  of  meadows  carpeted  with 
golden  blossoms,  and  fields  ablaze  with  a  fire  that 
speaks  of  Omnipotence.  With  the  least  stir  of  wind 
the  wide-spread  pappus  is  borne  away,  the  seed  sus- 
pended below.  Watch  it  riding  upon  the  air,  poised 
more  beautifully  than  cumbrous  parachute  or  swol- 
len balloon.  When  it  rests  it  is  perhaps  many  miles 
away  from  the  place  of  its  birth.  As  it  floats,  the 
barbed  seed  being  the  heaviest  part  is  always  below, 
and  as  it  comes  to  the  ground,  the  seed  touches  the 
earth  first.  Then,  by  the  waving  to  and  fro,  of  the 
downy  pappus,  the  seed  is  worked  deeper  and  deeper 
into  the  soil;  the  little  barbs  or  hooks  upon  its  sur- 
face effectually  preventing  its  withdrawal.  In  this 
wise  and  perfect  way  the  seed  is  safely  sown.  Such 
an  admirable  adaptation  to  travel,  explains  the  wide 
distribution  of  this  humble  flower,  originally  native 
to  Europe,  but  now  scattered  over  the  world.  Neither 
mountains  nor  plains,  winds  nor  oceans  have  been 
of  sufficient  power  to  intercept  it  in  its  wander- 
ings. . 

All  that  has  been  said  as  to  the  arrangement  of 
the  dandelion  seed  may  be  repeated  with  truth 
regarding  the  seed  of  the  sowthistle,  with  its  silken 
tuft  of  hairs;  and  the  lettuce  seed,  and  the 
sneezeweed,  and  the  sun-flower  with  its  short  pappus 
composed  of  but  a  single  scale.  For  another  striking 
example  let  us  seek  the  seed  of  our  ordinary  milk- 
weed or  silk  grass.  We  may  find  the  ovaries  bursting 
open  in  autumn  and  revealing  the  bundles  of  seeds 


176  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

within  each  bearing  a  tuft  of  silvery  hairs  of  almost 
indescribable  beauty.  The  seed  itself  is  flattened, 
and  the  surface  roughened  by  numerous  projecting 
points.  The  seed  is  borne  away  by  the  breath  of  the 
wiud,  though  it  be  but  the  gentlest  zephyr,  and  when 
deposited,  it  falls  and  is  sown  after  the  manner  of 
the  dandelion  already  described.  The  seeds  of  some 
plants  are  so  minute  that  their  very  smallness  insures 
their  transportation;  of  such  a  kind  are  the  spores  of 
mosses,  lichens  and  ferns;  they  seem  to  find  their 
way  everywhere  from  the  mountain  top  to  the  deep- 
est caverns  of  the  earth.* 

The  seeds  of  maple,  elm,  box-elder,  ash  and  pine 
are  provided  with  wing-like  expansions  to  aid  in 
transportation,  while  others  are  wrapped  in  a  cottony! 
or  woolly  covering,  as  is  the  case  with  the  willow  and 
poplar  families  of  plants,  and  by  these  means  they 
are  borne  from  place  to  place. 

In  the  case  of  plants  whose  seeds  are  not  adapted 
for  long  journeys,  arrangements  no  less  remarkable 
and  perfect  are  made  to  secure  a  proper  distribution 
and  scattering  of  the  seed  over  less  extended  areas. 
The  jewel- weed,  sometimes  also  called  snap-weed, 
and  by  others  very  appropriately  named  touch-me- 
not,  is  a  common  little  plant  in  many  parts  of  Europe; 

*  Mr.  Swartz,  a  reliable  traveler  and  observer,  states 
that  he  found  in  Jamaica  many  species  of  mosses  and 
ferns  identical  with  those  common  to  the  northern  part  of 
Europe,  though  all  other  plants  were  new  and  peculiar. 

t  The  raw  cotton  of  commerce,  which  is  reckoned  among 
the  most  valuable  productions  of  the  vegetable  kingdom, 
is  the  downy  covering  of  the  seeds  of  the  cotton  plant. 


WANDERING  SEEDS.  177 

and,  though  less  common  here,  it  is  of  so  remarkable 
and  interesting  a  nature  as  to  merit  at  least  a  men- 
tion. Its  seeds,  five  in  number,  are  attached  to  a 
carpel  or  seed  case;  at  maturity  the  attachment 
becomes  very  highly  elastic,  ready  to  break  loose  at 
the  slightest  touch.  When  shaken  or  in  any  way 
disturbed  they  coil  themselves  with  a  sudden  jerk 
and  scatter  the  seeds  to  a  considerable  distance. 
The  seeds  of  the  so-called  lady's  slipper  and  of  the 
sweet-pea  are  scattered  when  ripe  in  an  analagous 
way  by  the  elasticity  of  their  capsules. 

The  squirting  cucumber  is  even  more  peculiar  than 
these  in  its  method  of  scattering  its  seeds.  As  it 
ripens,  the  fruit  becomes  filled  and  finally  distended 
with  a  watery  juice;  soon  the  pressure  becomes  so 
great  that  the  cucumber  breaks  loose  from  the  stalk 
at  the  point  of  attachment,  the  mingled  water  and 
seeds  being  projected  through  the  orifice  with  suf- 
ficient force  to  carry  them  a  great  distance. 

Nearly  all  wandering  seeds  manifest  decided 
preferences  for  fine,  dry  weather,  the  parent  plants 
seem  willing  to  release  their  winged  progeny  only  at 
such  times.  There  is  consequently,  less  liability  of 
moisture  being  condensed  upon  the  wings  or  the 
downy  attachments  of  the  seed  and  thus  impeding 
its  progress.  A  notable  exception  ought  to  be 
recorded  to  this  rule,  so  marked,  in  fact,  that  it  tes- 
tifies, as  strongly  as  the  general  tendency  from  which 
it  differs,  to  an  Omniscient  design.  The  desert  ice 
plant,  found  on  dry  and  sandy  plains,  opens  its  seed 
capsules  during  the  wet   seasons,   for  only  at  such 

13 


178  FIRST  BOOK  OF   NATURE. 

times,  in  places  naturally  parched,  would  there  be 
sufficient  moisture  to  promote  germination. 

But  aerial  travel  is  not  the  only  mode  of  trans- 
portation employed  by  vegetable  seeds  in  their  wan- 
derings; they  go  also  by  water  and  by  land.  Most 
seeds  are  snugly  wrapped  in  impermeable  coverings, 
within  which  they  can  safely  remain  submerged  for 
a  long  time.  Seeds  of  semi-tropical  plants  are  fre- 
quently cast  ashore  on  the  northern  coasts,  and 
would  doubtless  grow  there  but  for  the  severity  of 
the  climatic  conditions.  The  seeds  of  many  aquatic 
plants  are  known  to  be  carried  on  the  feathers  of 
water  fowl  to  distant  lakes  and  rivers. 

Now  let  us  look  at  the  seed  of  a  burdock  plant — 
the  burdock  button,  as  we  call  it,  though  it  is  doubt- 
ful if  buttons  made  after  such  a  pattern  would  be 
at  all  desirable.  These  prickly  seeds  are  liter- 
ally covered  with  sharp  hooks  and  barbs,  by  which 
they  become  attached,  and  firmly  too,  to  the  hair  or 
wool  of  animals  that  may  come  in  contact  with  the 
plant.  See  the  condition  of  horses  and  cattle  as 
they  come  in  from  their  winter  range,  their  manes 
and  tails  matted  with  burs — not  a  very  pleasing 
spectacle,  it  is  true — they  are  at  such  times  unwilling 
agents  in  the  employ  of  eager  plants,  seemingly 
anxious  to  give  their  offspring  a  start  in  life.  When 
the  wool  or  hair  is  shed,  perhaps  far  from  the  mother 
plant,  the  seed  reaches  the  ground  where  it  subse- 
quently germinates  and  establishes  a  new  home.  Or 
as  it  frequently  happens,  the  animal  may  be  killed, 
and  its  hide  sent  to  distant  parts,  even  across  the 


WANDERING   SEEDS.  179 

ocean,  where  by  cleaning,  the  seeds  are  set  free  to 
grow  afresh. 

Many  birds  feed  largely  on  seeds  and  small  fruits; 
which  in  some  cases  are  so  thoroughly  protected  by 
hard  and  tough  outer  coats  or  shells,  that  they 
resist  for  a  long  time  the  action  of  the  digestive 
fluids  within  the  body  of  the  bird,  and  may  be 
deposited  aad  grown  in  distant  parts.  Amateur 
gardeners  in  southern  Europe  are  in  the  habit  of 
shooting  migratory  birds  that  are  just  returning  in 
the  early  spring  from  more  southern  climes,  for  the 
sake  of  obtaining  the  foreign  seeds  within  their 
stomachs. 

Dr.  Sumner  states  that  the  Hollanders,  being 
unable  to  retain  their  possession  of  the  Spice  Islands 
determined  to  abandon  them,  but  before  doing  so, 
they  jealously  rooted  out  the  nutmeg  plants,  which 
formed  in  fact  the  most  valuable  production  of  the 
islands.  The  birds,  however,  administered  a  striking- 
rebuke  to  such  cupidity,  by  soon  disseminating 
the  nutmeg  seeds  over  the  land.  Such  a  case  shows 
but  the  selfish  ignorance  of  man;  the  Creator  dis- 
plays His  wise  power  through  the  humblest  instru- 
ment, but  accomplishes  His  purposes  in  all  their 
righteous  fulness.  The  currents  of  the  sea,  the 
breezes  of  the  land,  the  birds  and  the  beasts  and 
even  men  are  unconsciously  acting  in  the  service  of 
an  all-directing  power,  and  do  much  to  diversify  and 
beautify  the  earth  by  carrying  the  ovules  of  flowers 
and  fruits  from  place  to  place. 


180  FIRST  BOOK   OF  NATURE. 

CHAPTER    XXXV. 

PARASITIC    PLANTS. 

3$SS  PARASITE,  whether  among  men,  animals 
&fo®  or  plants,  is  an  individual  who  contrives  to 
j^5  live  at  the  expense  of  another.  And  many 
y  such  are  to  be  met  with  in  the  vegetable 
kingdom.  As  we  have  already  seen,  the  root  is  the 
organ  by  which  the  plant  obtains  its  food  from  the 
soil;  but  there  are  some  plants,  which,  instead  of 
developing  roots  of  their  own  and  striking  into  the 
earth,  manage  to  become  attached  to  larger  plants 
and  rob  them  of  their  juices. 

Such  for  instance  is  the  case  with  the  majestic 
mistletoe,  with  which  we  are  most  familiar  from  the 
interesting  rites  attending  it  at  Christmastide.  This 
plant  is  a  true  parasite  on  the  oak  tree,  striking  a 
kind  of  root  into  the  branches  or  stem  of  its  host, 
and  abstracting  the  juices  and  sap  therefrom. 

The  common  dodder — of  tantalizing  frequency  in 
many  gardens  and  fields,  is  another  of  the  kind.  In 
the  early  part  of  its  existence  it  appears  to  be  a  per- 
fectly natural  and  well-behaved  plant,  rising  from  a 
seed  within  the  soil  as  other  respectable  vegetables 
do;  but  it  is  by  nature  a  climbing  plant,  and  to  assist 
itself  in  its  ascent,  it  twines  itself  about  the  body  of 
any  other  plant  that  may  be  near  at  hand.  It 
tightens  its  hold  upon  the  supporting  plant  from  the 
first,  and  finally  becomes  entirely  parasitic,  taking 
the  juices  of  its  living  prop,  and  ceasing  to  absorb 


PARASITIC   PLANTS.  181 

food  for  itself  from  the  soil.  At  such  time  it  may  be 
severed  near  the  ground  from  its  root  without  detri- 
ment, as  it  no  longer  supports  itself. 

A  much  smaller,  and  in  fact  a  more  unwelcome 
form  is  the  potato-blight,  which  frequently  occurs  in 
such  profusion  as  to  destroy  the  entire  potato  crop 
through  very  large  districts.  The  spores  (correspond- 
ing to  the  seeds  of  larger  plants)  from  which  this 
growth  is  developed,  are  extremely  small,  and  may 
be  borne  by  the  wind  or  through  the  medium  of 
water  to  the  potato  plant,  upon  which  they  immedi- 
ately begin  to  grow.  They  attach  themselves  to  the 
leaves  of  the  potato  plants,  by  sending  off  little 
threads  corresponding  to  roots,  which  penetrate  the 
tissue  of  the  leaves  and  stems  by  passing  between 
the  fibres  and  the  cells;  and  succeed  in  stealing  away 
the  juices  and  the  sap,  resulting  before  long  in  the 
ruin  of  the  plant.  The  potato-blight  has  many 
relatives,  all  extremely  small,  and  all  growing 
with  rank  luxuriance  under  favorable  conditions. 
Some  infest  one  particular  kind  of  plant  and  others 
are  found  on  many.  We  are  familiar  with  those  that 
grow  on  wheat,  rye,  barley,  Indian  corn  and  the  like, 
of  which  we  speak  as  vast,  smut,  mildew,  ergot,  etc. 
The  black  or  brown  dust  to  be  seen  in  grain  smuts  is 
composed  of  innumerable  spores  of  these  parasites, 
each  of  which  under  proper  conditions  may  develop 
and  thrive  to  infest  future  grain  crops,  though  some 
seasons  seem  much  more  favorable  than  others  to 
such  growths. 

There  is  an  unknown  number  of  microscopic  plant^ 


182  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

all  interesting  and  instructive  in  their  structure  and 
growth.  A  very  common  form  is  the  mildew  or  mould, 
so  common  on  damp  leather,  old  shoes,  bread  and 
vegetables  that  have  attained  a  venerable  age,  fruits 
and  preserves  and  the  like.  There  also  are  plants, 
growing  in  much  the  same  way  as  the  potato-blight 
by  absorbing  nourishment  from  the  substances  to 
which  they  are  attached.  If  we  examine  such,  even 
with  an  ordinary  pocket  lens,  the  patch  of  mildew 
becomes  transformed  into  a  beautiful  forest,  like 
those  we  read  of  as  existing  in  fairy-land,  wherever 
that  may  be.  There  are  the  stems,  looking  like 
trunks  of  trees,  and  bearing  the  spore  cases,  not 
unlike  the  ripened  seed  capsules  of  the  garden  poppy, 
each  rilled  with  spores. 

Moulds  seem  to  grow  almost  everywhere,  often 
springing  up  without  apparent  cause,  so  that  some 
people  have  imagined  that  they  originate  spontan- 
eously from  the  materials  upon  which  they  are  found 
growing.  Such  an  idea  is  erroneous.  Though  but 
simple  in  structure  and  with  very  few  parts  when 
compared  with  the  apple  tree  and  the  oak,  that  little 
patch  of  mildew  is  still  a  colony  of  perfect  living  organ- 
isms, and  such  can  only  originate  from  germs  or  seeds 
of  their  own  kind.  But  whence  came  the  spores  of  these 
musty  moulds  on  our  walls  and  books  and  every- 
where. The  microscope  again  comes  to  our  aid  and 
shows  us  that  the  air  in  nearly  all  places  is  heavily 
laden  with  the  tiny  spores  of  these  fungi;  which 
indeed  are  so  fine  that  they  are  borne  about  through 
£he  air  without  our  knowledge,  but  as  soon  as  they 


PARASITIC  PLANTS.  183 

fall  in  any  still  damp  place,  affording  proper  nourish- 
ment, at  once  they  begin  to  grow. 

Man  is  as  utterly  unable  by  his  own  knowledge 
and  instrumentality  to  originate  a  tiny  patch  of 
green  mould,  as  he  is  to  raise  an  oak  tree  from  the 
soil  without  first  planting  the  acorn.  Every  plant 
and  every  animal  increases  after  its  kind,  and  only 
so. 


Part    III. 

The    Mineral   or    Stone   Kingdom. 


"Aly  heart  is  awed  within  me,  when  I  think 
Of  the  great  miracle  which  still  goes  on 
In  silence  round  me — the  perpetual  work 
Of  Thy  creation,  finished,  yet  renewed 
Forever." 


CHAPTER    XXXVI. 

ROCKS   AND    STONES. 

!HUS  far  in  the  course  of  this  little  book  we 
have  directed  our  attention  to  the  study  and 
observation  of  animals  and  plants,  the  two 
great  and  natural  divisions  of  living  things. 
It  will  be  remembered  that  these  were  spoken  of  as 
two  of  the  three  great  kingdoms  of  Nature,  the 
Mineral  Kingdom  being  the  third,  and  about  this 
thus  far  we  have  said  nothing.  The  mineral  king- 
dom includes  all  those  natural  objects  that  are  with- 
out life,  such  as  stones,  metals  and  their  ores.  These 
do  not  grow  and  increase  as  do  things  that  live;  they 
do  not  feed  or  feel;  in  short,  they  are  dead.  Com- 
mon and  unattractive  things  these  stones  seem  to  us 


ROCKS  AND  STONES.  185 

at  most  times,  devoid  of  the  beauteous  form  of  leaf 
and  flower,  and  showing  none  of  the  winning  traits 
of  our  animal  friends.  Yet  we  may  find  the  stones 
capable  of  teaching  most  valuable  lessons  to  those 
who  are  willing  to  learn. 

Stone  or  Bock  is  the  material  of  which  the  earth's 
crust  is  composed;  in  small  masses  this  is  called  stone, 
in  larger  ones,  rock.* 

Thus  even  layers  of  soil  and  loose  bodies  of  sand 
and  clay  would  be  termed  rock  in  referring  to  the 
structure  of  the  earth's  crust. 

There  seem  to  be  so  many  different  kinds  of  stone, 
that  one  feels  to  despair  of  the  hope  of  finding  out 
much  about  each;  but  we  have  already  met  a  similar 
difficulty  in  speaking  of  animals  and  vegetables — 
their  name  was  "legion"  too;  and  yet  we  have  been 
able  to  classify  them  in  companies,  each  comprising 
such  as  resembled  one  another  in  most  respects;  and 
by  these  means  we  have  extended  our  understanding 
over  these  subjects  in  a  way  which  would  have  been 
impossible  under  other  conditions.  And  so  also  will 
it  prove  with  stones  and  rocks.  Look  for  instance  at 
the  cobble  stones,  such  as  lie  scattered  about  the 


*  A  very  common  application  of  the  word  "rock"  to 
stones  of  any  size  is  peculiar  to  certain  regions  of  the 
United  States.  In  other  parts  of  the  English  speaking 
world  such  a  lack  of  all  distinction  would  be  regarded 
with  disfavor;  and  to  speak  of  boys  throwing  "rocks"  at 
each  other,  one  writer  says,  would  be  regarded  as  "a 
supremely  ridiculous  expression."  To  be  precise  therefore 
we  should  speak  of  "stone"  when  meaning  a  small  mass 
of  rock,  and  of  "rock"  when  we  refer  to  very  large  stones. 


186  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

streets;  they  are  of  many  colors,  and  of  a  still  greater 
diversity  of  shape,  so  that  any  kind  of  a  classification 
based  upon  color  or  form  would  appear  to  be  nearly 
if  not  quite  impossible,  so  we  must  try  some  other 
means  of  distinction  aud  separation. 

Take  your  pocket-knife — a  stout,  blunt  blade  will 
be  the  best — and  try  to  scratch  with  it  several  of 
these  stones.  In  some  cases  you  will  succeed  in 
scoring  or  furrowing  the  surface  of  the  stone;  in 
others,  nothing  but  a  glistening  streak  appears 
— no  furrow,  no  indentation,  because  the  stone 
was  too  hard ;  the  shining  line  is  caused  by 
particles  of  the  steel  having  been  rubbed  off,  through 
the  superior  hardness  of  the  stone.  Now  chip  off  a 
small  piece  from  one  of  the  softer  kind,  and  a  piece 
also  from  one  of  the  hard  sort.  Provide,  then,  a 
small  vessel,  such  as  a  nappy  or  a  wine-glass,  half- 
full  of  strong  vinegar.  Put  the  fragment  of 
hard  stone  into  the  vinegar;  most  likety,  nothing 
sufficiently  striking  to  attract  our  attention  will 
occur,  unless  the  stone  be  porous,  in  which  case, 
several  bubbles  of  air  will  rise  through  the  liquid  as 
they  escape  from  the  pores,  but  this  will  very  soon 
cease. 

Now  place  the  bit  of  soft  stone  into  the  vinegar 
and  watch  again.  In  all  probability  there  will  appear 
to  be  a  very  great  disturbance  within  the  glass; 
bubbles  of  gas  escaping  from  the  stone  throw  the 
vinegar  into  violent  agitation,  so  that  it  appears  at 
first  sight  to  be  actually  boiling;  this,  however,  is  a 
delusion,  the  contents  of  the  glass  are  far  from  being 


ROCKS  AND  STONES.  187 

warm  enough  to  boil.  This  gas  which  is  escaping 
from  the  bit  of  stone  is  called  "carbon  dioxide";  it 
used  to  be  known  under  the  name  of  "carbonic  acid 
gas";  and  it  formed  in  reality  part  of  the  stone.  It 
has  been  imprisoned  within  the  hard  material  of  the 
rocky  mass  perhaps  for  centuries,  but  is  set  free  at 
once  through  the  action  of  the  vinegar.  If  the  stone 
had  been  ground  to  powder  before  being  added  to 
the  vinegar,  the  action  would  have  been  much  more 
violent,  perhaps  sufficiently  so  to  throw  the  liquid 
out  of  the  vessel.  The  bubbling  and  agitation  within 
the  vessel  would  be  all  the  more  striking  if  a  stronger 
acid  were  used  instead  of  the  vinegar.  Muriatic 
acid  or  sulphuric  acid  may  be  employed — the 
former  is  better;  a  small  quantity  of  either  may  be 
obtained  at  any  druggist's  establishment  at  a  low 
price.  Very  great  care  must  be  exercised  in  the  use 
of  these  acids.  They  are  both  exceedingly  poisonous 
and  corrosive,  but  this  is  especially  the  case  with 
sulphuric  acid  or  "oil  of  vitriol"  as  it  is  sometimes 
named.  A  single  drop  falling  on  the  dress  may 
produce  a  hole  in  the  cloth;  if  it  comes  in  contact 
with  the  flesh  it  will  result  in  painful  sores  unless 
washed  off  immediately;  and  if  accidentally  taken 
into  the  mouth  it  would  prove  a  rapid  and  fearful 
poison.  Strong  vinegar,  though  less  powerful  in  its 
action,  is  safer  for  our  present  purpose,  and  would 
better  be  used  in  testing  rocks,  except  by  those  who 
are  somewhat  used  to  handling  chemicals. 

Here,  then,  is  a  ready  distinction  between  several 
varieties  of   common    stones.      We  have  seen  that 


188  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

some  are  so  hard  that  a  knife  does  not  scratch  them, 
and  upon  these,  acids  have  no  effect;  these  are  termed 
siliceous  stones.  Then  we  have  spoken  of  others, 
which,  although  quite  hard,  can  yet  be  easily 
scratched  with  a  knife  blade,  and  upon  which  acids 
act  vigorously;  these  are  called  calcareous  stones. 
All  kinds  of  marble  and  limestone  belong  to  this 
second  class;  and  from  such  lime  is  made  by  burning 
(or  more  properly,  by  heating,  since  it  is  the  fuel  that 
burns  and  not  the  rock  itself).  Heat  will  set  free 
and  drive  off  the  carbon  dioxide  gas  contained  in 
the  stone  as  the  acid  did  in  our  little  experiment 
already  described;  and  after  this  gas  has  gone  from 
this  kind  of  stone,  lime  remains.  The  Romans  called 
lime  calx;  and  from  this  word  we  have  learned  to 
speak  of  all  rocks  that  yield  lime  when  heated,  as 
calcareous  rocks. 

We  may  find  many  stones,  however,  which  are  soft 
enough  to  be  readily  scratched  by  a  knife,  and  yet 
are  not  affected  by  acids  to  any  degree.  Such  for 
instance  would  be  the  case  with  stones  produced 
from  clay,  such  as  slates  and  the  like.  These  we 
may  call  clay  stones  for  the  present.  In  some  parts 
of  Utah  and  in  many  other  regions  we  may  find 
stones  so  soft  that  they  can  easily  be  scratched  by 
the  finger  uail,  and  are  not  acted  upon  by  acids  at 
all.  This  soft  material  is  called  gypsum  or  plaster 
stone.  The  latter  name  is  given  from  the  fact  that 
if  such  stones  be  placed  in  a  kiln  and  heated,  steam 
would  escape  instead  of  carbon  dioxide  gas;  and  in 
place  of  lime  the  so-called  plaster  of  Paris  is  formed 


ROCKS  AND  STONES.  189 

within  the  kiln.  This  substance  is  called  "plaster 
of  Paris"  because  it  was  first  produced  a  great  many 
years  ago  from  a  rock  found  near  Paris,  in  France. 
It  is  very  highly  prized  for  producing  the  fine  and 
smooth  hard  finish,  so  much  admired  on  the  inner 
walls  of  houses;  also  for  taking  impressions  and  casts 
of  various  objects.  When  mixed  with  water  so  as 
to  form  a  kind  of  paste  or  cream,  it  can  be  moulded 
or  poured,  and  soon  afterward  it  "sets"  or  becomes 
hard,  preserving  all  the  details  of  form  of  the  object 
by  which  it  was  shaped. 

Gypsum  exists  in  great  quantities  and  in  a  wide 
variety  of  forms  in  many  parts  of  our  mountain 
regions.  Beautiful  specimens  of  transparent  gypsum 
(called  from  their  lustre  ''selenite,"  meaning  like  the 
moon)  may  be  found  in  many  parts  of  Sanpete 
County,  in  the  hills  around  Manti  and  Gunnison, 
also  in  Salina  Canon,  Sevier  County;  and  immense 
deposits  of  uncrystallized  gypsum  or  plaster  stone  are 
found  near  Nephi,  Juab  County,  in  Kane  County, 
and  in  many  other  parts. 

We  have  learned,  then,  to  recognize  these  four 
classes  of  stones:  siliceous,  calcareous,  clay  and 
plaster  stones,  whenever  we  meet  with  them;  and 
these  are  the  commonest  we  will  be  likely  to  find  on 
the  surface  of  the  ground.  These  are  simple  stones, 
so  named  from  the  fact  that  each  one  of  them  con- 
sists of  but  one  kind  of  material,  but  there  are  many 
others  more  complicated  in  structure,  each  con- 
sisting of  several  kinds.  Examine  a  piece  of 
granite,  for  instance,  it  is  a  common  kind  of  stone,  and 


190  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

will  be  recognized  by  most  of  our  readers  without 
difficulty.  It  is  of  this  beautiful  and  enduring 
material  our  great  temple  in  Salt  Lake  City  is  built. 
Even  a  hasty  glance  shows  this  to  consist  of 
several  distinct  constituents;  there  are  some  white 
pieces  scattered  through  the  rock  which  prove  to  be 
very  hard;  a  knife  does  not  scratch  them,  and  acid 
cannot  affect  them;  these  are  pieces  of  siliceous  stone 
usually  called  quartz;  then  there  is  another  kind  of 
material  to  be  seen,  usually  flesh-colored  or  white, 
and  showing  brilliant  faces  if  held  toward  the  light, 
so  as  to  reflect  as  a  mirror  would;  this  is  called 
feldspar;  and  then  there  are  some  darker  specks,  in 
reality  little  scales,  and  are  called  mica.  Granite, 
then,  consists  of  three  simple  rocks,  mingled  and 
solidified  together — quartz,  feldspar  and  mica.  We 
shall,  perhaps,  find  other  stony  mixtures  of  this  kind, 
if  we  look  about  us.  With  the  aid  of  our  little 
pocket  magnifying  glasses  we  will  be  able  to  dis- 
tinguish the  ingredients  of  most  of  the  common 
ones. 


CHAPTER   XXXVli. 

PEBBLES    AND   WHAT   THEY    HAVE   TO   TELL. 

iNLY  a  pebble  from  the  brook!     Look  at  it  with 
%   care — rounded  and   worn,    it   looks   old,    and 
indeed  it  is.     Without  doubt  it  has  existed  in 
that  state  for  a  very  great  time — longer  than 
any  of  us  have  lived  on  earth.     If  it  had  a  tongue 


PEBBLES.  191 

and  could  'talk  to  us,  that  rough-looking  stone 
would  have  strange  stories  to  tell  of  its  past 
history.  I  would  like  very  much  to  ask  it  how 
it  came  here,  what  gave  it  that  smooth  surface  and 
rounded  form,  and  how  it  is  that  there  are  so  many 
different  sizes  and  shapes  of  pebbles,  and  so  on. 

It  has  certainly  gone  through  a  polishing  process, 
and  the  mill  in  which  this  was  carried  on,  was  in  fact 
the  river  itself.  Look  at  the  stones  in  the  bed  of  a 
running  stream;  as  the  water  moves  they  are  con- 
stantly jostled  against  one  another  and  rolled  over 
and  over  and  knocked  together,  in  consequence  of 
which  they  become  smooth  and  round.  Fast  flowing 
water  is  able  to  move  much  greater  weights  than 
slow  streams,  and  therefore  only  small  pebbles  reach 
the  lower  parts  of  the  stream,  where  the  water  has 
become  spread  out  and  runs  but  slowly,  while  as  we 
follow  the  stream  toward  its  head  the  stones  in  its 
bed  become  larger  and  larger,  until  we  reach  the 
canons  in  which  the  river  has  its  source,  and  there 
we  find  large  boulders  in  the  course  of  the  stream. 
These  are  constantly  being  torn  loose  by  the  stream 
from  the  rocky  sides,  and  sometimes  they  fall  from 
the  overhanging  cliffs  and  thus  reach  the  river  bed, 
when  they  are  carried  along  grinding  and  being 
ground  as  they  go.  Here  then  is  the  source  of  our 
pebbles;  these  boulders  are  the  rocks  from  which  the 
smaller  stones  are  made.  This  is  an  answer  to 
the  first  of  the  questions  which  we  asked  of  the 
pebbles — as  to  how  they  came  to  the  place  at  which 
we  found  them. 


192  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

Not  all  stones  wear  away  with  the  same  rapidity 
as  they  descend  the  stream;  the  harder  kinds  will 
resist  the  grinding  process  much  longer  than  their 
softer  companions.  For  instance;  if  two  boulders, 
say  of  equal  size,  but  one  of  hard,  siliceous  rock,  and 
the  other  of  the  softer  calcareous  kind,  should  chance 
to  fall  into  the  stream,  together;  after  a  short  time, 
the  softer  rock  would  most  probably  be  so  worn  and 
reduced  in  size,  that  we  could  scarcely  recognize  the 
outlines  of  the  original;  whereas,  the  harder,  siliceous 
mass,  would  scarcely  have  changed  its  form  at  all. 

And  thus  we  obtain  the  answers  to  two  of  our 
questions  in  one — as  to  why  pebbles  are  of  so  many 
sizes  and  shapes,  and  what  gave  them  their  polished 
faces. 

The  author  was  very  much  interested  and  in- 
structed on  an  occasion  a  few  years  ago  by  a  short 
visit  to  a  large  establishment  in  the  East,  in  which 
boys'  marbles  are  made.  The  manner  in  which  the 
operation  is  carried  on  is  illustrative  of  pebble- 
making  and  polishing,  under  the  best  conditions. 
These  "marbles"  are  made  of  many  different  kinds 
of  stone,  the  best  being  of  marble  and  agate  and  the 
common  ones  of  limestone  and  slate.  But  one  kind 
of  material  is  used  at  any  one  time,  however.  The 
stone  is  first  broken  into  little  blocks,  all  of  about 
equal  size;  these  are  then  placed  in  a  large  cylinder 
or  drum,  which  is  made  to  revolve  by  steam  power, 
and  through  which  a  stream  of  water  is  kept  flowing. 
As  the  revolution  continues,  the  bits  of  stone  within 
the  cylinder  are  thrown  against  one  another  in  much 


PEBBLES.  193 

the  same  way  as  pebbles  are  on  the  bed  of  a  running 
river.  There  is,  however,  one  great  difference  between 
the  two  processes.  The  drum  turns  completely 
round,  and  in  consequence  the  blocks  of  stone  are 
jostled  and  rubbed  on  all  sides  equally,  and  thus  they 
become  shaped  into  almost  perfect  spheres;  whereas 
in  the  corresponding  operation  on  the  bed  of  the 
stream  the  grinding  is  far  less  uniform,  the  stones 
being  moved  by  the  force  of  the  stream  alone.  And 
furthermore,  as  the  river  stones  are  of  widely  varying 
size,  and  of  different  degrees  of  hardness,  there  is 
little  likelihood  that  perfect  spheres  will  be  produced. 
If  the  stones  be  longer  in  one  direction  than  another, 
and  especially  if  somewhat  flattened,  the  running 
stream  will  rather  slide  than  roll  them,  and  thus  the 
irregularity  would  be  increased. 

Pebbles  are  also  formed  in  great  numbers  on  the 
sea-shore.  Those  readers  who  have  visited  the  ocean 
edge  have,  without  doubt,  noticed  the  long,  sweeping- 
waves  rolling  up  the  beach  and  receding,  only  to 
return  and  again  retreat.  The  stones  upon  the 
beach  are  rolled  and  rubbed  by  this  wave  action  with 
truly  wonderful  force.  It  has  been  found,  from 
careful  observation,  that  the  beach  moves  to 
the  depth  of  over  two  feet,  and  the  grinding 
sound  produced  can  be  heard  at  a  considerable  dis- 
tance from  the  shore.  An  interesting  calculation 
has  been  made  by  Prof.  Shaler,  on  the  distance 
traveled  in  this  to  and  fro  style  by  an  ordinary  sea- 
side stone  during  the  day.  He  says  "it  travels  in 
time  of  calm  a  little  distance  every  time  the  wave 

14 


194  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

strikes,  and  as  this  is,  say,  six  times  a  minute,  the  stone 
moves  a  few  feet  (we  may  average  the  distance  at 
ten  feet)  in  all  weathers,  they  would  thus  travel 
between  twelve  and  fifteen  miles  a  day." 

But,  it  may  be  asked,  where  are  the  large  rocks 
from  which  these  sea-side  pebbles  are  made?  These 
are  really  detached  portions  of  the  coast,  broken  off 
by  the  action  of  the  waves  from  the  cliffs  against 
which  they  strike;  and  being  driven  by  the  force  of 
the  water  back  and  forth  upon  the  beach,  the  grind- 
ing process  goes  on  with  great  rapidity,  the  debris 
worn  off  in  the  process  forming  sand  and  mud. 
Under  certain  conditions,  large  deposits  of  pebbles  and 
gravel  are  made  with  sand  or  mud,  and  the  stones 
are  bound  together  so  as  to  form  a  solid  mass  of  rock. 
Such  a  formation  is  called  conglomerate,  though,  if 
the  pebbles  be  rounded  and  smooth,  the  somewhat 
expressive  name  of  "pudding-stone"  is  bestowed 
upon  it.  The  cement  that  binds  the  pebbles  or 
gravel  together  becomes  as  hard  and  durable  as  the 
stones  themselves.  Many  of  our  local  canons  show 
extensive  formations  of  conglomerate. 

Such  is  a  little  of  that  which  the  pebbles  can  tell 
us.  Job,  the  great  prophet  of  patience  and  of  faith, 
once  said,  "stones  shall  speak;"  and  indeed  they  have 
done  so,  and  are  still  ready  to  talk  to  those  who  are 
willing  to  hear  and  to  learn.  But  they  do  not  use 
our  language  any  more  than  does  the  dog  whining  at 
his  master's  feet,  or  the  bird  singing  upon  its  perch. 
We  must  learn  to  understand  the  tongue  of  the 
rocks  and  stones  if  we  would  know  their  wondrous 


SAND  AND  SANDSTONES.  1&5 

secrets;  we  must  question  them  through  the  medium 
of  steady  and  prayerful  examination;  they  will 
answer  more  by  looks  than  sounds  it  is  true,  and  the 
mind  must  act  as  interpreter  between  their  language 
and  ours. 


CHAPTER  XXXVIII. 

SAND   AND    SAND-STONES. 

tE  HAVE  already  discovered  how  sand  is 
formed ;  it  is  by  the  breaking  up  and  wear- 
ing away  of  certain  kinds  of  rocks  through 
the  means  of  river  currents  and  ocean 
waves.  Let  us  gather  a  few  grains  of  sand,  and  see 
if  they  differ  in  any  other  respect  than  that  of  size 
from  the  larger  pebbles  about  which  we  have  already 
spoken.  Yes,  there  are  many  differences;  these  bits  of 
sand  have  sharp  edges  in  spite  of  all  the  wearing  and 
bruising  to  which  they  have  been  subjected  during 
the  long  period  of  their  preparation;  in  hardness 
they  compare  favorably  with  the  hardest  of  common 
pebbles.  These  tiny  grains  are  altogether  too  small 
to  allow  scratching  with  a  knife  to  ascertain  their 
relative  hardness;  but  we  may  reach  the  same 
result  in  another  way.  By  rubbing  a  pinch  of  sand 
on  a  piece  of  glass,  the  glass  will  be  easily  cut  and 
scratched,  proving  the  hardness  of  the  sand.  Now, 
place  some  sand  in  a  little  strong  vinegar  or  other 
acid,  as    we  tested  the   bits  of  stone  in    a   former 


196  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

experiment;  there  will  be  no  bubbles  of  escaping  gas 
to  be  seen.  The  liquid  seems  to  have  little  or  no 
effect  upon  the  sand.  We  are  justified  in  conclud- 
ing that  sand  grains  are  really  broken  and  angular 
fragments  of  siliceous  stone.  Being  so  very  hard 
these  little  grains  do  a  great  deal  toward  grinding 
larger  stones  when  driven  along  b)r  water  or  wind. 
This  operation  has  been  imitated  by  man  to  his  own 
advantage  in  grinding  and  polishing  various  objects 
for  ornament  and  use.  The  beautiful  figures  so  much 
admired  on  ornamental  glassware,  are  usually  pro- 
duced by  the  cutting  action  of  sand,  which  is  driven 
through  a  small  pipe  by  a  blast  of  air  or  steam  with 
very  great  force  against  the  surface  to  be  etched, 
producing  the  roughened,  frosted  appearance,  which 
contrasts  so  strikingly  with  the  smooth  and  unworn 
parts.  * 

A  similar  operation  on  a  stupendous  scale  may  be 
observed  in  the  case  of  desert  sand-storms;  and  the 
remarkable  effects  of  such  action  are  visible  in  many 
parts  of  our  territory.  A  simple  current  of  air,  though 
moving  with  the  velocity  of  a  hurricane,  could  have  but 
very  little  effect  upon  the  face  of  a  rocky  cliff  against 
which  it  may  strike;   but  if  the  wind  bears   sand 

*  Prof.  Dana  tells  us  that  the  glass  in  the  windows  of 
houses  at  Cape  Cod  on  the  Atlantic  coast  is  worn  through 
by  the  beating  of  the  wind-driven  sand.  Not  only  is  glass 
ground  and  etched  as  described  above,  but  also  precious 
stones  and  even  granite.  "In  this  way,"  says  the  author- 
ity above  quoted,"  the  deep  carvings  of  a  granite  frieze 
have  been  made  in  six  hours,  that  would  have  required 
two  months  of  work  by  hand." 


SAND   AND   SANDSTONES.  197 

upon  its  wings,  each  little  grain  strikes  like  a  minia- 
ture bullet  against  the  obstruction  and  thereon 
leaves  its  mark.  All  the  softer  parts  of  the  rock  will 
soon  be  worn  away  and  the  cliff  presents  before  long  a 
rough  and  weather-beaten  appearance.  In  time  the 
hardest  rock  will  yield  to  the  incessant  battering  of 
this  wind-driven  sand.  Those  of  us  who  have  ever 
traveled  through  the  truly  beautiful  Clear  Creek 
Canon,  leading  from  Joseph  City,  Sevier  Co.,  to 
Beaver,  Utah,  cannot  fail  to  have  beheld  and  admired 
the  fantastic  cliffs,  which  form  the  canon  walls,  and 
which  owe  their  curious  forms  mostly  to  the  action  of 
sand-laden  winds.  This  is  but  one  instance  among 
many  of  local  interest;  the  cliffs  about  Richfield, 
Sevier  Co.  and  indeed  the  hills  throughout  Iron, 
Kane,  and  Washington  Counties  of  this  Territory, 
all  bear  unmistakable  evidence  of  their  battle  with 
the  sand. 

In  some  places  the  sand  is  so  fine  that  it  is  borne 
to  very  great  distances,  and  there  perhaps  deposited 
in  large  bodies,  called  sand  banks,  or  dunes.  These 
are  common  in  the  neighborhood  of  sandy  ocean 
beaches  and  in  deserts.  On  the  sea  shore  such  dunes 
frequently  attain  a  height  of  a  hundred  feet  and  an 
unbroken  length  of  miles.  On  the  coast  of  Norfolk, 
England,  the  sand  drifts  have  advanced  inland  so  as 
to  completely  bury  farms  and  houses.  The  church 
spire  of  the  little  town  of  Eccles  is  about  all  that  is 
left  exposed  to  mark  the  spot  of  the  buried  burg. 

Many  beautiful  sand  dunes  may  be  seen  in  the 
desert  regions   of   northern   Arizona.     In    traveling 


198  FIRST   BOOK   OF1  NATURE. 

from  the  little  town  of  Orderville,  Utah,  to  Pipe 
Springs  Fort — the  one  oasis  in  the  arid  wilderness 
beyond  which  lie  the  Buckskin  Mountains — the  ever 
shifting  sand  dunes  form  an  impressive  spectacle. 
The  golden  sand  is  piled  up  in  a  way  no  less  beautiful 
than  wonderful.  Whenever  the  wind  blows,  more 
sand  is  brought  to  add  to  the  enormous  store,  or 
some  is  taken  from  the  banks  to  increase  the  deposit 
in  other  parts. 

Where  great  quantities  of  sand  have  been  deposited 
by  water,  year  after  year,  the  pressure  upon  the 
lower  layers  becomes  so  great,  as  to  solidify  the  loose 
material  into  a  compact  mass  of  rock.  This  is  the 
sandstone  so  common  in  most  parts  of  the  earth,  and 
so  useful  to  man  for  building  and  other  purposes.. 
Sandstones  are  of  varying  degrees  of  compactness, 
depending  upon  the  intensity  of  pressure  to  which 
the  sedimentary  masses  have  been  subjected,  and  to 
the  presence  or  absence  of  heat  during  the  process. 
Some  are  so  friable  as  to  be  readily  reduced  to 
powder  between  the  fingers,  and  others  are  so  hard 
that  they  can  be  shaped  only  by  saw  and  chisel.  If 
the  grains  are  not  alone  pressed  together,  but  also 
cemented  more  or  less  perfectly  through  the  aid  of 
heat,  so  that  the  separate  bits  from  which  it  was 
originally  formed  cannot  be  detected,  even  by  the 
aid  of  the  magnifying  glass,  we  call  such  rock 
quart zite,  and  many  siliceous  stones  of  our  streams 
and  mountains  are  of  this  kind. 


MUD   AND    MUD-STONES.  199 

CHAPTER   XXXIX. 

MUD    AND    MUD-STONES. 

OW  let  us  turn  our  attention  for  a  short  time 
J&JJ  to  the  state  of  ordinary  mud,  so  common 
everywhere.  According  to  the  definition 
already  given  of  the  term  "rock"  in  its 
widest  sense,  mud  is  a  variety  of  rock,  and  forming 
as  large  a  proportion  of  the  surface  foundation  as  it 
does,  it  is  certainly  of  sufficient  importance,  to  claim 
a  few  minutes  of  our  study,  during  a  life-time. 
Mud  is  oftentimes  in  so  fine  a  condition,  that  it 
scarcely  feels  gritty,  when  rubbed  between  the 
fingers.  It  is,  in  fact,  the  smallest  subdivision  of 
rock,  and  is  formed  through  the  battering  and  wear- 
ing operation  to  which  stones  are  subjected  in  the 
water-mill  already  described,  and  also  by  a  rotting 
or  decaying  process  of  the  rocks,  which  is  constantly 
going  on,  upon  and  beneath  the  soil.  Plants  are 
continually  dying  in  the  soil,  and  the  remains  of 
their  bodies,  in  undergoing  decay,  produce  certain 
kinds  of  vegetable  acids  of  a  corrosive  nature, 
which  are  easily  dissolved  by  the  water  percolating 
through  the  soil.  This  acid  liquid  comes  then  in 
contact  with  rocks  within  the  ground,  and  hastens 
the  process  of  disintegration. 

By  digging  into  the  crust  of  the  earth  at  any 
place,  a  floor  of  solid  rock  will  be  found  underlying 
the  more  finely  divided  soil.  The  upper  part  of  this 
rock    foundation    is   generally   somewhat   soft   and 


200  FIRST  BOOK  fOF   NATURE. 

friable;  it  is  in  fact,  partly  decomposed,  and  in  this 
coudition,  has  been  named  "rotten  rock."  Below 
this,  the  hard,  solid  mass  is  encountered.  In  many 
places  the  soil  is  found  to  be  composed  of  the  same 
material  as  the  rock  upon  which  it  rests,  though  in  a 
divided  and  an  altered  form;  and  we  are  safe  in  con- 
cluding that  such  soil  was  once  a  continuous  part  of 
the  rock  below.  There  is  present  in  the  atmosphere, 
under  ordinary  conditions,  a  definite  amount  each  of 
watery  vapor,  and  of  carbon  dioxide  gas,  which  to- 
gether, exert  a  most  powerful  effect  in  disintegrating 
the  rocky  crust  of  the  earth. 

It  is  no  less  instructive  than  interesting  to  con- 
template the  stupendous  labor  that  is  often  accom- 
plished by  what  might  seem  to  us  the  weakest  of 
Nature's  forces.  The  action  of  frost  for  example,  is 
a  powerful  means  of  breaking  up  the  rocks.  We 
have  without  doubt  taken  notice  of  the  fact  that  in 
the  act  of  freezing,  water  swells  considerably,  so  that 
a  piece  of  ice  occupies  more  space  than  the  water 
from  which  it  was  formed.  This  principle  is  at  times 
rather  unpleasantly  demonstrated  to  us  by  the  burst- 
ing of  pitchers  and  bottles  that  had  been  left  with 
water  in  them  to  freeze.  As  water  percolates  through 
the  soil  it  enters  the  pores  and  crevices  of  the  stones 
and  rocks,  and  there  by  freezing  expands  with  sur- 
prising force,  and  accomplishes  the  bursting  asunder 
of  the  rocky  masses  on  a  mammoth  scale. 

Vegetation  on  the  surface  of  the  soil  does  much  to 
increase  and  assist  this  general  disintegration.  The 
first  roots  that  are  sent  off  by  the  growing  plant  are 


MUD  AND   MUD-STONES.  201 

as  thin  as  the  finest  hairs;  they  can  therefore  easily 
make  their  way  into  the  small  cracks  and  crevices  of 
the  rocks;  they  are,  however,  constantly  growing 
larger,  and  soon  completely  fill  the  spaces  in  the 
rocks,  finally  bursting  apart  the  rocky  walls.  Growing 
roots  have  been  known  to  separate  in  this  way 
immense  masses  of  stone;  they  act  like  stout 
wedges  driven  by  giant  hands.  In  cities,  immense 
paving  stones  have  been  lifted  and  the  foundations 
of  colossal  buildings  have  been  disturbed  through  the 
growth  of  the  roots  of  some  large  tree,  which  perhaps 
at  first  were  no  larger  than  hairs.  By  these  means 
the  rocks  are  broken  to  pieces,  and  prepared  for  the 
processes  of  finer  division  already  described.  And 
in  such  simple  though  effectual  ways  the  stony  cover- 
ing of  the  earth  is  reduced  to  the  finest  state,  and 
thus  forms  the  soil,  upon  which  depends  all  the 
higher  operations  of  life. 

Ordinary  mud,  though  fine  throughout  when  com- 
pared with  sand  or  gravel,  yet  consists  of  particles 
of  many  different  sizes.  Put  a  bit  of  mud  in  a  glass 
of  water,  then  stir  and  set  aside;  the  heavier  and 
coarser  particles  are  seen  immediately  settling  to  the 
bottom;  but  the  finer  bits  remain  suspended  in  the 
liquid  for  hours  or  even  for  days.  In  a  manner 
similar  to  this  the  pebbles,  sand,  and  mud  gathered 
by  rivers  in  their  flow  are  carried  and  distributed; 
the  heavier  bits  of  stone  being  deposited  first,  while 
the  fine  mud  is  borne  in  all  probability  low  down 
toward  the  mouth  of  the  stream.  Now  let  us  take  a 
wee  bit  of  this  mud,  spread  it  out  carefully  upon  a 


202  FIRST   BOOK   OF   NATURE. 

piece  of  glass,  a  saucer,  a  small  dish  or  anything  of 
the  sort,  and  look  at  it  through  a  pocket  lens;  we  will 
then  be  able  to  discover  clearly  the  bits  of  stone  of 
which  the  mud  consists.  It  is  a  complicated  mix- 
ture however;  there  would  be  found  almost  all  the 
kinds  of  stone  thus  far  spoken  of.  Such  mud  forms 
a  very  large  proportion  of  common  soil,  the  rest 
consisting  mostly  of  sand  and  the  decayed  parts  of 
plants.  A  fertile  soil  is  usually  composed  to  the 
extent  of  one  half  of  the  entire  mass  of  clay  and  mud 
grains.  But  much  of  the  mud  produced  by  the 
wear  and  decay  of  the  rocks  is  carried  by  the  rain 
water  and  by  other  means  into  the  rivulets  and  rivers, 
in  whose  capacious  bosoms  it  is  borne  onward  per- 
haps for  many  miles,  and  is  finally  deposited  as  large 
mud  flats  in  the  neighboorhood  of  the  river  mouths, 
or  on  the  bed  of  the  ocean  into  which  the  larger 
rivers  flow.  As  such  sediment  increases  in  depth 
year  after  year,  the  pressure  upon  the  lower  strata 
from  the  weight  of  the  overling  layers,  becomes  so 
great  that  their  particles  are  forced  together  into  a 
close  and  compact  mass.  Beside  these  effects,  that  of 
heat,  which  is  so  universally  present  in  the  deeper 
parts  of  the  earth,  must  be  considered.  By  this 
means  the  lowest  layers  of  sediment  may  be  partly 
softened  and  thus  be  brought  into  a  more  compact 
and  solid  state  than  ever.  In  this  way  are  the  mud- 
rocks  formed;  and  of  these  many  varieties  exist, 
some  of  great  practical  value  to  man,  such  as  the 
beautiful  slates  and  cleavable  shales  from  which  our 
roofing  plates  and  writing  tablets  are  made. 


ABOUT   LIMESTONES.  203 

The  rain  falling  upon  the  land,  then  running  off 
in  tiny  rills  into  the  flowing  streams,  and  carrying 
the  finer  parts  of  the  soil  along;  and  the  rivers 
moving  ceaselessly  onward,  laden  with  sediment, 
toward  their  destination  in  lake  or  sea,  thus  lay  the 
foundation  of  future  quarries,  from  which  will  come 
the  material  for  architectural  wonders  in  beautiful 
residences,  stately  churches  and  holy  temples. 


CHAPTER    XL. 

ABOUT    LIMESTONES. 

JIMESTONE  is  a  general  name  given  to  all  those 
rocks  of  the  earth  that  contain  lime;  the  lime 
y$  is  prepared  by  heating  such  rocks  in  a  kiln  by  a 
process  already  described.  They  all  belong  to 
the  calcareous  family  of  rocks,  and  yield  large  quan- 
tities of  carbon-dioxide  gas  when  acted  upon  by 
acids  or  subjected  to  great  heat.  It  is  estimated  that 
not  less  than  one-sixth  part  of  the  surface  rocks  of 
the  earth  consists  of  limestone.  This  material  exists 
in  almost  all  shades  of  color,  the  purest  kinds  being 
nearly  or  quite  white;  but  the  largest  deposits  of 
limestone,  such  as  form  in  many  places  the  bulk  of 
the  mountain  masses,  are  of  a  deep  blue  color;  and 
are  called  "blue  limestone." 

To  the  unaided  vision,  a  piece  of  limestone  appears 
to  be  composed  of  fine  particles  pressed  together 
in    the   manner   of  the    mud-rocks   and   sandstones 


204  FIRST  BOOK   OF  NATURE. 

spoken  of  before;  though  sometimes  the  outlines  of 
mollusk  shells  and  other  animal  remains  may  be 
discerned.  When  highly  magnified,  however,  a  bit 
of  limestone  is  seen  to  have  a  wonderfully  compli- 
cated and  interesting  structure.  There  we  see  the 
outlines  of  beautiful  shells,  some  oval,  others  circu- 
lar, and  of  many  other  symmetrical  forms,  with 
curious  markings  like  ornamental  lines  upon  their 
surfaces,  others  looking  like  radiating  stars;  in  fact 
there  appears  a  never  ending  variety  of  shape,  yet 
all  symmetrical  and  beautiful.  Limestone  really 
consists  of  the  consolidated  remains  of  these  minute 
organisms,  which  existed  in  unnumbered  variety  in 
bygone  times.  These  wonderful  little  rock-builders  are 
still  in  active  work  in  many  parts  of  the  world, 
especially  in  the  warm  seas. 

In  the  clear  and  salt  waters  of  the  tropical  oceans, 
corals  are  found  in  almost  endless  profusion.  The 
hard  and  solid  substance  which  we  ordinarily  call 
"coral,"  consists  really  of  the  shells  in  which  the 
coral  animals  lived.  These  tiny  creatures  have  the 
power  of  separating  from  the  sea-water  in  which 
they  live,  the  hard  materials  contained  therein,  and 
of  using  the  same  in  the  formation  of  their  calcare- 
ous homes.  Perhaps  this  process  is  in  great  part 
analogous  to  that  taking  place  within  the  human 
body,  by  which  certain  parts  of  the  food  are  digested 
to  form  hard  bones  and  teeth.  Coral  animals  belong 
to  the  class  of  polyps— &  word  meaning  "many- 
footed,"  and  given  as  a  name  to  these  little  beings 
because  when  in  active  life,  each  expands  around  the 


ABOUT  LIMESTONES.  205 

entrance  to  its  tiny  home,  a  number  of  radiating  arms 
or  tentacles,  usually  called  feet. 

These  polyps  live  together  in  very  great  num- 
bers, each  building  its  little  house  or  shell  in  contact 
with  others,  and  so  in  time  vast  masses  of  solid 
coralline  matter  are  formed.  As  the  animals  die, 
year  after  year,  others  build  upon  the  remains,  and 
thus  the  process  continues  uninterruptedly. 

These  little  beings  demonstrate  by  the  results  of 
their  ceaseless  growth  what  may  be  accomplished 
through  concerted  action  of  many,  though  each 
individual  performs  but  an  inconsiderable  part. 

The  greater  part  of  the  Florida  peninsula  con- 
sists of  the  remains  of  coral  polyps.  A  very  care- 
ful examination  of  that  region  has  convinced  scien- 
tific men  that  at  one  time  Florida  was  not  more  than 
half  its  present  length  from  north  to  south;  and  that 
it  has  grown  through  the  agency  of  corals,  by 
which  in  fact,  it  has  extended  over  two  hundred 
miles  toward  the  south;  and  the  area  of  land  thus 
added  to  the  continent  is  more  than  twenty  thousand 
square  miles.  Beside  corals,  there  are  many  other 
animals  that  form  for  themselves  such  calcareous 
shells. 

Chalk  (see  figure  23),  if  examined  with  the  mi- 
croscope, is  found  to  consist  almost  entirely  of  the 
skeletons  of  foraminifers — a  word  of  Latin  origin 
meaning  really  porous,  and  given  to  these  tiny 
inhabitants  of  the  water  from  the  fact  that  the  shells 
of  most  of  them  are  perforated  by  a  great  number  of 
passages  or  holes. 


206  FIRST   BOOK  OF   NATURE. 

Many  larger  animals  also  employ  this  power  of 
extracting  the  calcareous  matter  from  the  water  to 
form- their  coverings.  To  such  a  class  belong  the 
oyster,  clam  and  the  snail,  and  all  the  beautiful 
shells  so  much  admired,  belonging  to  the  order  of 
mollusks.  B}'  the  action  of  moving  water  these 
calcareous  formations  are  frequently  broken  to 
pieces  and  ground  to  powder,  by  which  the  larger 
shells  of  course  lose  their  original  form,  though  their 
mutilated  remains  may  frequently  be  recognized  in 
the  rocks  formed  from  such  material;  but  the  small- 
est of  shells  above  described  are  protected  from  de- 
struction by  their  very  fineness. 

In  the  dust  that  may  be  scraped  from  a  glazed 
card,  and  in  the  chalk  mark  left  upon  the  blackboard 
may  be  seen  such  tiny  monuments  of  past  life.  Some 
limestones  are  much  more  solid  and  compact  than 
others,  having  been  subjected  to  greater  degrees  of 
pressure  and  of  heat  in  the  process  of  formation. 
These  conditions  may  so  affect  the  rock  that  it 
becomes  of  a  crystalline  nature,  which  form  is  known 
and  prized  by  us  as  marble.  Of  this  beautiful  material 
there  are  again  many,  very  many  varieties;  of  almost 
every  known  shade  of  color  from  the  purest  white  to 
the  deepest  tint  of  jet.  The  whitest  marble  comes 
from  Carrara  and  the  island  of  Paros,  from  the  latter 
source  it  has  been  named  Parian  marble,  and  it  is 
highly  prized  for  statuary  purposes.  Small  quantities 
of  foreign  matters  mingled  with  the  rock  give  to  it 
a  mottled  or  clouded  appearance.  Man  has  great 
reason  to  prize  so    beautiful  and  valuable  a  stone, 


ABOUT  LIMESTONES.  207 

fitted  as  it  is  for  so  many  purposes  in  architecture 
and  art.* 

Many  of  the  mountain  ranges  of  the  globe,  the 
Appenines  and  the  Corderillas,  part  of  the  Rocky 
Mountain  system,  and  the  historical  Cliffs  of  Dover, 
are  built  of  the  calcareous  remains  of  animal  life. 
Years,  perhaps  centuries  ago,  these  tiny  architects 
reared  their  small,  though  beautiful  dwellings;  and 
proud  man  is  glad  to  erect  his  stately  edifices  from 
the  remains  of  their  worn-out  homes. 

The  massive  limestone,  marbles  and  chalk  already 
named,  are  the  most  widely  distributed  of  all  the 
calcareous  rock;  but  beside  these  there  are  many 
others.  A  semi-transparent  and  crystallized  variety 
is  called  calcite,  and  the  purest  kind,  which  is  trans- 
parent and  exists  in   regular  crystals,  has  received 

*  Ruskin  has  written  in  the  following  expressive  way: 
"What  are  marbles  made  for?  Over  the  greatest  part  of 
the  surface  of  the  earth  we  find  that  the  rock  has  been  prov- 
identially distributed  in  a  manner  particularly  pointing  it 
out  as  intended  for  the  service  of  man.  It  is  exactly  of 
the  consistence  which  is  best  adapted  for  sculpture  and 
architecture.  It  is  neither  hard  nor  brittle,  nor  flaky,  nor 
splintery,  but  uniform  and  delicately,  yet  not  ignobly  soft 
— exactly  soft  enough  to  allow  the  sculptor  to  work  it 
without  force,  and  trace  on  it  the  finest  lines  of  finished 
form;  yet  it  is  so  hard  as  never  to  betray  the  touch  or 
moulder  away  beneath  the  steel;  and  so  admirably  crys- 
tallized and  of  such  permanent  elements,  that  no  rains 
dissolve  it,  no  time  changes  it,  no  atmosphere  decomposes 
it;  once  shaped,  it  is  shaped  for  ever,  unless  subjected  to 
actual  violence  or  attrition.  This  rock,  then,  is  prepared 
by  Nature  for  the  sculptor  and  architect,  as  paper  is  by  the 
manufacturer  for  the  artist;  nay,  with  greater  care  and 
more  perfect  adaptation." 


208  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

the  name  of  Iceland  spar.  Then  there  is  another 
variety  called  oolite t  the  name  meaning  "eggstone," 
and  given  to  this  member  of  the  great  limestone 
family,  because  composed  of  numerous  rounded 
grains,  like  the  eggs  or  roe  of  a  fish.  Good  speci- 
mens of  oolite  are  obtainable  in  several  places 
in  Utah;  among  the  best  being  those  found  at  the 
temple  quarry,  Manti.  Marl  is  another  calcareous 
rock,  containing  a  considerable  proportion  of  clay, 
and  usually,  also,  whole  or  broken  shells.  Being  in  a 
loose  and  friable  condition,  it  very  readily  yields  to 
the  disintegrating  action  of  frost  and  rain,  and  so 
becomes  rapidly  incorporated  with  the  soil,  and  is 
used  extensively  as  a  fertilizer. 


CHAPTER  XLI. 

LIMESTONE    MADE    OVER. 

gj!&  T  will  readily  be  believed  from  what  has  already 
j§£j  been  said  regarding  the  formation  of  rock,  that 
the  materials  of  the  earth's  crust  are  under- 
going continual  change.  The  solid  canon  walls, 
and  the  stony  banks  of  streams  are  broken  and 
loosened  by  the  torrent  in  its  fury,  and  the  fragments 
are  hurled  onward  and  downward,  being  broken  and 
powdered  as  they  go  till  reduced  to  the  state  of  sand 
and  mud,  which  then  are  borne  by  the  waters  to 
quiet  places,  and  there  deposited  to  form  new  beds  of 
rock. 


LIMESTONE  MADE  OVER.  209 

Much  of  the  water  that  falls  upon  the  earth  as  rain 
and  snow,  runs  directly  off  the  surface  into  the  streams* 
but  a  portion  of  this  water  sinks  into  the  soil,  and 
there  accomplishes  a  great  labor  before  it  comes  to 
the  light  of  day  again.  We  all  know  that  water 
dissolves  many  substances  with  great  readiness.  A 
little  fine  sugar  or  salt  for  instance  if  placed  in  a 
vessel  of  water  very  soon  disappears  from  sight,  and 
seems  in  fact  to  have  been  absolutely  lost.  This  is 
not  possible,  however,  and  the  characteristic  taste  of 
the  water  after  the  solid  matter  has  disappeared 
shows  that  the  sugar  or  salt  is  still  there,  though  the 
solid  particles  are  suspended  or  dispersed  between 
those  of  the  liquid.  If  we  evaporate  the  water  by 
heat  or  other  means,  the  same  amount  of  solid 
material  as  was  originally  added  will  be  recovered. 
In  such  a  way  does  the  water  falling  naturally  upon 
the  rocks  and  soil  or  flowing  over  the  same  dissolve 
away  the  soluble  matters  and  carry  such  along  with 
it  in  its  descent  into  the  earth.  All  natural  waters 
contain  in  solution  more  or  less  of  solid  material, 
derived  from  the  soil  and  the  rocks  as  here  described. 
Look  for  an  example  on  the  inner  surface  of  a  much 
used  fire-kettle  or  steam  boiler;  a  hard  material, 
looking  not  unlike  stone  is  found  there;  this  was 
without  doubt  present  in  the  water  before  boiling, 
and  has  been  left  behind  as  the  liquid  evaporated. 

Pure  water  is  able  to  dissolve  limestone  to  a  very 
small  extent  only,  but  water  containing  carbon- 
dioxide  gas,  is  a  ready  solvent  of  all  kinds  of  calcare- 
ous material.     This  carbon-dioxide  is  known  to  be 

15 


210  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

present  at  all  times  in  the  atmosphere,  and  it  is  set 
free  within  the  earth  wherever  calcareous  rocks  un- 
dergo decomposition,  and  by  other  means,  so  that 
natural  water  contains  a  considerable  proportion  of 
this  gas.  Such  water,  then,  dissolves  the  limestone 
with  which  it  comes  in  contact;  and  as  it  comes  to  the 
surface  after  its  long  subterranean  journey  in  the  form 
of  springs,  it  is  frequently  so  heavily  charged  with  cal- 
careous matter,  that  as  the  carbon  dioxide  gas  escapes 
into  the  air  it  can  no  longer  retain  the  solid  material 
in  solution,  and  consequently  deposits  it  around  the 
mouth  of  the  spring,  forming  oftentimes  a  curb  about 
itself  or  even  a  large  mound.  This  is  a  very  common 
phenomenon  about  the  carbonated  springs  so  deserv- 
edly famous  in  this  region;  truly  beautiful  examples 
are  found  at  Soda  Springs,  Idaho,  and  in  the  won- 
derful water-pots  at  Midway,  Utah.  The  solid 
matter  in  such  waters  as  these  will  be  deposited  on 
any  object  placed  in  the  spring.  A  bunch  of  grapes 
kept  immersed  for  some  time  will  be  completely 
covered  with  a  layer  of  stony  matter;  before  long, 
however,  the  grapes  themselves  decay,  leaving  the 
original  plump  and  beautiful  form  represented  in  the 
stony  casing.  Flowers,  pine  cones,  baskets,  expanded 
fans,  and  objects  of  such  a  kind  are  frequently  sub- 
jected to  the  incrusting  process,  by  visitors  to  such 
springs,  and  carried  away  as  instructive  mementoes 
of  this  action  of  water.* 

*  The  process  above  described  is  not  an  example  of  pet- 
rifaction, in  which  the  particles  of  any  body  are  replaced 
as  fast  as  they  decay  by  solid  matter  dissolved  in  the  water; 


LIMESTONE   MADE    OVER,  211 

It  frequently  happens  that  water  in  seeking  a 
course  through  the  rocks  and  soil,  washes  out  for 
itself  wide  passages  and  enormous  caverns,  often- 
times at  very  great  distances  below  the  surface. 
Such  caves  are  common  in  limestone  formations  and 
prove  most  interesting  and  instructive  occurrences. 
Imagine  a  cavern  of  this  kind  existing  in  the  earth, 
and  water  trickling  in  through  the  sides,  having  in 
solution  much  solid  matter  which  it  has  dissolved  in 
its  course.  If  this  be  of  a  calcareous  nature,  it 
will  be  deposited  on  the  inside  of  the  cavern,  form- 
ing a  lining  and  ceiling  to  the  underground  room, 
often  of  the  purest  white.  A  drop  of  water  oozing 
through  the  ceiling  would  leave  a  part  of  its  solid 
matter  there,  then  falling  to  the  floor  would  evapor- 
ate and  so  deposit  the  rest;  and  thus  in  time  pen- 
dant rods  of  calcareous  matter  called  stalactite*,  are 
formed  on  the  ceiling  and  upright  pillars  known  as 
stalagmites  on  the  floor.  The  water  dripping  from 
the  point  of  a  hanging  stalactite  above,  would  fall 
of  course  in  a  straight  line  to  the  spot  directly 
below,  and  there  make  its  calcareous  contribution  to 
the  growing  stalagmite  so  that  the  stalactites  and 
stalagmites  form  in  pairs,  point  to  point.  Finally 
they  touch,  then  of  course  a  column  exists  from  ceil- 
ing to  floor,  down  which  the  water  runs  instead  of 
dripping  and  splashing  as  before;  it  evaporating  as 
it  flows,  and  leaves  its  dissolved  solids  year  by  year 


it  is  merely  an  incrusting  or  covering  of  the  object  which 
is  immersed  with  a  solid  layer;  the  particles  of  the  body 
itself  remaining  unchanged  in  other  respects. 


212  FIRST!  BOOK  OF   NATURE. 

to  increase  the  size  of  the  pillar.  But  few  spectacles 
can  be  imagined  that  surpass  in  impressive  brilliancy 
the  hangings  and  the  decorations  of  such  a  subter- 
ranean apartment;  what  architect  can  compete  with 
water  in  its  quiet  but  effective  style  of  building! 
Within  these  rocky  recesses  of  the  earth,  water  has 
erected  its  stately  pillars,  reaching  from  paved  floors 
to  frescoed  ceiling,  of  wondrous  beauty;  oftentimes 
these  have  formed  a  long  succession  of  chambers, 
with  majestic  archways  leading  from  one  to  the  other, 
passages  below  stupendous  architraves,  and  corridors, 
the  entrances  to  which  lie  through  colossal  gateways 
of  dazzling  purity.  The  walls  and  roofs  and  floors  all 
glisten  in  the  light  of  the  torch-fires  as  if  studded 
with  diamonds  and  sapphires — such  formations  are 
Nature's  palaces. 

Several  of  these  interesting  caverns  exist  in  Utah 
and  surrounding  regions;  there  are  the  Formation 
Caves  at  Soda  Springs,  Idaho,  the  Crystal  Grotto  near 
the  Mammoth  Mine  in  the  Tintic  Mining  District 
and  the  caverns  connected  with  the  Cave  Mine  and 
Pace  Mine  in  southern  Utah,  all  of  great  beauty, 
though  at  present  considerably  marred  and  defaced, 
through  the  spirit  of  vandalism  displayed  by  visitors 
to  these  beautiful  places. 

Very  large  and  wonderful  caves  exist  in  Tenuessee, 
of  which  the  Nicojack  Cave  is  the  best  known;  in 
Virginia  are  the  celebrated  Luray  Caverns;  but  by 
far  the  most  extensive  region  of  caves  yet  discovered 
in  the  United  States,  exists  in  Kentucky;  in  which 
State  there  is  a   district    of   country   nearly   eight 


LIMESTONE   MADE    OVER.  213 

thousand  square  miles  in  area,  the  surface  of  which 
is  the  ceiling  to  an  almost  continuous  series  of  sub- 
terranean caves.  Of  these,  the  deservedly  famous 
Mammoth  Cave  is  the  most  important.  It  is  so 
extensive  that  several  days  would  be  required  to 
explore  its  intricate  passages  and  capacious  chambers. 
The  entrance  to  the  wonderful  formation  is  through 
a  natural  archway,  having  a  span  of  seventy  feet. 
The  main  cavern  within  varies  from  forty  to  three 
hundred  feet  in  width,  and  from  thirty-five  to  a 
hundred  and  twenty-five  feet  in  height,  and  is 
divided  by  crystal  walls  into  several  large  rooms,  to 
most  of  which  expressive  names  have  been  given,  as 
"Rotunda,"  "Star  Chamber,"  and  the  like.  At  a 
place  within  the  cave,  situated  about  a  mile  under- 
ground, thirteen  little  cottages  have  been  built,  in 
which  visiting  tourists  and  invalids  used  to  pass  their 
leisure  time;  but  these  houses  have  now  fallen  into 
disuse  to  a  very  great  extent.  The  combined  length 
of  all  the  accessible  avenues  is  about  one  hundred 
and  fifty  miles.  The  walls  in  many  of  the  rooms 
and  passages  are  ornamented  with  stalactitic  tapestry, 
of  the  most  imposing  kind,  displaying  an  almost 
endless  variety  of  color,  and  a  radiant  beauty  beyond 
description. 

In  the  depths  of  these  dark  recesses  large  streams 
of  water  flow  with  great  velocity  and  force  toward 
their  hidden  destinations,  and  along  their  course 
they  frequently  leap  from  one  level  to  another, 
forming  grand  cascades  of  several  hundred  feet  fall. 
Within  these  caverns  there  have  been  found  several 


214  FIRST   BOOK   OF  NATURE. 

distinct  forms  of  animal  life;  twenty-eight  species 
have  been  already  described  as  truly  subterranean, 
beside  several  others  which  are  regarded  as  visitors 
from  the  outside.  A  peculiarity  of  all  animals 
native  to  those  dark  regions  is  that  they  are  without 
eyes, — not  even  a  rudimentary  apparatus  for  vision 
exists.  In  this  strange  circumstance  we  are  brought 
again  face  to  face  with  another  forcible  declaration  of 
Nature's  purposes —that  the  Creator  never  brings 
into  existence  a  useless  organ  nor  a  superfluous  form 
of  any  kind.  Eyes  would  have  been  of  no  practical 
use  in  places  such  as  these,  where  the  light  of  day 
cau  never  penetrate;  and  in  consequence,  visual 
organs  have  been  withheld,  and  by  the  same  Omnis- 
cient power  other  senses  of  these  animals,  especially 
that  of  touch,  have  been  wonderfully  strengthened. 
There  is  a  blind  fish  native  to  those  dark  streams, 
possessing  a  most  sensitive  power  of  touch  in  the 
parts  of  the  head  and  face;  there  is  too  a  wingless 
grasshopper,  with  its  antennae  so  excessively  long 
and  of  such  delicate  power,  that  we  may  with  good 
reason  think  this  high  development  of  the  sense  of 
touch  was  intended  by  the  Creative  mind  to  be  in 
a  degree  a  recompense  for  the  absence  of  vision. 

In  some  parts  of  Europe  very  large  caves  have 
been  found  containing  vast  quantities  of  bones,  many 
of  which  belonged  to  animals  not  now  living  on 
the  earth.  Such  caverns  were  doubtlessly  used  by 
the  savage  beasts  of  that  day  as  dens  and  retreats, 
into  which  they  dragged  the  animals  upon  which 
they  fed,  and  when  they  themselves  died  their  own 


ROCKS  FORMED  BY  HEAT.  215 

bones  were  added  to   those  of  their  victims,   thus 
preserving  these  relics  of  extinct  animals,  without 
which   science   to-day   would   embrace    but    scanty 
knowledge   of    those    curious   creatures.      Many  of 
such  caves  have  been  used  in  the  past  by  the  partly 
civilized  races  of  men  as  burial  places  for  their  dead. 
Within    these   vaults,    explorers   often   find   human 
skeletons  with  various  ornaments,  weapons,  and  uten- 
sils which  were  buried  with  the  bodies,  apparently 
according  to  a  custom  similar  to  that  now  practiced 
by  certain  tribes  of  Indians  and  others. 


CHAPTER  XLII. 

ROCKS    FORMED   BY    HEAT. 

l^LLthe.r°ck  formations  thus  far  studied  have 
been  in  some  way  associated  with  the  action 
of  water;    pudding-stones,    sandstones,  clay- 
stones,    slates,    and   calcareous    deposits    are 
all   indeed  sedimentary    in    their   origin.      Few   of 
us  have  traveled  far  in  this  Territory  without  notic- 
ing a  number  of  rocks  differing  much  in  general  ap- 
pearance from  any  thus  far  described.     Some  rocks 
are    found    containing    numerous    small    holes   or 
bubbles,  looking  very  much  as  if  produced  by  the 
escape  of  gas  or  steam  from  within,  and  in  all  their 
characteristics  they  appear  as  we  think  rocks  would 
that   had    cooled    from    an    originally   heated    and 
molten  state.     They  are  usually  called  igneous  rocks, 


216  FIRST  BOOK  OF   NATURE. 

for  this  reason.  The  name  signifies  literally  that 
they  have  been  produced  by  fire.  To  this  class 
belongs  the  lava  which  is  found  within  the  craters  of 
volcanoes  in  action,  and  poured  out  from  their 
heated  tops  in  molten  streams.  A  volcano  may  be 
defined  as  an  opening  in  the  crust  of  the  earth, 
through  which  rock  matters  of  various  kinds  are 
ejected,  always  heated  and  usually  in  a  liquid  con- 
dition, associated  also  with  various  gases  and  vapors. 
The  intense  igneous  action  taking  place  within  the 
earth  often  causes  a  swelling  of  the  surface,  forming 
a  sort  of  earth-bubble,  which  permits  the  escape  of 
the  contained  vapor  and  molten  matter.  This  re- 
sults, of  course,  in  the  formation  of  a  conical 
mound,  the  elevation  of  which  is  usually  increased 
by  deposits  of  solid  materials  ejected  from  within. 
Some  volcanoes  are  in  fact  among  the  loftiest  moun- 
tains of  our  globe. 

The  cause  of  the  great  heat  existing  within  the 
earth,  and  especially  marked  in  volcanic  districts, 
has  given  rise  to  much  speculation  and  great  diver- 
sity of  opinion.  But  putting  all  theory  and  supposi- 
tion as  to  the  cause  aside,  we  may  accept  as  a  fact 
the  statement,  that  the  interior  of  the  earth  is  in  a 
condition  of  great  heat,  sufficiently  intense  in  some 
places  to  completely  fuse  the  rocks  and  to  eject  the 
fluid  material  as  lava  upon  the  surface.  At  the  time 
of  an  eruption,  large  quantities  of  rock  dust,  some- 
times called  ashes,  are  thrown  out.  The  lava  runs 
from  the  crater  as  a  stream,  until  by  cooling  it 
becomes  viscid  and  finally  too  thick  to  flow.     The 


ROCKS  FORMED    BY    HEAT.  217 

outer  parts  of  a  lava  stream  will  often  become 
perfectly  cool  and  hard,  while  the  inner  portions 
remain  heated  and  in  a  liquid  state  perhaps  for 
months.  A  hardened  lava  stream  may  sometimes  be 
traced  continuously  for  many  miles;  and  of  this  Utah 
furnishes  many  examples,  though  the  volcanoes  from 
which  such  streams  sprang  are  now  no  longer  active, 
and  are  therefore  said  to  be  extinct.  Several 
extensive  lava  "flows"  have  to  be  crossed  in  traveling 
through  Beaver  and  Millard  Counties,  and  wonder- 
fully distinct  streams  exist  about  St.  George  in  the 
south.  Dameron  Valley,  or  Diamond  Valley  as  the 
place  is  sometimes  called,  lying  between  the  little 
town  of  Pine  Valley  and  St.  George,  contains  a 
number  of  such  streams,  and  also  several  interesting 
volcanic  cones,  from  which  the  lava  courses  lead.  It- 
is  a  rather  laborious  undertaking,  but  one  well 
worth  the  effort,  to  climb  the  rugged  side  of  such  a 
blackened  mountain.  On  reaching  the  top  we  dis- 
cover a  cup-shaped  hollow,  into  which  we  can  with 
care  descend.  This  is  the  crater,  from  which  issued 
the  vast  quantities  of  lava  now  to  be  seen  extending 
in  all  directions.  The  floor  of  the  crater  is  formed 
by  the  hardened  lava  which  remained  after  the  last 
eruption. 

Such  volcanic  forces,  though  mighty  and  even 
terrible  in  their  operation  and  effects,  are  necessary 
to  the  preservation  of  the  proper  condition  on  the 
earth.  Through  these  natural  vents  the  pent-up 
gases  and  expansive  vapors  from  within  the  earth, 
together  with  the  molten  "matters  resulting  from  the 


218  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

intense  heat,  find  their  outlets.  Without  volcanic 
discharges  we  have  all  reason  to  believe  greater  and 
more  destructive  effects  would  be  produced  from 
violent  earthquakes  and  other  intense  convulsions  of 
a  kindred  order.  Again,  volcanoes  belch  forth  large 
quantities  of  carbon-dioxide  gas,  which,  though  fatal 
to  human  beings  and  animals  in  the  immediate 
neighborhood,  is  still  essential  to  the  support  of  plant 
life  upon  the  earth.  Even  the  fiercest  of  volcanic 
fires,  aud  the  maddest  fury  of  igneous  forces,  serve  a 
purpose  tending  toward  the  general  good. 
rocky  veins. 
Most  of  us,  perhaps,  have  noticed  pebbles  and 
other  stones  having  streaks  of  a  light  color  running 
through  them.  These  light-colored  seams  are  called 
"veins,"  and  have  been  formed  in  a  most  interesting 
way,  which  we  are  capable  of  discovering  and,  to  a 
degree  at  least,  understanding,  by  remembering  the 
admirable  and  effective  way  in  which  the  water 
excavates  large  caverns  and  passages  within  the 
ground.  We  have  seen  that  the  sand,  mud  and 
calcareous  powder  produced  by  the  grinding  of  stones 
in  the  river  channel,  are  deposited  by  the  water  in 
the  form  of  stratified  sediment,  which  eventually 
hardens  into  rock.  As  it  dries  and  hardens,  it 
shrinks,  and  oftentimes  cracks,  leaving  many  gaping 
fissures  in  the  rock.  Look  at  any  mud  flat  from 
which  the  water  has  receded,  and  upon  which  the 
drying  effect  of  the  sun's  heat  has  been  felt — the 
cracks  there  to  be  seen  will  illustrate  all  that  has 
been  said. 


ROCKS  FORMED   BY    HEAT.  219 

By  volcanic  disturbances,  earthquakes,  and  similar 
violent  forces,  the  earth's  crust  is  sometimes  moved 
over  great  areas,  producing  many  a  rent  and  fissure 
in  the  rocks.  Such  cracks  and  fissures,  whether  large 
or  small,  when  re-filled,  are  called  veins.  If  the 
rock,  n  which  such  rents  are  formed,  is  soluble  in 
water,  or  if  soluble  rocks  exist  in  the  neighborhood, 
the  water  in  percolating  through  will  dissolve  much 
solid  matter,  and  deposit  the  same  in  the  vein- 
fissure;  just  as  it  deposits  its  load  of  dissolved  ma- 
terial on  the  walls  of  subterranean  caverns.  Such  a 
tiny  vein  as  we  see  in  an  ordinary  pebble,  may,  in 
fact,  be  regarded  as  a  miniature  cave,  into  which  the 
percolating  water  has  brought  so  much  solid  matter 
as  to  entirely  fill  the  space.  This  is  one  of  Nature's 
means  of  healing  the  wounds  and  rents  that  may  be 
produced  through  violence  in  the  rocky  tissues  of  the 
earth;  just  as  a  cut  in  the  flesh  is  naturally  healed 
by  a  liquid  serum  oozing  from  the  sides  of  the  wound, 
finally  filling  the  cavity  and  uniting  the  parts. 
Under  certain  circumstances  this  dissolved  material 
is  deposited  in  the  stony  fissure  in  the  form  of 
beautiful  crystals  extending  from  one  wall  toward 
the  other,  till  perhaps  they  meet,  and  so  accomplish 
the  joining.  In  such  cases  they  look  remarkably 
like  rocky  stitches  put  in  to  sew  up  the  rent  and 
hold  the  parts  in  proper  place. 

Vein  fissures  are  also  formed  in  other  ways.  Molten 
material  from  below  may  be  forced  by  volcanic  dis- 
turbances into  the  rocks  above,  completely  filling  all 
such  cracks  and  fissures,  and  opening  many  others  by 


2*20  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

the  violence  of  its  injection  which  it  fills  at  the  same 
time.  Whether  any  particular  vein  was  filled  by 
matter  in  solution  or  by  molten  material  may  be 
determined  by  examining  the  nature  of  the  filling 
and  the  condition  of  the  rock  bordering  the  vein. 
Calcareous  crystals  for  instance  could  not  be  formed 
from  a  molten  mass;  because  calcite  undergoes  ready 
decomposition  by  heat.  If  the  rock  on  either  side 
close  to  the  vein  is  in  no  way  different  from  that  at 
a  considerable  distance  from  the  vein,  we  may  con- 
clude that  the  fissure  has  been  filled  by  infiltration 
and  not  by  the  injection  of  igneous  matter,  as  in 
such  case  the  vein  walls  would  doubtlessly  have 
suffered  change — chalk  or  limestone  would  in  all 
probability  have  changed  to  marble;  and  clay  would 
have  become  slate  under  the  influence  of  the  heat. 

The  vein  matter  in  large  fissures  is  frequently  im- 
pregnated with  metallic  substances  or  their  com 
pounds,  brought  there  in  all  probability  by  heated 
water  in  most  cases  rising  from  below.  Such  a 
mixture  is  called  "ore;"  and  whenever  a  vein  of 
this  kind  reveals  itself  by  any  surface  indication, 
it  is  eagerly  explored  and  worked  for  the  sake 
of  the  rich  treasures  that  it  contains,  so  do  we 
obtain  our  lead,  and  tin,  copper,  iron,  silver  and 
gold,  without  which  the  present  state  of  civiliza- 
tion would  be  materially  changed.  Among  such 
veins,  only  those  that  afford  some  indications 
of  their  presence  at  the  surface  are  available,  and 
these  may  be  indeed  very  few  compared  with  the 
unknown  and  hidden  treasures  of  the  ground.     Un- 


A  TALK   ABOUT  COAL.  221 

told  wealth  lies  concealed  within  the  stony  bosoms 
of  our  hills,  as  to  the  locations  of  which,  however, 
nothing  yet  has  been  learned.  At  present,  man 
labors  blindly  in  his  search  for  mineral  riches;  he 
may  yet  be  taught  the  secret  combination  of  the 
rock-bound  safe  within  whose  deep  recesses  these 
treasures  lie  secure. 


CHAPTER    XLIII. 

A    TALK    ABOUT   COAL. 

g!|S|rjRANY  of  our  readers  have  heard  or  read  or 
fcJJ®  perhaps  they  have  thought  for  themselves 
about  the  fact  that  coal  is  formed  from 
plants.  Yet  it  appears  truly  remarkable 
that  any  vegetable  production  should  be  dug  from 
the  earth  as  rocks  and  ores  are,  or  that  such  should 
be  called,  in  any  sense,  a  mineral.  Proof  of  the 
vegetable  origin  of  coal  are  simple  but  strong.  Re- 
mains of  plant  life,  such  as  the  leaves,  twigs,  and 
trunks  of  trees,  flowers,  fruits  and  seeds  are  all  found 
imbedded  in  the  clay  and  rocky  layers  lying  above 
and  below  the  coal  deposits,  and  sometimes  within 
the  coal  itself.  This  is  especially  true  of  the  anthra- 
cite coal  seams  in  which  the  original  structure  has 
not  been  so  completely  obliterated.  The  author  has 
had  the  pleasure  on  several  occasions  of  visit- 
ing some  of  the  celebrated  Pennsylvania  coal 
mines.       He   was   fortunate    enough    to   find    while 


222 


FIRST   BOOK   OF  NATURE. 


there,  several  pieces  of  slate  and  coal  matter,  con- 
taining most  perfect  impressious  of  ferns  and  other 
plants,  pieces  of  gigantic  rushes,  fragments  of  bark 
showing  intricate  and  complicated  markings  upon 
the  surface,  a  number  of  cone-like  fruits  produced 
without  doubt  by  plants  closely  allied  to  the  pines, 
and  many  other  evidences  of  vegetable  origin. 


&  Mm 


w 


Fig.  31.— Fossil  Fern  in  Coal  Slate. 

A  picture  of  a  fern  leaf  from  such  a  source  is 
given  in  figure  31;  every  fibre  and  veinlet  is  clear 
and  distinct;  so  perfectly  are  the  details  preserved 
that  the  nature  of  the  plant  is  as  readily  distinguish- 
able as  are  the  living  ferns  of  this  day.  A  close 
examination  of  the  coal  itself  results  in  farther 
proof  of  the  same  fact.  It  was  said  in  speaking 
of    the    structure   of   plant   stems   that  the  micro- 


A   TALK   ABOUT  COAL.  223 

scope  revealed  a  number  of  ducts  and  vessels  which 
bore  marks  upon  their  surface  of  a  peculiar  and 
characteristic  kind.  Similar  vessels  marked  after 
the  pattern  of  the  vegetable  fabric,  are  found  in  all 
coal,  even  the  hardest  stone-coal.  The  ash  remaining 
after  the  coal  has  been  burned,  shows  to  the  skillful 
microscopist  the  same  characteristic  structure. 

Another  argument,  urging  strongly  an  unqualified 
belief  in  the  vegetable  nature  of  coal,  is  that  men 
have  succeeded  in  manufacturing  an  artificial  coal 
from  saw  dust  and  other  finely  divided  vegetable 
matter,  by  placing  the  same  under  great  pressure 
and  subjecting  it  at  the  same  time  to  heat.  If  we 
take  the  trouble  to  dig  and  examine  the  soil  to  a 
depth  of  several  yards  in  any  marsh  or  swampy 
place,  we  will  find  an  interesting  gradation  as  we 
descend.  Near  the  surface  the  roots  of  growing 
grasses,  rushes  and  other  plants  form  a  kind  of  mat, 
which  entangles  the  soil,  but  each  root  fibre  can  be 
clearly  and  distinctly  traced.  Deeper  in  the  ground 
we  find  roots  and  stems  of  plants  not  now  living,  and 
to  all  appearances  buried  by  the  sediment  that  has 
been  carried  by  the  streams  into  the  marsh;  they 
have  all  turned  to  a  dark  color  and  are  brittle  and 
friable.  The  soil  entangled  between  the  fibres  of 
this  deeper  root-mat  is  of  a  black  color  too,  being 
saturated  with  soluble  organic  matter  derived  from 
the  half-decomposed  plants.  This  mixture  of  soil 
and  vegetable  remains  is  called  peat,  and  in  many 
parts  of  the  earth  it  is  cut  into  blocks  and  dried,  and 
so  used  as  a  fuel,  plentiful,  cheap  and  effective. 


224  FIRST   BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

The  conditions  favorable  for  the  formation  of  peat, 
are  a  tolerably  low  temperature — without  which  the 
vegetable  matter  would  entirely  decay  before  it  had 
been  converted  into  peat — and  a  moist  or  humid 
state  of  the  atmosphere.  Where  such  conditions 
exist,  peat  is  formed  in  immense  bodies  called  peat- 
bogs. Large  areas  in  France,  Scotland  and  England 
are  covered  with  peat;  and  one-tenth  of  Ireland  is  a 
bog.  Prof.  Dana  has  estimated  the  quantity  of  peat 
now  existing  in  Massachusetts,  at  fifteen  billions  of 
cubic  feet.  If,  after  such  a  bog  were  formed,  it  were 
covered  with  water,  either  from  the  sinking  of  the 
land  or  the  rising  of  the  sea,  heavy  deposits  of  sedi- 
ment would  be  made  above  the  peat,  exerting  a  great 
pressure  on  the  buried  matter;  and,  as  the  sedi- 
mentary layers  increased  above,  the  internal  heat  of 
the  earth  would  invade  the  lower  strata,  and  thus 
still  further  contribute  to  the  process  of  change. 

Such  buried  vegetable  accumulations  have  been 
found  in  many  places  beneath  layers  of  sedimentary 
rocks,  converted  into  a  kind  of  brown  coal  called 
lignite,  in  which  may  be  traced  all  the  proofs  of 
vegetable  structure.  Other  bogs  have  been  discov- 
ered buried  much  deeper  in  the  earth,  and  conse- 
quently under  the  effect  of  far  greater  pressure,  and 
of  higher  heat;  such  influences  would  more  com- 
pletely change  the  plant  tissue,  resulting  in  the  form- 
ation of  ordinary  bituminous  coal,  so  extensively 
used  as  a  fuel.  The  dull  and  lustreless  cannel  coal 
is  a  variety  of  this  kind,  so  rich  in  volatile  matter 
that  it  burns  like  a  torch,  when  lighted,  producing  a 


A   TALK   ABOUT   COAL.  225 

large  luminous  flame;  in  fact  it  was  used  at  one  time 
to  give  light,  and  hence  called  "cannel,"  which  is  a 
corruption  of  the  word  "candle."  Where  the  heat 
and  pressure  have  been  still  more  intense,  the  vege- 
table matter  is  changed  to  anthracite  or  stone-coal. 
This  is  a  very  hard  kind  of  coal,  with  a  metallic 
lustre,  and  will  burn  only  if  a  good  draft  be  supplied; 
then  it  evolves  great  heat,  but  no  smoke  or  flame. 

To  this  interesting  series  of  coal,  another  sub- 
stance, apparently  not  coal  at  all,  should  be  added. 
This  is  the  graphite,  sometimes  called  plumbago  or 
"black  lead."  It  seems  to  be  formed  under  the 
most  intense  effects  of  pressure  and  heat,  and  though 
it  shows  plain  proof  of  its  vegetable  origin,  has 
undergone  such  thorough  change  as  to  be  entirely 
incombustible.  It  is  used,  in  fact,  as  the  material 
of  crucibles,  which  are  vessels  for  melting  metals 
and  other  refractory  substances.  Graphite  is  also 
used  in  vast  quantities  in  the  manufacture  of 
pencils. 

Such  is  a  very  short  chapter  from  the  family 
history  of  a  lump  of  coal.  We  see  in  that  black 
mass  the  preserved  matter  of  trees  and  herbs  which 
flourished  many  centuries  ago,  and  which  has  been 
safely  buried  and  locked  within  the  rocky  cases  of 
the  earth's  treasure-house,  where,  protected  from 
disintegration  through  air  and  water,  it  has  been 
effectually  hidden  till  the  day  of  man's  greatest 
need.  In  its  burning,  the  coal  liberates  for 
our  benefit  and  comfort,  the  light  and  heat  that  fell 
upon  it  in  the  distant  day  of  its  growth.     Through 


226  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

the  mystic  processes  of  plant  life,  combustible  matter 
has  been  separated  from  the  air  and  soil  and  so 
preserved  for  use  when  most  in  need. 


CHAPTER   XLIV. 

PICTURES  IN   THE   ROCKS. 

JjfgUIE  crust  of  the  earth  is  to  the  thoughtful 
mind  as  a  mighty  book,  bearing  upon  its  stony 
leaves  the  history  of  the  past.  But  the  text 
of  the  volume  is  not  entirely  abstract  nor 
wholly  difficult  to  read.  Upon  its  rocky  pages  are 
numerous  pictures  and  illustrations,  engraved  with 
such  perfection  of  form  and  detail  that  they  are  as 
useful  to  the  earnest  student  as  the  originals  would  be. 
In  many  parts  of  Utah ,  such  picture-bearing  rocks 
are  common.  There  are  lying  before  me  as  I  write 
a  number  of  those  stony  tablets,  each  telling  of  a  life 
long  since  ended.  Here  is  a  piece  of  sandstone 
which  I  broke  from  a  mountain  cliff  near  Orderville 
in  Kaue  county;  there  are  upon  it  the  pictures  of  two 
leaves — every  line  and  fibre  clearly  shown.  Surely 
the  methods  by  which  such  delicate  impressions 
could  be  preserved  on  so  hard  and  enduring  a  sur- 
face, must  be  almost  perfect.  Here  is  another  slab 
of  stone;  this  is  from  the  hills  of  Castle  Valley;  upon 
its  surface  are  the  impressions  of  hundreds  of  little 
mollusks,  most  of  them  varieties  of  snails,  the  grace- 
ful curves  and  the  delicate  tracery  of  their  shells 


PICTURES  IN  THE  ROCKS.  227 

more  accurately  shown   than  could  be  done  by  any 
feat  of  human  sculpture  or  painting. 


Fig.  'A2.— Ammonites. 

Illustrations  of  a  peculiar  kind  of  mollusk  called 
the  ammonite  are  given  in  Figure  32.  These  fossils 
may  be  found  in  some  parts  of  southern  Utah. 
Ammonites  varied  from  the  size  of  a  dime  to  that 
of  a  small  wagon  wheel.  The  shell  of  these  animals 
was  chambered:  the  last  being  the  largest  division  and 
the  one  in  which  the  animal  lived.  By  forcing  liquid 
into  or  out  of  the  empty  chambers,  the  ammonite 
could  change  its  specific  weight  and  thus  rise  or  sink 
in  the  water  at  pleasure. 

Yonder  are  some  pieces  of  stone  from  the  temple 
quarry  at  Manti;  curious  markings  appear  upon 
them;  these  are  imbedded  scales  from  a  strange  race 
of  fishes,  which  once  tenanted  the  briny  waters  that 
rolled  over  these  valleys.  Here,  too,  is  a  block  of 
stone  from  Wyoming;  it  appears  to  have  had  painted 
upon  it,  the  pictures  of  three  fishes  lying  in  different 
positions.  Let  us  look  again;  it  is  no  painting,  it 
is  an  imprint  taken  from  the  objects  themselves, 
when  the  rock  was  in  a  soft  and  plastic  state,  and 
every  depression  and  elevation  of  body  is  plainly 
delineated. 


228 


FIRST   BOOK  OF   NATURE. 


A  very  peculiar  animal  called  the  crinoid  has  left 
its  record  in  the  shape  of  figure  33.     In   form   it 

appeared  more  like  a 
flower  than  an  animal, 
but  it  is  possessed  of  a 
true  animal  body,  and 
a  calcareous  shell, 
though  borne  upon  a 
long,  jointed  stalk.  A 
detached  section  of  this 
stalk  is  shown  below  the 
main  body  in  the  figure. 
The  name  "stone  lily" 
has  been  given  to  some 
species  of  these  pecu- 
liar creatures.  The 
jointed  stalks  or  stems 
before  referred  to  are 
hollow,  and  are  found 
in  some  parts  in  very 
great  numbers.  They 
are  popularly  called  "St.  Cuthbert's  beads,"  and  are 
sometimes  strung  and  used  as  ornaments.  Large 
rock  masses  are  often  formed  almost  entirely  of  the 
consolidated  remains  of  these  crinoids. 

Figure  34  represents  such  a  piece;  and  specimens 
quite  as  beautiful  as  the  one  there  shown  may  fre- 
quently be  found  upon  our  own  hills.  When  pol- 
ished, such  a  stone  has  a  beautiful  appearance,  and 
is  highly  prized  as  an  ornamental  material,  under  the 
name  of  encrinital  limestone  or  marble. 


Fig.  33. 


-Crinoid  or  "Stone 
Lily." 


PICTURES  IN  THE  ROCKS.  229 

Evidences  of  former  life,  found  in  the  rocks  of  the 
earth,  are  called  by  the  general  name  of  fossils, 
from  a  word,  meaning  really  "dug  up;"  and  the  way 


Fig.  34.— Encrinital  Marble. 

in  which  these  fossils  are  produced  is  not  difficult  to 
discover.  Look  at  the  muddy  river  hastening  to- 
ward its  resting  place  in  the  lake  or  sea;  beside 
the  particles  of  clay  and  sand,  it  bears  in  its 
course,  leaves  and  fruit  that  have  fallen  from  over- 
hanging trees;  insects,  by  some  mishap  transferred 
from  the  aerial  element  to  the  watery;  bodies  of 
birds  and  small  animals;  all  of  these  and  many 
other  objects  are  carried  along,  to  be  deposited,  to- 
gether with  the  sediments  in  the  still  water  below. 
The  bodies  of  aquatic  animals,  birds  and  fishes,  fall 
also  to  the  bottom,  and  are  in  time  buried  beneath 
the  accumulating  deposits.  As  we  have  before  dis- 
covered, these  strata  of  sand  and  mud  soon  harden 
into  rock;  but  in  the  meantime  the  perishable  struc- 
tures buried  there  have  undergone  decay,  if  not 
destruction,  though  the  impressions  still   exist    in  all 


230  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

their  original  detailed  beauty,  and  the  harder  the 
rock  becomes,  the  more  enduring  will  be  the  record 
of  the  beings  that  once  found  a  grave  within  its 
substance.  Truly,  Agassiz,  the  great  naturalist,  was 
wise  when  he  wrote,  "The  crust  of  our  earth  is  a 
great  cemetery,  where  the  rocks  are  tombstones,  on 
which  the  buried  dead  have  written  their  own  epi- 
taphs!" 

Let  us  stroll  along  the  sandy  shore  of  a  fresh-water 
lake;  we  cannot  fail  to  observe  the  shells  that  lie 
scattered  in  such  numbers  all  about.  Very  likely 
some  of  them  will  be  found  filled  with  sand.  Now 
we  will  dig  to  some  little  depth  in  the  sandy  shore; 
other  shells  will  be  found  also  filled  with  sand,  but 
the  filliug  is  much  more  firmly  and  solidly  pressed 
than  was  the  case  with  the  surface  specimens.  At  a 
still  greater  depth  we  discover  other  shells,  with  the 
sand-filling  forced  into  every  curve  and  crevice  of 
the  inside,  and  as  firm  and  solid  as  rock.  What 
will  become  of  them  after  the  beach  strata  have 
hardened  into  sandstone?  Though  the  shell-matter 
itself  may  disappear  wholly  or  in  part,  the  stony 
filling  shows  exactly  how  the  shell  was  constructed 
within — we  may  rely  upon  the  cast,  for  the  shell 
itself  was  the  mould,  and  the  impression  left  by  the 
imbedded  shell  is  a  representation  of  its  outer  shape. 

There  lies  before  me  what  seems,  when  viewed 
from  a  distance,  to  be  one  of  the  vertebrae  or  spine- 
bones  of  some  animal.  Such  it  is,  or  rather  was,  for 
by  a  closer  examination  we  find  from  its  weight  and 
other  characteristics  that  the  specimen  is  really  stone 


PICTURES  IN  THE  ROCKS.  231 

and  not  bone;  it  would  be  usually  described  as  a 
'petrified  bone.     The  word  "petrified"  means  really 
"turned  to  stone;"  but  such  a  process  as  is  implied 
in  that  expression  is  impossible.     Bony  matter  does 
not  consist  of  the   same  elements  as  stone,  and  one 
cannot  be  changed  into  the  other.     The  explanation 
is  this.     The  bone  itself  was  buried  beneath  sedi- 
mentary  material   which  underwent   a   change   into 
solid  rock.     As  the  bone  decayed,  a  cavity  would  be 
left  within  the  rock;  the  percolating  water,  holding 
solid  matter  in  solution,  would  find  its  way  into  the 
cavity  and  there  deposit  its  solid  contents,  till  the 
spaced  was  filled.     But  the  decay  of  the  bone  took 
place  slowly,  particle  after  particle  wore  away  and 
just  so  fast  did  the  water  leave  rock  matter  to  fill  up 
the  room;  so  that  a  petrifaction  really  is  a  body  the 
particles  of  which  have  been  replaced  by  stone  as  fast 
as  they  were  separated  by  decay.     Here  is  an  inter- 
esting illustration  of  a  partial  petrifaction;  it  is  a 
fossil  tooth  of  a  shark.     It  was  found  in  the  rocky 
ledges  of  South  Carolina,  aud  belonged  doubtlessly 
to  one  of  those  savage  rovers  of  the  sea  that  inhabited 
the  waters  of  that  locality. 

The  rocks  afford  us  other  proofs  of  life  than  the 
actual  impression  of  the  decaying  bodies.  Water- 
fowl, stalking  along  the  muddy  banks  of  their  native 
streams  and  lakes,  leave  thereon  their  footprints  to  be 
perpetuated  in  the  future  rock.  Animals  frequently 
come  from  great  distances  to  drink  at  the  rivers,  and 
often  leave  their  footmarks  on  the  soft  and  yielding 
shores  to  testify,  perhaps  centuries  afterward  of  their 


232 


FIRST   BOOK  OF   NATURE. 


existence.  The  water-beetle  and  the  worm  make 
tracings  on  the  mud  as  signatures  to  attest  their 
being. 

Here  is  a  piece  of  stone  marked  upon  its  surface 
by  a  number  of  indentations  as  if  it  had  been  bat- 
tered by  flying  missiles  of  some  sort.  Figure  35  is  a 
good  picture  of  it. 


Figure  35.— Rain  drop  marks  in  mud  and  in  stone. 

To  understand  its  story  we  must  again  try  to 
interpret  the  past  by  the  present.  Let  us  pay  a  visit 
to  a  half  dried  mud  flat,  during  or  immediately 
after  a  sharp  shower,  the  mud  has  a  battered  appear- 
ance, which  we  know  is  due  to  the  falling  rain 
drops,  and  such  must  have  been  the  cause  of  the  in- 
dentations in  that  piece  of  stone.  Yes,  there  is  an 
unmistakable  account  of  a  prehistoric  storm,  the 
depth  of  the  impressions  tells  us  of  its  force,  and 


PICTURES  IN  THE   ROCKS. 


233 


their  shape  indicates  the  direction  from  which  the 
rain  drops  were  driven,  in  that  far  distant  time. 

In  walking  along  the  shore  of  a  lake,  we  observe 
the  little  waves  rolling  and  rippling  upon  the  beach, 
and  leaving  marks  upon  the  soft  mud  or  sand.  After 
the  sediments  have  become  transformed  into  solid 
rock,  the  ripple  marks  still  remain  plain  and  un- 
injured; a  slab  of  stone  bearing  such  undulating 
marks  is  shown  in  figure  36. 


Fig.  36.— Ripple  Marks. 

Who  of  us  can  in  any  way  doubt  the  reliability  of 
such  stony  records?  Upon  our  own  mud  banks  and 
lake  beaches  similar  impressions  are  being  printed 
before  our  eyes.  Surely  these  stones  speak,  and  that 
too  in  a  language  plain  and  unmistakable; — the  way- 
faring man  can  read  their  words.  The  rocks  declare 
the  history  of  the  past  to  all  who  are  willing  to  learn. 

Referring  to  such  impressions  in  the  rocks,  Prof. 
Winchell    has    spoken    as  follows:     "It  is  a  solemn 


284  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

and  impressive  thought  that  the  foot  prints  of 
these  dumb  and  senseless  creatures  have  been  pre- 
served in  all  their  perfection  for  thousands  of  ages, 
while  so  many  of  the  works  of  man  which  date 
but  a  century  back  have  been  obliterated  from 
the  records  of  time.  Kings  and  conquerors  have 
marched  at  the  head  of  armies  across  continents, 
and  piled  up  aggregates  of  human  suffering  and 
experience  to  the  heavens,  and  all  the  physical  traces 
of  their  march  have  totally  disappeared;  but  the 
solitary  biped  which  stalked  along  the  margin  of  a 
New  England  inlet  before  the  human  race  was  born, 
pressed  footprints  in  the  soft  and  shifting  sand  which 
the  rising  and  sinking  of  the  continent  could  not 
wipe  out." 


CHAPTER    XLV. 

CRYSTALS. 

BAKE  a  strong  brine,  by  stirring  fine  salt  in  a 
vessel  of  water  as  long  as  any  can  be  dis- 
solved. If  this  solution  be  carefully  set 
aside  so  that  it  will  not  be  shaken,  or  in  any 
way  agitated,  after  a  time,  some  of  the  salt  reappears 
in  the  solid  state,  but  not  as  powder.  Beautiful 
little  blocks  of  salt  form  on  the  bottom  and  sides  of 
the  vessel,  each  of  a  regular  cubical  form.  At  first 
they  are  very  small,  but  if  left  undisturbed,  each 
increases  in  size,  by    the  addition  of  layers  of  salt 


CRYSTALS.  235 

deposited  on  the  tiny  cube.  Nearly  all  mineral 
substances,  under  certain  conditions,  tend  to  assume 
regular  and  symmetrical  shapes,  producing  solids, 
bounded  by  straight  lines,  perfect  angles,  and  plane, 
smooth  surfaces;  and  such  are  called  crystals. 

If  a  solution  of  alum  in  water  had  been  used 
instead  of  brine,  each  crystal  would  have  been  in 
shape  like  a  pair  of  pyramids,  placed  base  to  base, 
having  eight  sides  all  equal  in  size,  and  exactly  alike 
in  shape,  if  the  crystallization  had  been  uninter- 
rupted. Every  mineral  has  its  own  characteristic 
shape  in  crystallizing. 

Man  is  unable  to  tell  for  what  purpose,  or  by  what 
laws  substances  are  caused  to  assume  such  regular 
and  symmetrical  shapes;  but  this  he  does  know,  that 
from  the  earliest  times  these  characteristic  forms 
have  been  unchanged.  Salt  crystallizes  in  cubes; 
alum,  as  we  have  seen,  in  octahedra  or  eight  side 
solids;  quartz,  which  very  frequently  is  found  in 
crystal  form,  always  as  six-sided  prisms,  terminated 
by  six-sided  pyramids. 

Figure  37  is  a  picture  of  a  beautiful  cluster  of 
quartz  crystals  found  in  the  rocks  about  Lake 
Superior.  Such  crystals  are  transparent  and  pass 
under  the  common  name  of  rock  crystal.  They 
are  used  as  gems,  and  are  also  of  value  in  cutting 
glass.  Quartz  crystals  are  sometimes  found  of  a  very 
delicate  violet  tint,  and  such  are  known  as  amethysts. 
Many  brilliant  crystals  are  regarded  as  the  most 
valuable  treasures  which  the  earth  affords;  such  are 
the  sapphires,  rubies,  topazes  and  diamonds.     The 


236 


FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 


elements  of  which  these  precious  stones  really  con- 
sist, are  simple  and  common,  but  in  a  crystalline 
form  they  are  both  beautiful  and  rare. 


Fig.  37. — Cluster  of  Quartz  Crystals. 

In  order  that  an}*  substance  may  assume  the 
crystalline  shape,  its  particles  must  be  free  to  move 
in  any  direction,  according  to  the  laws  of  attraction 
operating  between  them. 

For  this  reason,  crystals  form  readily  from  a  state 
of  solution  or  of  fusion.  If  a  solid  be  dissolved,  the 
particles  are  so  separated  and  suspended  within  the 
solvent  that  they  are  free  to  obey  any  attractive  force 
operating  upon  them;  and  so  also  if  the  solid  be 
brought  into  a  molten  condition.  But  in  a  rigid 
solid,  the  particles  are  fixed  and  in  consequence 
unable  to  move  at  all  as  they  may  be  attracted. 


CRYSTALS.  237 

We  have  seen  that  crystals  form  within  the  caverns 
of  the  earth,  and  also  in  the  vein-cracks  or  fissures 
through  the  rocks;  these  were  probably  pro- 
duced from  a  state  of  solution, — water,  finding  its 
way  into  the  cavity  with  solid  matter  in  solution, 
deposits  the  same  in  a  symmetrical  and  regular 
shape.  A  pot  of  molten  sulphur,  cooled  slowly, 
forms  itself  into  a  multitude  of  regular  and  beautiful 
crystals. 

Within  the  mountain-caverns  and  the  subterranean 
caves,  the  laws  of  Nature  have  operated  to  produce 
this  crystalline  arrangement  of  matter.  This  con- 
dition seems  to  be  one  toward  which  all  mineral 
solids  tend,  and  short  of  which  they  are  not  in  a  state 
of  rest  or  CDntentment.  Any  disturbance  of  the 
particles  in  a  solid  mineral  body  is  attended  by  an 
approach  toward  crystallization.  The  constant  shak- 
ing to  which  the  large  axles  of  railway  carriages  are 
subjected,  in  time  produces  a  crystalline  arrangement 
within  the  metal;  the  particles  being  disturbed  by 
the  constant  jarring,  settle  at  last  into  the  condition 
of  greatest  equilibrium,  which  is  the  crystalline  state. 
It  is  a  universal  tendency  of  matter  to  gather  par- 
ticles of  like  kind  together  and  place  them  in 
symmetrical  order.  In  sandstone  strata  for  instance, 
any  particles  of  clay  that  may  be  present  seem  to  be 
attracted  toward  one  another  till  they  form  nodules 
or  concretions  of  clay-stone  in  the  midst  of  a  sand- 
stone formation. 

Thus  even  among  the  ultimate  particles  of  matter 
in  their  almost  inconceivable  minuteness,  the  laws  of 


238  FIRST  BOOK   OF  NATURE. 

orderly  arrangement  are  supreme  and  obedience 
thereto  is  the  rule.  The  earth's  crust  tends  toward 
a  crystalline  state;  and  in  inanimate  matter  the 
crystal  is  the  type  of  order  and  system — in  a  crystal 
every  particle  seems  to  be  in  its  proper  place,  each 
holding  by  its  unseen  bonds  of  affinity  the  particles 
about  it,  and  being  in  turn  held  and  bound  by  them. 
The  prism  of  quartz,  the  cube  of  salt  and  the  foliated 
mica  crystal,  all  declare  by  their  very  existence,  the 
mathematical  accuracy,  according  to  which  the  forces 
of  the  universe  operate  and  co-operate.  In  shaping 
the  crystal  of  stone,  no  less  than  in  determining  the 
orbit  of  the  world,  the  Creator  teaches  us  by  example 
"the  principles  of  a  perfect  geometry." 


Part    IV. 

The    Heavens. 


"The  heavens  declare  the  glory  of  God,  and  the  firma- 
ment showeth  His  handiwork." 

"He  telleth  the  number  of  the  stars;  He  calleth  them 
all  by  their  names." — Psalms. 

"Behold,  all  these  are  kingdoms,  and  any  man  who  lias 
seen  any  or  the  least  of  these,  has  seen  God  moving  in 
His  majesty  and  power." — Doctrine  and  Covenants. 


CHAPTER    XLVI. 

A    GLANCE    AT    THE    SKY. 

JiUR  interesting  survey  of  Nature  in  her  beauty 
%  need  not  end  with  the  decline  of  day.  By 
night  also  the  manifold  labors  of  our  Omnipo- 
tent Father  declare  to  the  listening  ear  His 
majesty  and  might.  Do  but  lift  the  eye  toward 
heaven  upon  any  clear  night,  and  let  it  dwell  upon 
that  wondrous  dome  of  crystal,  whose  bounds  are 
only  set  by  the  powers  of  our  own  vision.  Man  can- 
not gaze  upon  such  a  spectacle  without  feeling  within 
his  soul  those  stirring  emotions  that  are  always 
prompted  by  the  presence  of  the  supremely  grand. 
Wonderful,  indeed,  are  the  charms  of  mountain 


240  FIRST  BOOK  Of   NATURE. 

and  plain,  river  and  lake,  with  their  living  miracles 
of  trees  and  flowers,  butterflies,  birds  and  beasts; 
yet  beyond  all  these,  in  the  far-away  depths  of 
space  we  can  discern  the  lustrous  twinkling  of  other 
worlds,  many  of  them  larger  and  apparently  more 
awe  inspiring  than  our  own. 

The  thoughts  aroused  by  the  contemplation  of 
such  a  scene  of  heavenly  grandeur  cannot  be  other- 
wise than  elevatiug  in  their  nature. 

"Oh!  who  can  lift  above  one  careless  look 

While  snch  bright  scenes  as  these  his  thoughts  engage; 
And  doubt,  while  reading  from  so  fair  a  book, 

That  God's  own  finger  traced  the  glowing  page; 
Or  deem  the  radiance  of  yon  blue  expanse, 

With  all  its  starry  hosts — 
The  careless  works  of  chance?5 

Our  wonder  and  admiration,  however,  are  some- 
what checked  because  of  the  frequency  of  the  sight; 
for  in  our  weakened  natures,  that  which  has  not  the 
air  of  novelty  about  it  is  apt  to  be  considered  com- 
mon-place and  worthy  of  but  little  notice.  Emerson 
has  expressed  a  deep  thought  by  his  words: — "One 
might  think  the  atmosphere  was  made  transparent 
with  this  design,  to  give  man  in  the  heavenly  bodies 
the  perpetual  presence  of  the  sublime.  Seen  in  the 
streets  of  cities  how  great  they  are!  If  the  stars 
should  appear  one  night  in  a  thousand  years,  how 
would  men  believe  and  adore;  and  preserve  for  many 
generations  the  remembrance  of  the  city  of  God 
which  had  been  shown.  But  every  night  come  out 
these  preachers  of  beauty  and  light  the  universe  with 
their  admonishing  smile." 


A  GLANCE   AT  THE  SKY.  241 

In  all  ages,  mankind  has  shown  a  greater  tendency 
to  contemplate  the  wonders  of  the  sky,  than  to  learn 
from  the  nearer  and  the  simpler  creations  of  earth. 
The  heavenly  bodies  have  even  possessed  for  him  a 
deep  fascination;  they  seem  to:be  present,  and  yet  are 
inaccessible;  he  yearns  to  know  the  nature  and  pur- 
pose of  their  being,  and  reaches  out  toward  the 
realization  of  that  desire,  as  the  babe  stretches  its 
tiny  hands  to  grasp  the  glittering  moon.  There  is  a 
mystery  about  these  ornaments  of  the  sky,  and  this 
feature  is  alone  sufficient  to  inspire  within  us  an 
attempt  to  fathom  it. 

In  the  oldest  times,  men  delighted  to  gaze  up- 
ward upon  the  diamond  vault,  and  strove  to  read 
the  meaning  of  that  emblazoned  canopy.  The  occu- 
pations of  the  people  in  those  times  were  mostly 
farming,  stock  raising,  hunting,  and  other  open  air 
pursuits;  and  such  would  favor  contemplative  study 
of  the  stars.  It  seems  perfectly  natural  that  the 
shepherds  of  Chaldea,  watching  their  flocks  by  night, 
should  be  among  the  first  to  recognize  any  unusual 
appearance  or  new  arrival  among  the  great  family  of 
visible  worlds.  And  beside,  the  people  had  fewer 
books  than  have  we  to-day;  they  devoted  less  time 
to  reading  and  more  to  thinking.  The  changes  in 
the  positions  of  the  heavenly  orbs  marked  the 
natural  divisions  of  time;  and  for  traveling,  the 
sun  and  stars  served  as  guides.  There  was  a  time 
when  the  lights  of  the  sky  were  the  only  compasses, 
almanacs  and  clocks  that  man  possessed;  and  so  deep 
were  his  feelings  of  admiration  and  wonder  toward 

17 


242  FIRST  BOOK  OF   NATURE. 

these    heavenly    bodies,   that   many   early  nations 
rendered  to  them  an  idolatrous  homage. 

The  science  that  deals  with  the  sun,  moon  and 
stars — the  heavenly  bodies  as  these  distant  creations 
are  called — is  Astronomy.  This  word  is  in  reality 
made  up  of  two  Greek  terms  and  means  the  "science 
of  the  stars."  This  is  indeed  the  oldest  of  all 
branches  of  science,  so  old  in  fact  that  history  tells 
us  but  little  of  its  origin,  almost  all  famous  nations 
of  antiquity  claiming  to  have  been  the  founders  of 
the  science.  The  Chaldeans,  who  inhabited  the  city 
of  Babylon,  and  the  region  round  about  along  the 
banks  of  the  Euphrates  in  Asia,  also  the  Egyptians, 
the  Chinese,  the  Hindoos  and  the  Greeks,  all  pur- 
sued attentively  the  study  of  the  stars  in  very  early 
times.  At  the  time  of  the  surrender  of  Babylon  to 
Alexander  the  Great,  about  three  hundred  years 
before  the  time  of  Christ,  the  inhabitants  had 
among  them  records  of  astronomical  observations 
extending  back  nearly  to  the  supposed  date  of  the 
tower  of  Babel. 

The  earth  seems  to  be  situated  in  the  centre  of  an 
azure  dome,  across  which  the  sun  appears  to  move  in 
slow,  majestic  state,  rising  at  mom  in  the  east, 
reaching  his  highest  point  at  noon,  aud  sinking  at 
night  below  the  horizon  in  the  west.  During  the 
hours  of  darkness,  however,  the  position  of  the  sun 
with  reference  to  any  part  of  the  earth,  is  so  changed, 
that  at  the  proper  time,  that  luminary  appears  again 
in  its  usual  place,  in  the  eastern  horizon;  rising  and 
beginning  the   march   of    another  day.     By  night, 


A  GLANCE  AT  TIJE    SKY.  243 

however,  the  heavenly  vault  presents  a  much  more 
diversified  appearance.  At  regular  periods  the  moon 
is  seen  following  a  course  nearly  the  same  as  that  of 
the  sun,  in  her  apparent  journey  from  east  to  west; 
and  on  all  cloudless  nights,  the  multitudes  of  stars 
shine  out  in  dazzling  beauty  as  they  move  in  trium- 
phal procession  across  the  gleaming  arch. 

A   little   careful   thought  and  consideration   will 
convince  us  that  this  seeming  motion  of  the  heavenly 
bodies  day  after  day  is  in  fact  a  delusion,  depending 
upon  the  actual  motion  of  the  earth.     It  is  doubt- 
less true  that   each  of  the  heavenly    bodies   has  a 
motion  of  its  own;  in  some  cases  this  can  be  readily 
perceived,   in  others  less  so  on  account  of  the  ex- 
ceedingly great  distances  by  which  some  stars  are 
separated  from   the  earth;    but  they  do  not   really 
make  a  daily  inarch  about  this  little  world  of  ours. 
We  have  perhaps  noticed  while  riding  in  a  swiftly 
moving  railway  carriage  that  we  unconsciously  trans- 
fer our  own  motion  to  the  fixed  objects  along  the  line 
of  travel.    The  trees  and  fences  seem  to  dart  hurriedly 
past  while  we  imagine  ourselves  as  remaining  still. 
We  know  at  once  that  this  appearance  is  a  false  one; 
the  posts   and  the  trees  are  firmly  planted  in  the 
ground  while  we  are  swiftly  moving.     So  with  the 
heavenly  bodies   about   the   earth;   they  appear   in 
motion  while  the  earth  seems  at  rest. 

The  earth  is  known  to  revolve  once  upon  its  axis 
in  the  space  of  a  day;  as  a  large  ball  or  a  bead  may 
be  twirled  on  a  string.  Imagine  such  a  revolving 
ball,  and  upon  its  surface  a  tty;  the  insect  would  in 


244  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

all  probability  see  the  fixed  objects  about  the  ball  as 
if  they  were  in  rapid  motion.  We  conclude,  there- 
fore, that  the  uniform  and  regular  daily  motiou  of 
the  sun,  moon  and  stars  about  the  earth,  is  but  an 
apparent  one  produced  by  the  rotation  of  the  earth 
upon  its  axis. 

While  speaking  of  the  natural  objects  to  be  seen 
upon  the  earth — the  animals,  plants  and  rocks — we 
referred  very  frequently  to  the  microscope,  a  wonder- 
ful  instrument,  by  the  aid  of  which,  small  objects 
are    made   to  appear  many  times  larger   than  they 
really  are.     The  astronomer  employs  another  iustru 
ment  no  less  useful  in  its  application,  uor  less  won- 
derful in    its  results.     This  is  called    the  telescope, 
and    through    its   assistance    distant   objects  appear 
much  nearer  and  larger  than  ordinarily.     By  means 
of  this  instrument,  the  heavenly  bodies  have  been 
carefully    examined,    and    their    appearances    and 
position  described.     The  telescope  proves  to  us  also 
that  many  of   the  faintest  and  seemingly  smallest 
stars   in   the   sky  are   in  reality  large  and   bright; 
though  they  are  so  far  away  from  us  that  their  light 
appears  but   dim  to   our  unaided   vision.     By   this 
magic  glass   countless   numbers  of   stars,  otherwise 
invisible,  are  brought  within  the  range  of  vision;  and 
beyond   these   again,  unnumbered    others  are    seen 
faint  and  dim  even  through  the  most  powerful  in- 
struments. 

Where  ends  the  mighty  hosts  of  worlds?  This  is 
not  for  man  to  know  as  yet;  it  is  beyond  the  powers 
of  his   understanding;  he  can   simply   acknowledge 


THE  SUN.  245 

with  reverence  and  with  praise  the  endless  results  of 
his  great  Father's  labors.  There  are  the  Kokaubeam 
without  number,  yet  all  in  orderly  array,  each  with 
its  path  among  the  other  bodies,  allotted  and  de- 
creed; there  is  Olea  in  all  her  silvery  splendor;  and 
Skinehah,  in  his  glorious  majesty  shedding  beams  of 
light  and  warmth  upon  many  worlds.  (See  Pearl  of 
Great  Price,  Book  of  Abraham.) 


CHAPTER   XLVII. 

THE    SUN. 

(St^HE  sun  is  to  us  the  most  brilliant  of  all  the 
Ws?£g  lights  of  the  heavens;  so  intense  is  its  lustre 
that  with  the  unprotected  eye  we  cannot  lnok 
upon  it.  If,  however,  we  hold  between  the  sun 
and  our  eye  a  piece  of  dark- colored  or  smoked  glass, 
that  body  appears  of  a  circular  form,  and  to  most 
people  seems  of  about  the  same  size  as  the  disc  of  the 
full  moon.  Astronomers  have  measured  the  dimen- 
sions of  the  sun  as  accurately  as  their  instruments 
and  their  skill  would  enable  them  to  do;  and  as  a 
result  they  tell  us  that.  1,245,000  earths  like  ours 
would  be  required  to  form  a  body  equal  in  size  to  the 
sun.  By  careful  measurement  our  earth  is  found  to 
be  about  8,000  miles  in  diameter;  the  sun  is  said  to 
have  a  diameter  of  over  860,000  miles.  It  is  only 
the  enormous   distance    between    the   sun    and    the 


246  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

earth  that  gives  to  the  former  its  apparently  small 
size.  The  accepted  distance  of  the  sun  from  the 
earth  according  to  present  measurements  is  92,880,000 
miles — a  number  far  beyond  the  comprehension  of 
any  of  us.  Let  us  seek  some  more  definite  idea  of 
these  figures  by  comparison. 

If  it  were  possible  to  make  the  trip  between  earth 
and  sun  by  road,  traveling  at  the  rate  of  thirty  miles 
per  day,  we  would  need  eight  thousand  four  hun- 
dred and  eighty-two  years  in  which  to  accomplish 
the  journey;  an  express  train  traveling  at  the  rate  of 
thirty  miles  per  hour  without  stops  could  traverse 
the  distance  in  three  hundred  and  fifty-three  years, 
and  the  fare  for  the  round  trip  (without  return 
tickets),  at  the  rate  of  four  cents  per  mile,  would  be 
$4,715,200.  The  electric  current,  which  carries  a 
telegraphic  message  between  any  connected  points 
upon  the  earth  without  appreciable  time  in  transit, 
would  require  five  minutes  to  accomplish  the  journey 
between  us  and  the  sun;  and  a  cannon  ball  fired 
toward  the  sun,  if  it  retained  its  initial  velocity,  and 
moved  in  a  straight  line,  would  be  nearly  ten  years 
on  the  way. 

It  should  be  remembered  that  these  figures  are 
based  upon  the  most  accurate  measurements  thus  far 
made;  but  we  have  no  conclusive  proof,  that  the 
results  are  in  every  way  correct  and  reliable.  Of 
this,  however,  we  may  feel  sure,  that  in  speaking  of 
distance,  with  reference  to  the  sun,  or  any  other 
of  the  heavenly  bodies,  measurement  by  miles,  almost 
loses  significance;  those  orbs  are  far,  far  away;  the 


THE  SIN.  247 

dimensions  of  space  are  boundless;  to  the  universe 
of  God  there  is  no  end. 

The  rotation  of  the  earth  upon  its  axis  turns  each 
side  alternately  toward  and  away  from  the  sun, 
giving  rise  thereby  to  the  regular  succession  of  day 
and  night. 

That  part  which  is  directed  toward  the  sun  receives 
its  light,  and  in  consequence  experiences  day;  while 
the  opposite  half  of  the  earth  being  deprived  of  sun- 
light passes  through  its  night. 

As  seen  from  the  earth,  the  sun  appears  to  change 
its  position  in  the  heavens  with  the  passing  of  the 
year;  during  our  winter  it  is  far  toward  the  south, 
while  during  the  summer  months,  it  appears  to 
traverse  its  daily  course  in  a  line  almost  over  our 
heads.  This  appearance  is  also  due  to  the  changes 
of  the  earth  as  it  moves  in  its  orbit;  and  a  conse- 
quence of  such  motion  is  the  change  of  seasons. 

In  Figure  38  the  sun  is  represented  near  the 
centre  of  an  elliptical  orbit,  around  which  the  earth 
is  shown  in  several  different  positions.  It  must  be 
remembered  in  thus  picturing  the  earth  in  its  yearly 
journey  that  the  directions  of  the  earth's  axis  is  not 
changed  to  any  appreciable  extent;  the  north  pole 
being  apparently  directly  under  the  Polar  Star.  On 
the  22nd  of  March  and  the  22nd  of  September  of 
each  year,  the  earth  is  in  such  position  that  the  rays 
of  the  sun  fall  directly  upon  its  equator.  This  is  an 
imaginary  line  passing  around  the  earth  in  an  easterly 
and  westerly  direction,  and  situated  at  equal  distance 
from  the  poles.     The  effect  of  this  position  is,  that 


248 


FIRST  BOOK  OFI  NATURE. 


at  such  times  all  parts  of  the|earth^  experience  the 
same  duration  of  light  and  darkness;  the  days  and 
nights   are   then   equal   over   the   earth;    and   such 


O 


r. 


cc 

bfc 


occurrences  are  called  the  equinoxes  or  times  of 
equal  nights.  On  December  21,  the  earth  reaches  a 
position,  shown  in  the  figure,  so  that  the  sun  shines 


THE  SUN.  249 

more  directly  upon  the  southern  hemisphere,  giving 
to  that  half  of  the  earth  therefore  its  summer,  while 
winter  reigns  upon  the  northern  section.  Six  months 
later,  on  June  21,  the  earth  has  passed  to  such  a 
position  that  the  northern  hemisphere  receives  the 
direct  rays  of  the  sun,  and  in  consequence,  experiences 
its  summer;  this  time  the  southern  half  of  the  earth 
is  passing  of  course  through  its  winter  season. 

In  reality  the  sun  does  not  occupy  the  exact  cen- 
tre of  the  elliptical  orbit  along  which  the  earth 
moves,  and  therefore  the  earth  is  nearer  the  sun  at 
one  time  than  at  others.  The  earth  reaches  its  point 
of  greatest  distance  from  the  sun  July  1,  and  this 
position  is  called  its  aphelion.  On  December  31,  of 
each  year,  the  earth  is  at  its  perihelion  or  least  dis- 
tance from  the  sun.  The  hieroglyphic  figures  accom- 
panying the  names  of  the  months  upon  the  diagram, 
are  symbols  of  particular  groups  of  stars,  which 
appear  close  to  the  sun  at  those  times.  From  the 
fact  that  the  earth  is  in  its  perihelion  at  the  time  of 
the  northern  winter,  and  in  aphelion  during  the 
northern  summer,  these  seasons  are  much  more 
moderate  in  our  hemisphere  than  in  the  southern. 

To  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth  the  sun  is  of  more 
general  interest  than  any  other  of  the  vast  orbs  of 
heaven.  From  the  sun  seem  to  come  the  light,  and 
heat  and  chemical  power  without  which  life  would 
soon  cease  to  exist  upon  our  globe.  That  great 
luminary  has  been  placed  in  the  firmament  "to  rule 
the  day"  and  to  make  of  this  globe  a  fit  habitation 
for  plant  and  animal  and  man. 


2o0  FIRST   BOOK   OF  NATURE. 

As  a  result  of  careful  measurement  it  is  said  that 
the  amount  of  heat  received  by  the  earth  from  the 
sun  during  a  year  is  sufficient  "to  boil  an  ocean  of 
ice  water  covering  the  whole  earth  to  a  depth  of 
eighty  feet:"  and  the  total  heat  radiated  by  the  sun 
in  that  space  of  time  is  2,300,000,000  times  as  great 
as  that  received  by  the  earth.  Prof.  Proctor  said  "In 
each  second  the  sun  sends  out  as  much  heat  as  would 
be  given  out  by  the  burning  of  1 1 ,600,000,000,000,<  K  M I 
tons  of  coal."  The  noted  astronomer,  Sir  John 
Herschel,  calculated  that  a  solid  cylinder  of  ice 
forty-five  miles  in  diameter  and  200,000  miles  long, 
if  plunged  into  the  sun,  would  be  melted  by  the 
intense  heat  of  that  body,  in  one  second  of  time. 

The  light  of  the  sun  is  no  less  surprisng  in  its 
degree.  It  is  many  times  as  intense  as  the  brightest 
electric  light  and  every  other  artificial  light  appears 
absolutely  black  when  held  before  the  sun.  The 
sun  radiates  600,000  times  as  much  light  as  the  full 
moon. 

Soon  after  the  invention  of  the  telescope,  in  the 
early  part  of  the  seventeenth  century,  dark  spots 
were  observed  upon  the  sun.  This  discovery  pro- 
duced a  consternation  among  the  superstitious  people 
of  that  time;  they  had  always  learned  to  regard  the 
sun  as  an  emblem  of  purity  and  unsullied  brilliancy. 
and  the  thought  of  blemishes  upon  its  fair  face  was 
most  repugnant  to  their  prejudiced  minds.  It  is 
now  known  that  spots  are  usually  present  on  the 
suu's  surface,  and  sometimes  of  such  a  size  as  to  be 
seen  by  the  naked  eye.     These  spots  are  often  of 


THE   MOON.  251 

enormous  size:  Shroeter  measured  one  over  29,000 
miles  in  diameter;  Sir  John  Herschel  names  one  of 
50,000  miles  diameter.  The  black  appearance  of  the 
spots  is  due  to  the  effect  of  contrast.  As  has  been 
said,  the  brightest  artificial  light  appears  dark  when 
projected  upon  the  face  of  the  sun,  owing  to  the 
superior  brilliancy  of  the  latter;  and  so  also  do  we 
suppose  the  spots  to  lack  brightness;  but  in  truth  the 
blackest  of  them  would  be  of  insufferable  brilliancy 
when  compared  with  earthly  lights.  Many  opinions 
have  been  advanced  by  scientific  men  as  to  the  nature 
of  the  spots:  some  consider  them  merely  clouds  float- 
ing in  the  solar  atmosphere  and  others  regard  them 
as  rents  in  the  enveloping  layers  of  the  sun,  through 
which  the  darker  nucleus  below  is  revealed.  Of 
their  true  nature,  as  indeed  of  the  constitution  of 
the  sun,  and  the  structure  of  the  heavenly  bodies  in 
general  we  know  but  little. 


CHAPTER  XLVIII. 

THE   MOON. 

SECOND  in  brilliancy  among  the  great  lights  of 
the  firmament  is  the  Moon.  Though  appear- 
ing almost  as  large  as  the  sun,  it  is  in  fact  the 
smallest  of  the  heavenly  bodies  ordinarily  vis- 
Its  comparatively  short  distance  from  us  adds 
to  its  apparent  size.  By  measurement,  the  moon  is 
found  to  be  only  one-fiftieth  as  large   as  the  earth. 


252  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

When  near  the  horizon,  the  moon  appears  much 
larger  than  when  high  in  the  heavens  toward  the 
zenith,  though  in  the  latter  position  the  moon  is 
nearer  the  observer  than  when  at  the  horizon  by  the 
semi-diameter  of  the  earth.  We  may  explain  this 
illusion  of  distance  as  follows:  When  we  perceive 
the  moon  apparently  close  to  the  surface  of  the 
earth,  as  when  on  the  eastern  or  western  horizon, 
we  are  more  fully  aware  of  its  distance,  and 
unconsciously  correct  our  mental  impressions  as 
to  its  size,  and  conceive  it  to  be  much  larger  than  it 
really  is. 

The  moon,  too,  is  nearest  to  the  earth  of  all  the 
bodies  in  space;  she  is  really  the  companion  of  the 
earth.  In  round  numbers  the  moon's  average  dis- 
tance from  us  is  placed  at  two  hundred  and  forty 
thousand  miles,  which,  though  an  enormous  distance 
in  comparison  with  any  terrestrial  measurement,  is 
but  very  small  when  considered  in  connection  with 
the  figures  denoting  the  distance  of  the  sun  or  any 
other  of  the  heavenly  bodies.  The  moon  moves 
around  the  earth  in  a  manner  somewhat  similar  to 
the  earth's  revolution  about  the  sun;  and  in  conse- 
quence, our  satellite  appears  in  widely  varying  posi- 
tions at  different  times. 

Figure  39  represents  the  earth  as  situated  near  the 
centre  of  the  path  of  the  moon,  and  the  latter  ap- 
pears in  several  different  positions  along  its  course. 
The  upper  part  of  the  figure  is  illuminated,  to  indi- 
cate the  direction  of  the  sun,  from  which  light  falls 
both  upon  the  earth   and   the   moon,   these   being 


THE  MOON. 


253 


dark,  opaque  bodies,  capable  of  giving  light  only  by 
reflecting  the  rays  of  the  sun.  The  moon  being 
approximately  globular  in  shape,  only  one-half  of  its 
surface  can  be  illuminated  by  the  sun   at  any  one 


Fig.  39.— Diagram  of  Moon's  Orbit. 

time,  and  the  portion  that  is  turned  away  from  the 
sun  will  be  in  darkness  and  night.  In  the  figure, 
therefore,  the  upper  half  of  the  moon  in  each  of  its 
positions  is  shown  as  brightly  illuminated.     By  the 


254  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

side  of  each  representation  of  the  moon  along  its 
orbit,  is  an  illustration  of  its  shape  at  such  position 
as  viewed  from  the  earth.  Thus,  when  the  moon  is 
between  the  earth  and  the  sun,  its  illuminated  part 
is  turned  away  from  us;  this  is  called  new  moon; 
and  at  such  time  the  disc  is  invisible  to  us;  we 
speak  of  the  moon  as  new  after  it  has  moved  slightly 
forward  in  its  orbit,  so  that  a  small  portion  of  its 
illuminated  half  is  visible  in  the  form  of  a  crescent. 
At  the  time  of  full  moon  our  satellite  is  seen  in 
the  part  of  the  heavens  opposite  to  the  sun;  its  whole 
illumined  part  is  then  turned  toward  the  earth  and  a 
full  disc  is  seen.  When  half  way  along  its  course  from 
new  to  full  moon,  one-half  of  its  lighted  part,  that  is 
one-fourth  of  the  whole  surface  is  seen  from  the  earth; 
this  position  is  called  first  quarter.  So  also  when 
the  moon  is  half-way  along  its  path  from  full 
to  new  moon,  it  is  said  to  be  in  last  quarter.  As 
the  figure  indicates,  while  passing  from  new  moon  to 
full  moon,  the  illuminated  part  visible  from  the 
earth  grows  larger;  this  is  called  the  "waxing 
moon;"  along  the  opposite  half  of  its  orbit  the  visible 
part  grows  smaller,  producing  the  phenomenon  of 
"waning  moon." 

The  moon  accomplishes  a  revolution  around  the 
earth,  moving  from  west  to  east,  in  about  twenty- 
seven  days;  and  therefore  appears  each  day  farther 
east  than  at  the  same  time  on  the  preceding  day. 
This  causes  the  moon  to  appear  on  the  eastern 
horizon  somewhat  later  each  day;  the  daily  retard- 
ation amounting  to  about  fifty  minutes.     The  moon 


THE   MOON.  255 

turns  upon  its  own  axis  in  about  the  same  time  that 
it  takes  to  revolve  about  the  earth,  and  so  shows  but 
one  side  to  the  earth.  The  moon  requires  nearly  a 
month  in  which  to  turn  once  upon  its  axis;  this  is 
therefore  the  length  of  the  lunar  day.  The  sun 
shines  without  intermission  upon  one  part  of  the 
moon  for  nearly  two  weeks,  and  then  sets,  to  remain 
absent  for  the  same  length  of  time.  The  extremes 
of  heat  and  cold  upon  the  lunar  surface  must  be 
therefore  very  great. 

The  peculiar  markings  so  readily  seen  upon  the 
face  of  the  full  moon  have  always  excited  the  interest 
of  even  superficial  observers.  We  remember  perhaps 
our  nursery  stories  about  the  "man  in  the  moon;" 
though  a  strong  imagination  is  required  to  picture 
any  human  form  upon  the  moon's  bright  face.  The 
telescope  shows  these  markings  to  be  due  to  numerous 
elevations  and  depressions  upon  the  surface;  there 
are  mountains  and  valleys  upon  the  moon  as  upon 
the  earth;  and  the  sides  of  many  such  inequalities 
are  steep  and  precipitous.  No  one  has  yet  succeeded, 
even  by  the  assistance  of  the  best  telescopes,  in  dis- 
covering the 'presence  of  water  upon  the  moon,  and 
if  water  be  entirely  absent  there  can  be  no  rain  or 
snow,  no  clouds  and  no  atmosphere  of  appreciable 
density. 

If  there  be  observers  on  the  moon,  the  earth  must 
present  to  them  a  spectacle  of  indescribable  gran- 
deur. When  its  illumined  sides  were  visible,  the 
earth  would  look  like  an  enormous  moon,  having 
four   times    the   diameter,   and    thirteen   times   the 


266  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

extent  of  surface  which  the  full  moon  has  to  us. 
The  earth  would  seem  to  assume  all  the  phases  which 
the  moon  presents  to  us.  There  would  be  ''full 
earth,"  and  "new  earth,"  and  all  intermediate 
shapes;  but  in  an  opposite  order  to  that  of  the 
moon.  Thus,  when  the  moon  is  to  us  new,  the 
earth  would  appear  full,  as  seen  from  the  moon, 
and  so  on.  The  effect  of  "earth-shine"  upon  the 
moon  is  easily  seen,  just  after  the  time  of  new  moon; 
the  brilliant  crescent  then  seems  to  embrace  within 
its  curve  the  feebly  illuminated  part  then  turned 
from  the  sun.  This  appearance  is  pleasantly  spoken 
of  as  "the  old  moon  in  the  new  moon's  arms;"  and 
it  is  produced  apparently  by  the  earth-shine  lighting 
up  the  lunar  surface.  The  dark  part  of  the  moon  is 
passing  through  its  time  of  night,  and  the  gloom  is 
lightened  by  the  light  reflected  from  the  surface  of 
the  earth. 

The  earth  would  not  seem  to  rise  and  set,  how- 
ever, as  seen  from  the  moon;  the  same  part  of  the 
moon  being  always  turned  toward  the  earth,  the 
latter  would  appear  always  in  the  same  quarter  of 
the  lunar  sky.  To  an  observer,  near  the  middle  of 
our  side  of  the  moon,  the  earth  would  seem  always 
to  be  overhead;  to  one  near  the  edge,  the  earth  would 
seem  to  be  on  the  horizon,  from  the  farther  side  of 
the  moon  the  earth  would  be  of  course  entirely 
invisible. 

ECLIPSES. 

The  movements  of  the  earth  and  moon  as  already 
described  explain  fully  the  common  phenomenon  of 


ECLIPSES.  257 

eclipses.  Eclipses  of  the  sun  are  caused  by  the  moou 
passiug  in  its  orbit  between  the  earth  and  the  sun, 
so  as  to  shut  off  the  light  of  the  latter,  and  cause 
darkness  upon  the  earth,  wherever  the  shadow  of  the 
moon  falls.  If  the  moon  appears  to  cover  the  entire 
surface  of  the  sun,  a  total  eclipse  results;  if  only  a 
portion  of  the  sun's  disc  be  obscured,  the  effect  is  to 
produce  a  partial  eclipse.  A  solar  eclipse,  as  is  seen 
from  this  explanation,  can  only  occur  when  the  moon 
and  the  sun  are  in  the  same  quarter  of  the  heavens; 
that  is  to  say  at  new  moon.  Some  disbelievers  in 
the  Bible  have  tried  to  explain  the  darkness  that  fell 
upon  the  earth  at  the  time  of  the  crucifixion  of 
Christ  as  the  result  of  an  eclipse  of  the  sun.  This, 
however,  could  not  possibly  be  the  cause,  for  the 
Jewish  Feast  of  the  Passover,  at  which  time  the 
crucifixion  took  place,  was  always  held  during  full 
moon;  and  at  such  time  no  solar  eclipse  was  possible. 

An  eclipse  of  the  moon  takes  place  whenever  that 
body  passes  into  the  shadow  of  the  earth;  and  this 
of  course  is  only  possible  at  the  time  of  full  moon 
when  the  moon  is  on  the  dark  side  of  the  earth.* 

By  a  careful  study  of  the  motions  of  the  earth  and 
moon,  astronomers  are  able  to  predict  eclipses  with 

*  "Eclipses,  especially  total  eclipses  of  the  sun  were 
greatly  dreaded  by  the  ancients;  and  are  still  dreaded  by 
uncivilized  peoples.  The  Hindoos  believe  that  in  a  solar 
eclipse,  some  monster  is  trying  to  swallow  the  sun.  At 
these  times  they  all  turn  out  with  gongs,  and  every  pos- 
sible noise-producing  instrument,  and  keep  up  the  loudest, 
and  most  hideous  noises,  until  the  frightened  monster 

disgorges  his  fiery  mouthful." — Sharpless  <t-  Philips. 
18 


258  FIRST  BOOK  OF  NATURE. 

great  accuracy  long  before  their  time  of  occurrence. 
It  is  related  by  several  reliable  authorities  that 
Columbus  once  profited  by  his  foreknowledge  of  an 
eclipse  of  the  moon  in  a  rather  remarkable  way.  In 
1504  he  was  wrecked  off  the  coast  of  Jamaica,  and 
all  attempts  by  persuasion  and  by  threat  to  procure 
food  and  assistance  from  the  natives  were  utterly  un- 
successful. He  told  the  savages  that  in  consequence 
of  their  unkind  treatment  of  him,  their  Great  Spirit 
was  angry  with  them,  and  would  that  night  darken 
the  moon  as  a  sign  of  His  displeasure.  When  the 
eclipse  began,  the  superstitious  Indians  were  greatly 
frightened,  and  hastened  to  do  all  in  their  power  for 
the  comfort  of  Columbus  and  his  crew,  beseeching 
him  to  ask  forgiveness  of  the  Deity  in  their  behalf. 


CHAPTER   XLIX. 

THE    STARS. 

_  ET  us  lift  our  eyes  toward  the  great  sky-dome 
upon  some  clear  night  when  the  moon  is  absent. 
Surely  none  but  an  infinite  power  can  count 
these  glimmering  lights;  these  "lamps  of  the 
universe"  as  they  have  so  appropriately  been  called. 
Think  of  those  unnumbered  worlds,  and  learn  that 
there  is  one  mind  supremely  great;  one  who  telleth 
the  number  of  the  stars,  and  calleth  them  all 
by  their  names.  But  not  alone  to  counting  does 
His  power  extend.  He  is  at  once  architect  and 
builder  of  this  imposing  structure  of  creation. 


THE  STARS.  259 

If  we  note  carefully  the  position  of  several  prom- 
inent stars  for  a  number  of  nights  in  succession,  we 
will  most  likely  discover  that  some  of  them  change 
their  position  relative  to  the  rest  from  night  to  night, 
just  as  the  moon  is  seen  to  apparently  move  among 
the  stars;  while  others, — and  these  the  greater  num- 
ber—seem to  retain  a  fixed  position,  never  appearing 
nearer  to  or  farther  from  thoir  neighbors.  The  wan- 
dering stars  first  referred  to  above  will  be  found  very 
near  the  daily  path  of  the  sun  in  the  heavens,  none 
of  them  are  seeu  far  to  the  north  or  the  south;  and 
these  have  been  called  planets, — the  name  meaning 
really  "rovers."  The  second  class  of  stars  are  called 
fixed  stars. 

All  the  great  family  of  planets  move  round  the  sun  in 
regular  order  and  at  a  fixed  speed,  each  accomplish- 
ing its  long  journey  always  in  the  same  interval  of 
time;  though  this  is  different  for  each  planet.  All 
of  these  wandering  stars  derive  their  heat  and  light 
from  the  same  great  luminary. 

There  is  Mercury,  which  of  all  known  stars  is  the 
nearest  to  the  sun.  It  moves  along  its  path  at  the 
surprising  speed  of  thirty  miles  a  second;  and  com- 
pletes its  orbital  journey  in  the  space  of  about  eighty- 
eight  days.  This,  then,  is  the  duration  of  the  Mer- 
curial year,  there  being  but  twenty-two  days  in  each 
season.  In  size,  this  body  is  about  one-sixteenth 
that  of  the  earth. 

The  next  planet  in  order  of  distance  from  the  sun 
is  Venus,  the  brightest  star  in  the  heavens,  though 
in  reality  not  nearly  so  large  as  the  earth.      She 


260  FIRST  BOOK  OF   NATURE. 

moves  about  the  sun,  however,  along  an  orbit  within 
that  of  the  earth,  and  consequently  receives  more 
solar  light  and  heat.  When  in  a  position  west  of 
the  sun,  she  rises  earlier  than  the  orb  of  day,  and  is 
known  as  the  "morning  star,"  but  when  moving  east 
of  the  sun,  she  is  seen  in  the  western  heavens  after 
sunset,  and  is  honored  by  the  title  of  "evening 
star."  Before  the  motions  of  Venus  had  been  care- 
fully studied,  these  two  appearances  were  supposed 
to  be  distinct  stars,  and  were  named  accordingly, 
Phosphorous  or  Lucifer,  the  Star  of  the  Morn,  and 
Vesper,  or  the  Star  of  Eve. 

Being  entirely  within  the  orbit  of  the  earth  in  all 
her  movements,  Venus  presents  in  different  positions 
all  the  phases  or  changes  of  the  moon.  Next  to  the 
orbit  of  Venus  comes  that  of  our  Earth;  for  though 
appearing  to  us  so  different  from  the  brilliant  stars 
of  the  sky,  the  world  we  inhabit  is  really  one  of  them, 
and  moves  in  obedience  to  the  same  laws  that  hold 
Venus  in  her  orbit,  and  that  urge  Mercury  along  its 
fiery  path.  And  beyond  our  earth  Mars,  the  ruddy 
star,  rolls  on  its  way.  This  planet  also  is  smaller 
than  the  earth — being  about  one  fourth  the  volume 
of  our  globe,  and  requiring  about  two  years  in  which 
to  complete  a  revolution  around  the  sun.  Still 
farther  off  in  space  is  Jupiter,  the  giant  planet, 
moving  in  majestic  state  along  its  prescribed  path, 
and  requiring  about  twelve  years  in  which  to  com- 
plete a  revolution.  This  enormous  world  is  fourteen 
hundred  times  as  large  as  ours;  its  volume  is  about 
one  tenth  that  of  the  sun.     Four  moons  attend  it 


THE   STARS.  iJ61 

along  its  path  and  reflect  the  rays  of  the  sun  upon 
its  surface. 

On  the  outside  of  this  orbit  is  that  of  Saturn, 
which  planet  is  surrounded  by  a  beautiful  ring,  and 
is  accompanied  by  eight  moons.  It  rolls  once  around 
the  sun  in  thirty  years.  Still  beyond,  are  Uranus 
and  Neptune)  the  former  making  a  revolution  about 
the  sun  once  in  eighty-four  years,  and  the  latter  in 
one  hundred  and  sixty-five. 

The  sun,  with  its  family  of  planets,  and  their 
satellites  or  moons,  constitutes  the  so-called  solar 
system.  Wonderful  as  are  these  circling  bodies,  and 
great  as  are  their  separating  distances,  this  system 
appears  to  be  but  one  among  many  in  the  boundless 
fields  of  space. 

From  what  can  be  learned  of  the  fixed  stars, 
they  are  all  self-luminous  bodies  like  our  sun;  and 
each  of  them  may  be  the  central  orb  of  a  vast 
system  of  planetary  bodies,  equal  to,  and  perhaps 
surpassing  our  own  in  grandeur.  Even  without 
assistance  to  our  vision  we  may  detect  many  patches 
of  hazy  starlight — almost  like  clouds.  The  telescope, 
turned  upon  such  a  foggy  field,  shows  it  to  be  but  a 
cluster  of  numerous  stars,  differing  widely  from  each 
other  in  size  and  brilliancy,  and  separated  by  dis- 
tances not  to  be  counted  in  miles. 

Figure  40  represents  such  a  misty  patch  in  the 
constellation  Toucan,  one  of  the  constellations  visi- 
ble in  the  southern  heavens.  To  the  naked  eye  this 
seems  nothing  more  than  a  very  faint  cloud;  but 
with   telescopic  aid  it  appears  to  be  composed    of 


262  FIRST  BOOK  OF/ NATURE. 

innumerable  points  'of  light,  each  telling   the  loca- 
tion of  a  bright  and  blazing  sun. 


Fig.  40.— Star  Cluster  in  the  Constellation  Toucan. 

The  Milky-way  or  Galaxy  may  be  seen  on  any 
moonless  night  stretching  across  the  heavens  as  part 
of  a  great  circle.  It  looks  ordinarily  like  a  ring  of 
misty  light,  but  the  telescope  shows  it  to  be  com- 
posed of  unnumbered  millions  of  stars  of  varying 
degrees  of  brightness. 

Beside  such,  there  are  in  the  heavens  numerous 
hazy  patches  which  even  the  most  powerful  instru- 
ments fail  to  resolve  into  any  appearance  but'that  of 
fog  or  mist.  These  are  called  Nebulae,  and  poeti- 
cally termed  "star  dust,"  though  their  true  nature 
man  is  unable  to  learn. 


THE  STARS.  263 

Figure  41  is  designed  to  represent  an  annular  or 
ring-like  nebula  in  the  constellation  of  Lyra.  The 
smaller  representation  gives  its  appearance  as  viewed 


Fig.  41.— Annular  Nebula  in  the  Constellation  Lyra, 
through  a  telescope  of  moderate  power,  and  the 
larger  picture  is  as  the  nebula  appeared  in  the  enor- 
mous Rosse  reflector.  The  outer  part  seems  to  con- 
sist of  separate  and  distinct  stars,  while  the  middle 
portions  seem  of  a  gauzy  or  filmy  nature  as  if  con- 
sisting of  tiny  particles.  "Tiny,"  we  say,  but  only 
by  comparison,  for  to  be  seen  at  all  at  that  enormous 
distance,  the  tiniest  speck  in  that  great  "ring  uni- 
verse" must  far  surpass  in  size  and  brilliancy  our 
effulgent  sun. 

The  distance  between  the  earth  and  the  nearest 
fixed  star  is  estimated  at  20,000,000,000,000  miles; 
but  what  does  such  a  number  signify  to  our  finite 
minds?  Light  travels  through  space  at  the  incon- 
ceivable velocity  of  186,000  miles  per  second,  a  speed 
sufficient  to  encircle  the  globe  seven  times  while  a 
watch  ticks  once.  Light  passes  from  the  sun  to  the 
earth  in  eight  minutes;  but  not  less  than  three  and 


264  FIRST  BOOK   OF   NATURE. 

a  half  years  must  elapse  while  light  travels  from  the 
nearest  fixed  star  to  the  earth;  over  forty-five  years 
are  required  for  us  to  receive  light  from  the  Polar 
Star;  and  the  luminous  rays  that  come  to  us  from 
many  of  the  farthest  stars,  must  have  set  out  on 
their  journey  centuries  ago. 

If  such  be  the  wonders  of  matter,  how  passing 
wonder  must  be  He  who  made  all  such !  The  Creator 
of  all  we  see,  according  to  whose  word  the  heavenly 
spheres  are  formed  and  the  forces  of  the  universe  are 
governed — He  is  our  Father;  and  it  is  He  whom  we 
profess  to  worship. 


CHAPTER  L. 

CONCLUSION. 


|HE  pages  of  our  little  volume  are  nearly  com- 
plete. In  their  course  we  have  bestowed  some 
attention  upon  a  few  of  the  unnumbered  objects 
of  our  Father's  creations.  We  have  spoken  of 
the  animals,  plants,  and  minerals  of  earth,  and  also  of 
the  brilliant  orbs  of  the  sky.  In  the  contemplation 
of  all  these,  we  have  seen  unmistakable  proof  of  a 
wise  and  powerful  direction;  the  hand-marks  of  a 
Creator  are  left  upon  the  fabric  of  Nature  in  every 
part;  all  things,  the  small  and  the  great,  declare 
with  one  accord  the  wisdom  of  the  Almighty  Mind 
that  called  them  into  being. 

At   every   step   in   his   attempts    to    fathom    the 


CONCLUSION.  265 

"thoughts  of  God,"  as  expressed  in  the  visible  forms 
of  creation,  the  student  finds  himself  on  the  verge  of 
the  unknown;  he  feels  ever  as  if  traversing  the  frontier 
of  an  unexplored  realm  of  truth;  and  without  the  aid 
of  a  Divine  director  he  is  apt  to  wander  into  danger- 
ous paths.  But  to  the  thoughtful  and  prayerful 
pupil,  the  Master  is  ever  ready  to  impart  knowledge 
and  power.  Knowledge  has  no  permanent  value  only 
so  far  as  it  insures  to  its  possessor  a  firmer  reliance 
and  a  more  implicit  trust  in  the  wisdom  and  might 
of  his  heavenly  Parent. 

To  the  thoughtful  observer,  there  is  more  than 
melody  in  the  throbbing  ecstasy  of  the  singing  bird; 
there  is  much  beyond  grace  of  movement,  and 
brilliancy  of  hue  in  the  flitting  butterfly;  the  flower  is 
more  in  his  eye  than  a  bunch  of  pretty  leaves  upon 
a  stalk,  such  as  a  skillful  artist  might  in  some  degree 
imitate  with  wax  and  paint;  to  him,  the  sun  by  day, 
and  the  moon  and  stars  by  night  are  not  mere  lamps 
to  light  the  world — in  all  of  these  he  sees  and  recog- 
nizes the  existence  of  a  perfect  design,  that  could 
have  originated  only  in  the  mind  of  Omniscience. 

Well  has  it  been  said,  that  order  is  Heaven's  first 
law;  and  the  second  is  like  unto  it,  that  everything 
in  nature  has  a  purpose;  these  constitute  the  sum  of 
all  science.  This  is  Nature's  hymn  of  praise  to  the 
Creator,  chanted  by  the  lowly  objects  of  earth  no 
less  than  by  the  majestic  worlds  of  the  universe,  "in 
Him  we  live  and  move  and  have  our  being." 


••_K<^ 


^ 


4S     T3    1888 
First  book  of  nature. 
Talmage.  James  Edward 
1862-1933. 


;i4O40»>788Or>lS